Table of Contents

DIGITAL CAMERA

Instruction Manual
Ver.1.7

1.

Preparation2.

Shooting

3.

Using the Menus

4.

Shooting Settings

5.

Playback

6.

Customizing the Camera

7.

Setting Up the Camera

8.

Connecting the Camera toExternal Devices

9.

Cautions

10. Information
11. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
Additions/modifications by

12. firmware update

Model No. : IM027
Thank you for purchasing our digital camera. Before you start to use your new camera, please
read these instructions carefully to enjoy optimum performance and a longer service life.
Be sure you have read and understood the contents of “11. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS”, before
using this product. Keep these instructions available for future reference.
We recommend that you take test shots to get accustomed to your camera before taking important
photographs.
The screen and camera illustrations shown in this manual were produced during the development
stages and may differ from the actual product.
If there are additions and/or modifications of functions due to firmware update for the camera, thecontents will differ. For the latest information, please visit our website.

Before You Begin
Read and Follow Safety Precautions

Before You Begin

To prevent incorrect operation resulting in fire or other damage to property or harm to
yourself or to others, read “11. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS” (P. 333) in its entirety before
using the camera.
While using the camera, consult this manual to ensure safe and correct operation. Be
sure to keep the manual in a safe place once it is read.
Our company will not be held liable for violations of local regulations arising from use ofthis product outside the country or region of purchase.
Wireless LAN and Bluetooth®

The camera features built-in wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features
outside the country or region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations; besure to check with local authorities before use. Our company will not be held liable forthe user’s failure to comply with local regulations.
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in areas where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling the camera’s wireless communication (Airplane Mode)” (P. 260)
 User Registration
Visit our website for information on registering your products.
 Installing PC Software/Apps
OM Workspace
This computer application is used to download and view photos and movies recordedwith the camera. It can also be used to update the camera firmware. The software can be
downloaded from our website. Be prepared to provide the camera serial number when
downloading the software.
OM Image Share
You can load images in the camera that have been marked for sharing (P. 195) to asmartphone.
You can also operate the camera remotely and take pictures from a smartphone.
Visit our website for information about the application.

2 EN

Product Manuals
Product Manuals

Instruction Manual (this pdf)
A how-to guide to the camera and its features. The Instruction
Manual can be downloaded from our website or directly using the“OM Image Share” smartphone app.

EN 3

About This Manual
About This Manual

How to find what you want to know
You can use the following methods to find what you want to know in this manual.
Search method

Where to lookg

Search based on what you want to do

Table of Contents

P. 6

Search based on names of buttons
and parts of the camera

Names of parts

P. 15

Search based on menus and terms
displayed on the monitor

Default Settings

P. 311

Search based on words

Index

P. 340How to read this manual Shooting modes in which the function is available
In each explanation of a shooting function, the shooting modes in which the function
can be used are shown at the beginning. The shooting modes in which the function canbe used are shown in black. The shooting modes in which the function cannot be used
are shown in gray.
Taking Pictures Using the Shooting Modes
Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)
PA S M B n

2

1

Rotate the mode dial to P.

2

Focus and check the display.
• Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 106)
Rear dial: Program shift (P. 44)• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the
F button. Press the F button and then rotate the frontor rear dial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

Shooting

The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.

Availabilityof thefunctionin eachshooting
mode

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

 How to set the function
The procedures for setting each function is described at the beginning of the
explanation of the function. For details, see “How to operate the menus” (P. 63) andpictures.
3 Take(Direct“How to change the shooting settings
buttons/Super Control Panel)” (P. 66).
3P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

%You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g "Assigning Roles
to the Front and Rear Dials(KDial Function / nDial Function)" (P. 216)
%You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever canalso be assigned other roles. g "Customizing the Fn Lever(Fn Lever Settings)"(P. Choosing
219)
how the camera measures brightness(Metering)

PA S M B n

You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
ButtonAF m button n FGk

Super Control Panel

Q n Metering

Menu

MENU n _ n5. Metering n Metering
Digital ESP
metering

Suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The
camera meters 324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal
exposure taking into consideration the nature of the scene.

B

Center weighted
averagingmetering

Suited to compositions that place the main
subject at the center of the frame. The camera
sets exposure based on the average light level
for the entire frame while assigning the greatest
weight to the area in the center.

4

EN 43

C

Spot metering

Use a specific area of the subject meter
exposure. The camera meters a small portion(approximately 2%) of the frame.

CHi

Spot metering(highlight)

Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.

CSh

Spot metering(shadow)

Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.

%The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g “"Metering the Focus
Target (NSpot Metering)" (P. 112)

4 EN

Locking the exposure

Shooting Settingsp(AE Lock)

PA S M B n

You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL button. Use this when you want toadjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images atthe same exposure.

How toset thefunction Symbols in this manual
The following symbols are used throughout this manual.
FGHI

Symbols designating the buttons (respectively the up, down, left,
and right arrow buttons) to press on the arrow pad.
Represents operation of the front dial.

jRepresents operation of the rear dial.

T

Represents placing a finger lightly on the multi selector and pivoting
it in the desired direction.

S

Represents pressing down on the center of the multi selector muchas you would a button.

#

Cautions and limitations.

!

Tips and other helpful information for using the camera.

g

References to other pages in this manual.

About This ManualkRear dial

Front dialMulti selector
Arrow pad

 About the screen illustrations in this manual
The camera monitor displays the super control panel (P. 69) by default. The screen
illustrations in this manual, however, show the live view display.
See “Switching between displays” (P. 37) for how to display the shooting screen on
the monitor.

EN 5

Table of Contents
Table of Contents

Before You Begin2

Product Manuals

3

About This Manual4

How to find what you want toknow................................................4
How to read this manual.................4

Names of parts

15

1. Preparation

17

Unpacking the box contents......17
Attaching the Strap.....................18
Attaching Cable Protectors........19
Inserting and removing thebattery..........................................20
Inserting the battery......................20
Removing the battery....................21
Charging the Battery using the
supplied USB-AC adapter...........22
Charging the Battery using a
USB Device..................................23
Inserting and removing thecard...............................................24
Inserting the card...........................24
Removing the card........................25
Using Two Memory Cards.............25
Usable cards.................................25
Attaching and removing
lenses...........................................26
Attaching a lens to the camera......26
Removing Lenses..........................28
Using the monitor........................29
Turning the camera on................30
Sleep Mode...................................30

6 EN

Initial setup..................................31
What to Do If You Can’t Readthe Display...................................33

2. Shooting

34

Information displays whileshooting.......................................34
Switching between displays.......37
Switching the information
display...........................................38
Shooting still pictures.................39
Types of shooting modes..............39
Shooting with touch screen
operations......................................41
Photo Review (Image Review)......42
Taking Pictures Using theShooting Modes..........................43
Letting the camera choose
aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)............................43
Choosing aperture(A: Aperture-Priority AE)...............45
Choosing shutter speed(S: Shutter-Priority AE).................47
Choosing aperture and shutter
speed (M: Manual Exposure)........49
Long Exposures (B: Bulb/Time)....51
Lighten Blending (B: Live
Composite Photography)..............54
Saving Custom Settings to
the Mode Dial (C1/C2/C3/C4
Custom Modes)...........................56
Saving Settings (Assign toCustom Mode)...............................56
Using Custom Modes(C1/C2/C3/C4)............................57
Recording Movies.......................59
Recording movies in movie mode(n)...............................................59

Recording movies in photoshooting modes.............................61
Touch Controls (Silent Controls)....62

63

What you can do with menus.....63
How to operate the menus.........63

4. Shooting Settings

66

How to change the shooting
settings (Direct buttons/Super
Control Panel)..............................66
Direct Buttons................................66
The Super Control Panel/LV
Super Control Panel......................69
Basic functions for focusing......72
Choosing a focus mode
(KAF Mode / nAF Mode)..........72
Choosing a Focus Target(AF Target Point)...........................76
Choosing an AF Target Mode
(AF Target Mode)..........................77
Setting the options for AF target
modes(KAF Target Mode Settings).......79
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF(Super Spot AF).............................80
Functions for configuring how
to focus........................................82
Combined Auto and Manual
Focus (K AF+MF).......................82
Configuring the AF operation
when the shutter button ispressed(KAF by half-pressing a)...........83
Autofocus using the AF-ON
button............................................83
Using Autofocus in Manual Focus
Mode (e in MF mode)...............84
Configuring camera operation
when it cannot focus on thesubject (Release Priority)..............84

Functions for customizing AF
operation to fit the subject.........86
C‑AF Center Target Priority(KC-AF Center Priority)..............86
C‑AF Tracking Sensitivity(KC-AF Sensitivity / nC-AF
Sensitivity).....................................87
C-AF Focus Speed(nC-AF Speed)............................87
Face priority AF/Eye priority AF(Face & Eye Detection).................88
Tracking Focus on Selected
Subjects (Subject Detection).........90
Configuring the frame displaysfor detected eyes
(Eye Detection Frame)..................91

Table of Contents

3. Using the Menus

Changing the settings of Starry
Sky AF (Starry Sky AF Setting).....85

Functions for changing camera
operation regarding focus..........92
Lens Focus Range(KAF Limiter)..............................92
C-AF Lens Scanning(KAF Scanner)............................94
Fine-Tuning Autofocus(KAF Focus Adjustment)............95
AF Illuminator Autofocus Assist(AF Illuminator)..............................96
AF Target Display Mode
(AF Area Pointer)...........................96
Functions for setting the
focusing position........................97
Matching AF Target Selection
to Camera Orientation(KOrientation Linked N)..........97
Choosing the AF Home Position(KN Set Home)........................98
AF Target Selection(NSelect Screen Settings)..........99
Enabling AF Target Selection
Wrap (N Loop Settings)...........100
Touch AF Target Selection for
Viewfinder Photography(AF Targeting Pad)......................101
EN 7

Table of Contents

Other functions that are usefulwhen focusing...........................102
Manual Focus Assist(MF Assist)..................................102
Focus Peaking Options(Peaking Settings).......................103
Choosing a Focus Distance for
Preset MF(Preset MF distance)...................104
Disabling the MF Clutch(MF Clutch)..................................104
Lens Focus Direction(Focus Ring)................................104
Resetting the Lens Position at
Shutdown (Reset Lens)...............105
Metering and Exposure.............106
Controlling exposure(Exposure Compensation)..........106
EV Steps for Exposure Control(EV Step).....................................107
Fine-Tuning Exposure(Exposure Shift)...........................107
Reducing Flicker Under LED
Lighting (KFlicker Scan /nFlicker Scan)...........................108
Choosing how the camera
measures brightness(Metering)....................................109
Locking the exposure(AE Lock).....................................109
AE Lock Exposure Metering(Metering during B)................. 110
Releasing AE Lock after shooting(B Auto Reset)........................ 110
Locking exposure when the
shutter button is pressed halfway(AEL by half-pressing a)............ 111
Setting metering options forsequential shooting(Metering during j).................. 112
Metering the Focus Target(NSpot Metering)...................... 112
Changing ISO sensitivity(ISO)............................................ 113

8 EN

EV Steps for ISO Sensitivity
Control (ISO Step)....................... 114
Setting the range of ISO
sensitivity values selected in[Auto] mode
(KISO-A Upper/Default /bISO-A Upper/Default)........... 114
Setting the shutter speed atwhich the camera automaticallyraises ISO sensitivity(KISO-A Lowest S/S)................ 115
Choosing the modes in which[Auto] can be used for ISO
sensitivity(KISO-Auto / bISO-Auto)..... 115
High ISO Noise Reduction
Options (KNoise Filter /nNoise Filter)............................ 116
Image Processing Options(Low ISO Processing)................. 116
Long Exposure Noise Reduction
Options (Noise Reduction).......... 117
Flash photography.................... 118
Using a flash(Flash photography).................... 118
Choosing a Flash Mode
(Flash Mode)...............................120
Configuring flash modes(Flash Mode Settings).................123
Adjusting flash output(Flash Exposure Comp.).............123
Wireless Remote Flash Control(# RC Mode)..............................124
Choosing a Flash Sync Speed(# X-Sync.).................................124
Choosing the Minimum Shutter
Speed (# Slow Limit)..................124
Flash and Exposure
Compensation (x+F)..............124
Setting the exposure balance for
TTL metering(Balanced Flash Metering)..........125
Sequential Shooting/Self-Timer...................................126
Performing the sequential/
self-timer shooting.......................126

Image Stabilization....................136
Reducing camera shake(KImage Stabilizer / nImage
Stabilizer)....................................136
Image stabilization options(nIS Level)................................137
Half-press image stabilization(aImage Stabilizer)....................138
Burst mode image stabilization(jImage Stabilizer)..................138
Displaying camera motion on themonitor (Handheld Assist)...........139
Image Stabilization for IS Lenses(Lens I.S. Priority)........................139
Color and Quality......................140
Setting the Quality of Photos andMovies (KK / nK)............140
Combinations of JPEG image
sizes and compression rates(KK Detailed Settings)...........143
Choosing the codec forrecording movies(nVideo Codec).........................144
Setting the image aspect(Image Aspect)............................144
Peripheral illumination(Shading Comp.).........................144
Processing options (KPicture
Mode / nPicture Mode).............145

Choosing which options are
displayed when selecting a
picture mode
(KPicture Mode Settings).........149
Adjusting color(WB (white balance))...................150
Locking the white balance inmovie mode
(nButton Function: WLock).....153
Making fine adjustments to whitebalance (KAll x/nAll x)........153
Preserving the warm tones ofincandescent lighting when in
WB Auto mode
(KW Keep Warm Color/nW
Keep Warm Color).......................154
Flash White Balance (#+WB)....154
Setting the color reproduction
format (Color Space)...................155
Preview Options for Movie
Picture Modes( nView Assist).......................155

Table of Contents

Configuring the sequential
shooting functions(Sequential Shooting Settings)....128
Configuring the self-timer
functions (Self-timer Settings).....130
Shooting without the vibration
caused by shutter button
operations(Anti-Shockr Settings)..............131
Shooting without shutter sound(Silents Settings)......................132
Shooting without a release timelag (Pro Capture shooting)..........133
Reducing Flicker in Photographs(Anti-Flicker Shooting).................135

Special shooting modes(Computational Modes) ...........156
Shooting still pictures in a higher
resolution (High Res Shot)..........156
Slowing the Shutter in BrightLight (Live ND Shooting).............158
Increasing Depth of Field(Focus Stacking).........................160
Taking HDR (High Dynamic
Range) images (HDR).................162
Recording multiple exposures ina single image(Multiple Exposure).....................163
Digital Zoom
(KDigital Tele-converter /nDigital Tele-converter).............166
Shooting automatically with afixed interval(Interval Shooting).......................167
Keystone correction andperspective control(Keystone Comp.).......................170
Correcting Fisheye Distortion(Fisheye Compensation).............171
EN 9

Table of Contents

Configuring BULB/TIME/COMP
Settings(BULB/TIME/COMP Settings).....173
Recording a series of shots withvaried exposure (AE BKT)...........174
Recording pictures with varied
white balance (WB BKT).............175
Recording pictures with varied
flash level (FL BKT).....................175
Recording pictures with varied
ISO sensitivity (ISO BKT)............176
Recording copies of one picturewith different art filters applied(ART BKT)...................................177
Recording pictures with different
focus positions (Focus BKT).......178
Functions that are only
available in movie mode...........180
Sound Recording Options(Sound Recording Settings)........180
Adjusting the headphone volume(Headphone Volume)..................181
Time Codes(Time Code Settings)..................181
HDMI Output(nHDMI Output)........................182
Displaying a + mark in the centerof the screen while recording
movies (Center Marker)...............183
Displaying zebra patterns overhigh luminance areas while
recording movies(Zebra Pattern Settings)..............184
Displaying a red frame while
recording movies(Red Frame during RREC)........185

5. Playback

186

Information display during
playback.....................................186
Playback image information........186
Switching the information
display.........................................187

10 EN

Viewing photographs andmovies........................................188
Viewing photographs...................188
Watching movies.........................189
Finding Pictures Quickly(Index and Calendar Playback)...189
Zooming In (Playback Zoom)......190
Playback Using Touch
Controls......................................191
Full-frame playback.....................191
Index/Calendar playback.............191
Other functions............................192
Setting playback functions.......193
Rotating Pictures (Rotate)...........193
Protecting Pictures (0)............193
Copying an image (Copy)...........193
Copying all images on a card
(Copy All).....................................194
Deleting Pictures (Erase)............194
Deleting All Pictures (Erase All)...194
Disabling Deletion Confirmation(Quick Erase)..............................195
RAW+JPEG Deletion Options(RAW+JPEG Erase)....................195
Selecting Pictures for Sharing(Share Order)..............................195
Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures
for Sharing (RAW+JPEG h).......196
Rating Pictures (Rating)..............196
Selecting the numbers of stars to
be used for rating(Rating Settings)..........................197
Selecting Multiple Pictures(Share Order Selected, Rating
Selected, 0, Copy Select,
Erase Selected)...........................197
Print order (DPOF)......................198
Resetting all protection/shareorders/print orders/ratings(Reset All Images).......................198
Adding Audio to Pictures (R).......199
Retouching Pictures (Edit)...........200

Power Zoom Lenses(Electronic Zoom Settings)..........222
Locking the v Button (vLock)...223
Choosing What Happens When
the Shutter Button Is Pressed
During Live View Zoom
(LV Close Up Mode)....................223
Choosing the Behavior of theControl Used for Depth-of-Field
Preview (zLock).........................224
Button Hold Options(Press-and-hold Time).................224

6. Customizing the Camera
208

Functions for Configuring
Information Display...................228
Selecting the display style of the
viewfinder (EVF Style).................228
Shooting Indicators (KInfo
Settings / nInfo Settings)...........230
Configuring the display for when
the shutter button is pressedhalfway(Info by half-pressing a).............231
Viewfinder Info Display Options(VKInfo Settings)....................232
Displaying the Level Gauge when
the shutter button is pressedhalfway (Va Level Gauge).......233
Framing Guide Options(KGrid Settings / nGrid
Settings)......................................234

Functions for Configuring
Camera Controls.......................208
Changing the roles of buttons(Button Settings)..........................208
Assigning Roles to the Front andRear Dials(KDial Function / nDial
Function).....................................216
Changing the Dial Direction(Dial Direction).............................218
Changing the Functions of theMulti Selector(Multi Selector Settings)..............218
Customizing the Fn Lever(Fn Lever Settings)......................219

Table of Contents

Combining Pictures(Image Overlay)...........................203
Trimming movies(Movie Trimming).........................204
Creating Movie Stills(In-Movie Image Capture)...........204
Changing the role of the R (H)button during playback(qRFunction)...........................205
Changing the roles of the front
and rear dials during playback(qDial Function)........................205
Choosing the Playback Zoom
Ratio (qaDefault Setting)........205
Automatically rotating portraitorientation pictures for playback(R).............................................205
Choosing the information
displayed during playback(qInfo Settings).........................206
Choosing the information
displayed during magnified
playback(qaInfo Settings).....................206
Configuring the index display(G Settings)...............................207

Functions for adjusting the live
view display...............................225
Changing the look of the display(KLV Mode)...............................225
Making the display easier to see
in dark places(KNight Vision)..........................225
Viewfinder Display Rate
(Frame Rate)...............................225
Art Filter Preview(Art LV Mode)..............................226
Reducing Flicker in Live View
(Anti-Flicker LV)...........................226
Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)..........227

EN 11

Table of Contents

Viewfinder Framing Grid Options(VKGrid Settings)...................235
Choosing the Settings Available
via Multi-Fn(Multi Function Settings)..............236
Histogram Exposure Warning(Histogram Settings)....................236
Settings related to operationand display of menus................237
Configuring the cursor on themenu screen(Menu Cursor Settings)...............237
Choosing how to move between
pages with the rear dial(g Loop in Menu Tab)................238[Yes]/[No] Default(Priority Set)................................238“My Menu” Settings..................239
Using “My Menu”.........................239

7. Setting Up the Camera 241
Card/Folder/File Settings..........241
Formatting the card
(Card Formatting)........................241
Setting the card to record to(KCard Slot Settings / nCard
Slot Settings)...............................242
Specifying a folder to saveimages in(Assign Save Folder)...................244
File Naming Options(File Name)..................................244
Naming Files (Edit Filename)......245
User information........................246
Saving lens info
(Lens Info Settings).....................246
Output Resolution(dpi Settings)...............................247
Adding Copyright Information(Copyright Info.)...........................247
Monitor/Sound/Connection
Settings......................................249

12 EN

Disabling Touch Controls(Touchscreen Settings)................249
Monitor Brightness and Hue(Monitor Adjust)...........................249
Viewfinder Brightness and Hue(EVF Adjust)................................250
Configuring the eye sensor(Eye Sensor Settings).................250
Disabling the Focus Beep (8)...251
External Monitor Display Options(HDMI Settings)...........................251
Choosing a USB Connection
Mode (USB Settings)...................252
Battery/Sleep Settings..............253
Displaying Battery Status(NBattery Status).....................253
Setting which Battery Is Used
First (NBattery Priority).............253
Changing the battery level
display during movie recording(nNDisplay Pattern)...............253
Dimming the Backlight(Backlit LCD)...............................254
Setting Sleep (Power Saving)
Options (Sleep)...........................254
Setting Auto Power Off Options(Auto Power Off)..........................254
Reducing Power Consumption(Quick Sleep Mode).....................255
Reset/Clock/Language/Others
Settings......................................257
Restoring Default Settings(Reset/Initialize Settings).............257
Setting the Camera Clock(X Settings)................................257
Choosing a Language(W)...........................................257
Calibrating the Level Gauge(Level Adjust)...............................258
Image Processing Check(Pixel Mapping)...........................258
Viewing the Firmware Version(Firmware Version)......................258

Viewing Certificates(Certification)...............................258

Precautions for Using Wi‑Fi
and Bluetooth® ..........................259
Disabling the camera’s wirelesscommunication(Airplane Mode)...........................260
Connecting the camera to asmartphone................................260
Pairing the Camera andSmartphone(Wi-Fi Connection)......................261
Wireless Connection Standby
Setting for When the Camera Is
On (Bluetooth).............................262
Wireless Settings for When the
Camera Is Off(Power-off Standby)....................263
Transferring images to asmartphone.................................264
Automatically uploading images
while the camera is off.................264
Shooting remotely with asmartphone (Live View)...............265
Shooting remotely with asmartphone (Remote Shutter).....265
Adding position information toimages.........................................266
Resetting smartphone connection
settings (Reset d Settings)..........266
Changing the password(d Connection Password)...........267
Connecting to Computers via
Wi‑Fi............................................267
Installing Software.......................267
Readying the Computer(Windows)...................................268
Pairing the Computer with the
Camera (New Link).....................269
Adjusting Wi‑Fi Settings(Wi-Fi Connection)......................271

Using the Remote Control........279
Names of parts............................279
Connection..................................279
Shooting from the remotecontrol..........................................281
MAC address of the remotecontrol..........................................282
Precautions for using the remotecontrol..........................................282

Table of Contents

8. Connecting the Camera
to External Devices
259

Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken...........................................276
Ending the Connection................278

Connecting to Computers via
USB.............................................283
Installing Software.......................283
Uploading Pictures as They Are
Taken (0RAW/Control).........284
Connecting the Camera for HighSpeed RAW Processing(0RAW/Control)....................285
Copying Pictures to theComputer (Storage/MTP)............286
Powering the Camera via USB(USB Power Delivery)................287
Connecting to TVs or External
Displays via HDMI.....................288
Viewing Pictures on a TV
(HDMI).........................................288

9. Cautions

289

Information about Dust andWater Resistant Features.........289
Battery and charger..................290
Using your charger abroad......290

10. Information

291

Interchangeable lenses.............291
MF Clutch Lenses......................292
Camera Displays for Lens SET
and CALL Functions.................293
Optional Accessories................294
EN 13

Table of Contents

Using the charger (BCX-1)..........294
HLD-10 Power Battery Holder.....295
Notes on using this product.........296
Designated External Flash
Units............................................297
Wireless remote control flash
photography................................298
Other external flash units............300
Principal Accessories..................301
System chart..............................302
Cleaning and storing thecamera........................................304
Cleaning the camera...................304
Storage........................................304
Cleaning and checking the image
pickup device...............................305
Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions.........305
Shooting tips and information.306
Error codes................................309
Default Settings......................... 311
Super Control Panel.................... 311_ Tab........................................313‘ Tab........................................316
AF Tab........................................317
n Tab.........................................319
q Tab........................................320
G Tab..........................................321
e Tab...........................................325
Memory Card Capacity.............327
Specifications............................330

14 EN

11. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS333
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS...........333

12. Additions/modifications
by firmware update
338
Index

340

Names of parts
b

3

c

4
5
6
7
8
9
0
a
1 Mode dial lock..................................P. 39
2 Mode dial.........................................P. 39
3 F (Exposure compensation) button...............................P. 43, 45, 47, 50, 106
4 R (Movie)/ h (High Res Shot)/H (selection) button...................................P. 59/P. 156/P. 197
5 Shutter button..................................P. 39
6 Front dial (k)................... P. 43 – 50, 63, 188, 205, 216, 218
7 Self-timer lamp/AF illuminator..............................................P. 126/P. 96
8 Y (One-touch white balance) button.......................................................P. 152
9 Z (Preview) button........................P. 224
0 Lens attachment mark.....................P. 26
a Mount (Remove the body cap before
attaching the lens.)b Stereo microphone................P. 180, 199
c ON/OFF lever.................................P. 30

d
l
e
f
g
h
i
j
k

Names of parts

1
2

m
n
o

d v button........................................P. 223
AFm (AF/metering mode) button.......................................................P. 109
jY# (Sequential shooting/self-timer/
flash) button...........................P. 120, 126e External flash terminal...................P. 119
f Microphone jack coverg Cover for headphone jack.............P. 181
h Connector coveri Strap eyelet.....................................P. 18
j Lens release button.........................P. 28
k Lens lock pin
l Microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo minijack for third-party microphones)....P. 180
m Headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo minijack for third-party headphones)....P. 181
n HDMI connector (Type D)...........................................P. 182, P. 288
o USB connector (Type C)...................................P. 22, 23, 283, 287

EN 15

9
0
a
b
c
d
e

1

Names of parts

2
3
4

f
g

5
6
7

h
i

8

j

o
p
k
q
l

r
m
n

1 Diopter adjustment dial....................P. 37
2 MENU button..................................P. 63
3 u (LV) button...............................P. 37
4 Monitor (Touch screen).............................P. 34, 37, 41, 101, 191
5 Viewfinder................................P. 37, 228
6 Eye sensor
7 Eyecup...........................................P. 301
8 D (Erase) button...........................P. 194
9 Hot shoe................................P. 119, 300
0 AEL / 0 (Protect) button............................................P. 109/P. 193
a Fn lever............................P. 43 – 49, 219
b AF-ON button.......................P. 83, P. 84
c Rear dial (j)................. P. 43 – 50, 63, 188, 205, 216, 218
d ISO / f (Rating) button............................................P. 113/P. 196

16 EN

s
e Multi selector (S/T)..............P. 76, 218
f Arrow pad (FGHI)...................P. 188
g Q button...........................P. 63, 69, 188h INFO button..................P. 38, P. 65, 187
i q (Playback) button.....................P. 188
j Speaker
k Power battery holder (PBH) cover.......................................................P. 295
l Tripod socketm Battery compartment cover.............P. 20
n Battery compartment lock................P. 20
o Battery charge lamp........................P. 23
p Card compartment cover.................P. 24
q Card slot 1.......................................P. 24
r Card slot 2.......................................P. 24
s Remote cable terminal cover(Remote cable terminal)................P. 279

1 Preparation
Unpacking the box contents

CameraBody cap *EP-18 eyecup *Hot shoe cover *1
Preparation

At purchase, the package contains the camera and the following accessories.
If anything is missing or damaged, contact the dealer from whom you purchased thecamera.

Strap

or

CB-USB13 USB cable

BLX-1 rechargeable
lithium-ion battery

USB-AC adapter
F-7AC• Warranty Card

CC-1 cable clip

CP-2 cable protector

Basic Manual* The body cap, eyecup, and hot shoe cover attached to or inserted in the camera.
# Contents may vary depending on purchase location.

# The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery beforeuse (P. 22).

EN 17

Attaching the Strap

1

1

Before attaching the strap, remove the end
from the keeper loop and loosen the strap
as shown.

Preparation

Keeper loop

2

Pass the end of the strap through the strap
eyelet and back through the keeper loop.

3

Pass the end of the strap through the buckle and tighten as shown.

• Attach the other end of the strap to the other eyelet.
• After attaching the strap, pull on it firmly to ensure that it will not come loose.

18 EN

Attaching Cable Protectors
Attach the supplied cable protectors when connecting the supplied USB and HDMI
cables. This prevents accidental disconnection and damage to the connectors.

Mount the cable protector on the camera.

2

Tighten the screw.

3

Clip the cable clip to the cable and attach the clip to the strap.

1
Preparation

1• The clip attaches to the buckle.

2
1

EN 19

Inserting and removing the battery

1

Inserting the battery
Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in
the OFF position.

2

Open the battery compartment cover.

Preparation

1

Battery compartment cover

2

1
Battery compartment lock

3

20 EN

Loading the battery.
# Use only BLX-1 batteries(P. 17, 332).

Direction indicating mark

4

Close the battery
compartment cover.
# Be sure the battery
compartment coveris closed before
using the camera.

12

Preparation%It is recommended to set aside a backup battery for prolonged shooting in case thebattery in use drains.
%Also read “Battery and charger” (P. 290).

1

Removing the battery
Turn off the camera before opening or closing the battery
compartment cover. To remove the battery, first push thebattery lock knob in the direction of the arrow and thenremove.
# Never remove batteries or memory cards while thememory card access indicator (P. 34) is displayed.
# Contact an authorized distributor or service center if you
are unable to remove the battery. Do not use force.

Battery lock knob

EN 21

Charging the Battery using the supplied USB-AC adapter

1# The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery beforeuse.

1

Preparation

Check that the battery is in the camera, and connect the USB cable andUSB-AC adapter.
• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable protector and cable clip toprevent damage to the connectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 19)%Refrain from using anything other than the USB cable (CB-USB13) supplied with thecamera or sold separately.
AC outlet

USB-AC adapter(supplied)

USB cable(supplied)

USB connector• The battery charge lamp lights during charging.
Charging with the camera turned off takes about 2hours 30 minutes. The lamp goes out as the batteries
reach full charge. Remove the USB cable from thecamera.
# If a charging error occurs, the battery charge lamp will
blink. Disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
%The battery will be charged regardless of whether the camera is turned on or off.
The charging time will be longer if the camera is on.
%Charging stops when the battery temperature is too high. It will resume after the battery
temperature falls.
%A charger (BCX-1: sold separately) can be used to charge the battery (P. 294).
%For safety reasons, charging may take longer, or the battery may not reach full charge,
when the battery is charged in a high-temperature environment.

# The USB-AC Adapter• Be sure to unplug the USB-AC adapter for cleaning. Leaving the USB-AC adapter
plugged in during cleaning could result in injury or electric shock.

22 EN

Charging the Battery using a USB Device
The battery inserted in the camera will charge when the camera is connected via a
USB cable to a USB PD-compliant USB device.
 Charging via USB

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Connect the camera to the USB device using a
USB cable.

Preparation

1

1• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable
protector and cable clip to prevent damage to theconnectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 19)• The battery charge lamp lights during charging.
Charging times vary with the output of the USB device.
The lamp goes out as the batteries reach full charge.

# If a charging error occurs, the battery charge lamp will blink. Disconnect and reconnect
the USB cable.
%The supply of power ends when the battery is charged. Disconnect and reconnect theUSB cable to resume charging.
%The camera can be powered using mobile batteries or similar devices connected via USB.

For more information, see “Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)”(P. 287).

EN 23

Inserting and removing the card1

Inserting the card
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards.”

Preparation

The camera uses third-party SD, SDHC, or SDXC memory cards conforming to the SD(Secure Digital) standard.
Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used withother cameras or computers. g “Formatting the card (Card Formatting)” (P. 241)
• The camera has two card slots.

1

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Open the card compartment cover.
123

Insert the card.
• Slide the card in until it locks into place.
# Do not forcibly insert a damaged or deformed card.
Doing so may damage the card slot.

Terminal area

4

Close the card compartment cover.
• Close it securely until you hear it click.
2
1

24 EN

Removing the card
Press the card in to eject it. Pull out the card.
# Never remove batteries or memory cards while the memory card
access indicator (P. 34) is displayed.

1

When two memory cards are inserted, you can choose how each card is usedaccording to your goals. g “Setting the card to record to (KCard Slot Settings /nCard Slot Settings)” (P. 242)

Preparation

Using Two Memory Cards• Record only to a selected card
• Record to a selected card until it is full, then record to the second card
• Record pictures with different sizes or compression ratios to different cards• Record copies of each picture to both cards

Usable cards
In this manual, all storage devices are referred to as “cards”. The
following types of SD memory card (commercially available) canbe used with this camera: SD, SDHC, and SDXC. For the latest
information, please visit our website.
SD card write protect switch
The SD card body has a write protect switch. Setting the switch to“LOCK” prevents data being written to the card. Return the switch tothe unlock position enable writing.

LOCK# When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
# A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a Motion
Compensation of [A-I] (All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu
%The data in the card will not be erased completely even after formatting the card ordeleting the data. When discarding, destroy the card to prevent leakage of personal
information.
%Access to some playback functions and the like may be restricted when the write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.

EN 25

Attaching and removing lenses

1

Attaching a lens to the camera• See page 291 for information on compatible lenses.

Preparation

1

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Remove the rear cap of the lensand the body cap of the camera.

Rear cap

1

2
1

3

2

Align the lens attachment mark (red) on
the camera with the alignment mark (red)on the lens, then insert the lens into thecamera’s body.

Lens attachment mark4

Rotate the lens clockwise until you hear it
click.
# Do not press the lens release button.
# Do not touch internal portions of the camera.

26 EN

5

Remove the front lens cap.

1

1
2

1

2

Preparation

1

1

EN 27

Removing Lenses

1

Confirm that the ON/OFF lever is in the OFF
position.

2

Hold the lens release button and rotate the lens asshown.

1
Preparation

Lens release button
2

1

28 EN

Using the monitor
Rotate the monitor for ease of viewing. The angle of the monitor can be adjusted
according to conditions at the time of shooting.

Up to 90°

Preparation

Up to 180°

1

Up to 270°

• Gently rotate the monitor within its range of motion. Attempting to rotate the monitor
beyond the limits shown below could damage the connectors.

• The camera can be configured to display a mirror image of the view through the lens or
automatically zoom power zoom lenses all the way out when the monitor is rotated for self
portraits. g “Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)” (P. 227)

EN 29

Turning the camera on

1

1

Set the ON/OFF lever to the ON position.

Preparation• When the camera is turned on, the monitor will turn on and display the super control
panel (P. 69).
The viewfinder turns on when you put your eye to the viewfinder. When the viewfinder
is lit up, the monitor turns off.
See P. 37 for information on how to switch between the viewfinder and the monitor.
• To turn the camera off, return the lever to the OFF position.
ON/OFF leverViewfinder

Battery level
The camera displays the level of the battery
currently in use. The battery level is shown aspercentages.
Level of current battery (%)

100%

Monitor

100 %P

The indicator flashes red
when the level reaches 10%.

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

WB

Auto

1 [1:02:03]
1

1023%The Fn lever can be configured to turn the camera on and off using the [Fn Lever/Power
Lever] option. g “Configuring [Fn Lever/Power Lever]” (P. 222)

Sleep Mode
If no controls are used for a set period, the camera will automatically enter suspend
operation to reduce the drain on the batteries. This is referred to as “sleep mode”.

• When the camera enters sleep mode, the monitor will turn off and operation will besuspended. Pressing the shutter or q button reactivates the camera.
• If no operations are performed for a set period after the camera enters sleep mode, thecamera will turn off automatically. The camera can be reactivated by turning it on again.
# The camera may require additional time to recover from sleep mode when [On] (enabled)is selected for [d Settings] > [Power-off Standby]. g “Wireless Settings for When the
Camera Is Off (Power-off Standby)” (P. 263))# The delay before the camera goes to sleep or turns off automatically can be selected in
the menu. g “Setting Sleep (Power Saving) Options (Sleep)” (P. 254), “Setting Auto
Power Off Options (Auto Power Off)” (P. 254)

30 EN

Initial setup
After turning the camera on for the first time, perform the initial setup by choosing alanguage and setting the camera clock.

1

Press the Q button when the initial setup dialog isdisplaying prompting you to choose a language.

Please select your language. OK
Veuillez choisir votre langue. OK
Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache. OK
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma. OK
OK

1
Preparation# The file name is also included with the date and time information. Be sure to set thecorrect date and time before using the camera. Some functions cannot be used if the date
and time have not been set.

OK

2

CursorHighlight the desired language using the front orrear dial or the FGHI buttons.

W

MENU

3

Press the Q button when the desired language ishighlighted.

OKW• If you press the shutter button before pressing the Q
button, the camera will exit to shooting mode and nolanguage will be selected. You can perform the initial
setup by turning the camera off and then on again to
MENU
OK
display the initial setup dialog and repeating the processfrom Step 1.
• The language can be changed at any time from the menu. g “What to Do If You
Can’t Read the Display” (P. 33)

EN 31

4

1

Set the date, time, and date format.
• Use the HI buttons to highlight items.
• Use the FG buttons to change the highlighted item.
• The clock can be adjusted at any time from the menu.
g “Setting the Camera Clock (X Settings)” (P. 257)

Y

M

D

– – – – . – –. – –Time–– : –– : ––Preparation

5

Press the Q button.

6

Highlight a time zone using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

7

Press the Q button to set the clock.

Y/M/D

MENU

The time is displayed using a
24-hour clock.

• Press the INFO button to enable or disable daylight saving time.

%Date and time information is recorded on the card together with the images.
%If the battery is removed from the camera and the camera is left for a while, the date andtime may be reset. If this happens, set the date and time using the menu. g “Setting the
Camera Clock (X Settings)” (P. 257)
%You may also need to adjust the frame rate before shooting movies. g “Setting the
Quality of Photos and Movies (KK / nK)” (P. 140)

32 EN

What to Do If You Can’t Read the Display
If you see unfamiliar characters or words in other languages, you may not haveselected the language you intended. Follow the steps below to choose anotherlanguage.

Press the MENU button to view themenus.

K1 K2 AF n q GK1
1. การตั้งค่าพื้นฐาน/คุณภาพของภาพ

e

1

My

โหมดกำหนดเองKK

YF

KKการตั้งค่าโดยละเอียด
สัดส่วนภาพ
ตรวจดูภาพ

4:3
ปิดชดเชยเงาแสง

ปิดPreparation

1

MENU button

2

Highlight the e (setup) tab using
the front dial.

K1 K2 AF n
1. การ์ด/โฟลเดอร์/ไฟล์

q

G

e
e

My

การฟอร์แมตการ์ด
Kการตั้งค่าช่องเสียบการ์ด
nการตั้งค่าช่องเสียบการ์ด
กำหนดโฟลเดอร์บันทึก

ไม่กำหนด

รีเซ็ต

ชื่อไฟล์
แก้ไขชื่อไฟล์

3

Select a screen on which [W]appears using the HI buttons or
the rear dial.

K1 K2 AF n
6. รีเซ็ต/X/W/อื่นๆ

q

G

e
e

My

รีเซ็ต/เริ่มต้นการตั้งค่า
X การตั้งค่า

ʹ22.02.01 16:30:43

ไทยWปรับตั้งระดับ
พิกเซลแมบปิ้ง

1.0เวอร์ชันเฟิร์มแวร์
การรับรอง

4Highlight [W] using the FG
buttons and press the Q button.

5

Highlight the desired language using the FGHI
buttons and press the Q button.

W

MENU

OK

EN 33

2 Shooting
Information displays while shooting

2%For information on the super control panel, which appears on the monitor by default, see
P. 71.

Shooting

Monitor display during still photography

1 2

34 5678 9[99]

100% USB

s<

0

k

PC

PC

a b cde fg hi!
$| HDR1 #
1
}
^
{
>h
<
]
[ On
\
Z
Y Heat
W Set / X

2x

1 [1:02:03]

4:3 1 L F
2 LF

j
1 4K 60p L- 8

FOCUSBKT S-AF

Off
PBH

100% 80%

S-ISAuto
IS Auto3

BKT

BKT WBAuto

Heat
AEL 40mm

Call

V
U
T

[99]KTest 1 1023
ND8-LV FLK fps

100%

P C1

F

1/ 250

F 5.6-

BKT 0S-OVF+

BKT RC # +0.3

0.0

BKT

ISO
Auto

200

Q PO N K J IHG F C B Az y
S R
M
L
E D
ND8-LV

#

m
n
o
p
q
r
s
t
u
v
w
x

S-OVF Night LV

100

Monitor display during movie mode

(

.

%

&

FlickerScan

HDMI(REC00:01

145 min1 [1:42:21]

1.4x TC00:00:01 DF)=
1 4K 60p L- 8

BT.709

C-AF
Off

_

W T

+
:

P8
±0

/
M-IS1
3

L
R

Lock WBAuto

34 EN

nP

*
,

40mm

;

l

FOCUSBKT AF Limit

1/ 60

F 5.6

N

J

-

+

0

F

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

y

F Exposure compensation................P. 106
G AE BKT..........................................P. 174
H Focus Indicator..............................P. 102
I Preview..........................................P. 224
J Aperture value...........................P. 43, 45
K Subject Detection............................P. 90
L Time lapse shooting.......................P. 167
M Live ND filter photography.............P. 158
N Shutter speed............................P. 43, 47
O AE lock..........................................P. 109
P Custom mode..................................P. 56
Q Shooting mode................................P. 43
R Flash..............................................P. 118(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
S Pro Capture active.........................P. 133
T Dust reduction...............................P. 305
U AF confirmation mark......................P. 40
V ♥jSH2 Aperture warning............P. 126
W SET function/CALL function...........P. 293
X Touch operation...............................P. 41
Y Internal temperature warning.........P. 309
Z Disable touch operation.................P. 101[ Touch operation...............................P. 41\ Zoom operation direction/Focal length] All Battery Information.............P. 30, 295^ Histogram........................................P. 38< Multiple exposure..........................P. 163> High Res Shot...............................P. 156{ Focus Stacking..............................P. 160} Fisheye compensation...................P. 171| HDR...............................................P. 162! D Keystone compensation..........P. 170# Digital Tele-converter.....................P. 166$ Anti-flicker shooting.......................P. 135% Flicker scan...................................P. 108& nHDMI Output.............................P. 182( Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59) a View assist..............................P. 155= Red frame during movie recording.......................................................P. 185/ Center marker................................P. 183* WLock.........................................P. 153, Level gauge.....................................P. 38; n mode (movie exposure mode).........................................................P. 60: Recording level meter......................P. 62

2
Shooting

1 Battery level.....................................P. 30
2 USB PD.........................................P. 287
3 Card write indicator....................P. 21, 25
4 Maximum number of continuous shots.......................................................P. 128
5 Active Bluetooth® connection...............................................P. 260, 280
6 Remote control..............................P. 280
7 Wireless LAN connection......P. 261, 267
8 Active connection to computer (Wi‑Fi).......................................................P. 267
9 Airplane Mode...............................P. 260
0 Active connection to computer (USB) *1.......................................................P. 284
a Test Picture....................................P. 210
b K Save settings...........................P. 243
c Number of storable still pictures....P. 327
d n Save slot..................................P. 243
e Available recording time................P. 327
f Frame rate.....................................P. 225
g Bluetooth position information.......P. 266
h Aspect ratio....................................P. 144
i K Image quality...........................P. 140
j n Image quality............................P. 141
k Focus BKT.....................................P. 178
l AF Limiter........................................P. 92
m AF mode..........................................P. 72
n Face priority/Eye priority..................P. 88
o Drive mode (single-frame/sequential
shooting/self-timer/vibration reduction/
silent photography/Pro Capture).......................................................P. 126
p Metering mode...............................P. 109
q Image stabilizer.............................P. 136
r ART BKT........................................P. 177
s Picture mode.................................P. 145
t WB BKT.........................................P. 175
u White balance................................P. 150
v RC mode.......................................P. 124
w Flash intensity control....................P. 123
x Flash mode....................................P. 120
y ISO sensitivity................................P. 113
z ISO BKT.........................................P. 176
A FL BKT...........................................P. 175
B Highlight & shadow control............P. 215
C Exposure compensation value......P. 106
D Night Vision....................................P. 225
E LV Mode.........................................P. 225

EN 35

+ Audio recording level .......................P. 62- Headphone volume .........................P. 62_ Electronic Zoom...............................P. 62. Time code......................................P. 181*1 Displayed when the camera is connected to OM Capture in [0RAW/Control] modeand the computer is the sole save location of images (P. 284).

2
Shooting
36 EN

Switching between displays
The camera uses an eye sensor to automatically switch between the viewfinder andmonitor displays. The viewfinder and monitor display (super control panel/live view)also show information on camera settings. Options are available for controlling display
switching and choosing the information shown.
The camera monitor displays the super control panel (P. 69) by default.
Framing photos in the monitor

2
Shooting

Framing photos in the viewfinderu (LV)
buttonMonitorViewfinder

100%2022.02.01 16:30:43

P

1/

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

WB

Auto

1 [1:02:03]
1

1023

The viewfinder turns on automatically when
you bring it to your eye. When the viewfinder
is lit up, the monitor turns off.

0

F
+

5.6

ISO

Auto

± 0.0

200

r

WB Auto

3
S-AF

100 %

250

-

Small

G
0.3

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:03

1023

0

The monitor shows the super control panel.
It changes to live view when you press theu (LV) button.
u (LV) button

100%

r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

• If the viewfinder is not in focus, put your eye to theviewfinder and focus the display by rotating the
diopter adjustment dial.

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Diopter adjustment dial

%Display switching and viewfinder display options are available.
g “Selecting the display style of the viewfinder (EVF Style)” (P. 228), “Configuring theeye sensor (Eye Sensor Settings)” (P. 250)

EN 37

Switching the information display

PA S M B n

You can switch the information displayed in the monitor during
shooting using the INFO button.

2
Shooting

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

INFO button

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

INFO

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

INFO

200

Information 1
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

INFO
Image OnlyP

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Information 2(still photography mode only)• The information display screens can be switched in either direction by rotating the dial
while pressing the INFO button.
• The information shown in still photography mode and the information shown in movie modecan be set individually. g “Shooting Indicators (KInfo Settings / nInfo Settings)” (P. 230)
• You can choose whether or not to display information when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.g “Configuring the display for when the shutter button is pressed halfway (Infoby half-pressing a)” (P. 231)
Histogram display
More
A histogram showing the distribution of brightness
in the image is displayed. The horizontal axis
gives the brightness, the vertical axis the numberLessof pixels of each brightness in the image. Areas
Dark
Brightabove the upper limit at shooting are displayed inred, those below the lower limit in blue, and those within the spot metering range in green.
You can choose the upper and lower limits. g “Histogram Exposure Warning (Histogram
Settings)” (P. 236)
Highlights and Shadows
Highlights and shadows, defined according to the upper and lower limits for thehistogram display, are shown in red and blue. You can choose the upper and lower limits.
g “Histogram Exposure Warning (Histogram Settings)” (P. 236)
Level gauge display
The orientation of the camera is indicated. The “tilt” direction is indicated on the vertical bar
and the “horizon” direction on the horizontal bar.
• The level gauge is intended as a guide only.
• Calibrate the gauge if you find it is no longer truly plumb or level. g “Calibrating theLevel Gauge (Level Adjust)” (P. 258)

38 EN

Shooting still pictures

PA S M B n
Use the mode dial to select the shooting mode, and then shootthe image.

Mode icon

2
Shooting

Indicator

Types of shooting modes
For how to use the various shooting modes, see the following.
P

Program AE (P. 43)

A

Aperture-priority AE (P. 45)

S

Shutter-priority AE (P. 47)

M

B

Manual exposure (P. 49)
Bulb/time (P. 51)
Live composite (P. 54)

C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom (P. 57)%For information on n on the mode dial, see P. 59.

1

Press the mode dial lock to unlock it, and then turn to set the mode you wish
to use.
• When the mode dial lock has been pressed down, the mode dial is locked. Each time
you press the mode dial lock, it switches between locked/released.

2

Frame the shot.
# Be careful that your fingers or thecamera strap do not obstruct thelens or AF illuminator.

Landscape position

Portrait position

EN 39

3

Adjust the focus.
• Lightly press the shutter button down to the first position (press the shutter button
halfway).
The AF confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green frame (AF target) will
be displayed in the focus location.
%You can also focus by pressing the AF-ON button. (P. 83)

2

Press the shutter
button halfway

Shooting

100%

P

r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

1 LF

0

+

AF frame

0.0

1 4K 60p L-8

ISO
Auto

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

S-AF

3

3

P

200

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

AF target

AF confirmation mark# If the camera is unable to focus, the AF confirmation mark will flash (P. 306).
# The AF frame varies with the option chosen for AF-target mode. Change the area
(P. 77) and position (P. 76) of the AF target as required.
# The AF frame is not displayed when [oAll] is chosen for AF-target mode (P. 77).

4

Release the shutter.
• Press the shutter button all the way (fully).
• The camera will release the shutter and take a picture.

Press the rest of
the way down%You can focus and take pictures using touch controls. g “Shooting with touch screen
operations” (P. 41)

40 EN

Shooting with touch screen operations
You can tap the subject to focus and take aphotograph.

PA S M B n
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Q

Tap a subject to focus and automatically release the shutter. This option
is not available in mode B (bulb), in n (movie) mode, or when [FAF] or[FAFb] is selected for AF mode (P. 72).

R

Shooting with touch screen operations is disabled.

S

Tap to display an AF target and focus on the subject in the selected area. You
can use the touch screen to choose the position and size of the focus frame.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button.

T

Tap to choose the subject used for focus when multiple portrait subjects aredetected. T is displayed when an option other than [Off] is selected for[Face & Eye Detection] (P. 88). Subject selection is not available when aframe rate of [FHD 120/60p L-8] (high-speed movie recording) is selected inn (movie) mode (P. 141).

Shooting

P

2• Tapping an icon switches the settings.
# Do not touch the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
# Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

 Previewing the subject (S)1

Tap the subject in the display.

100%

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8• An AF target will be displayed.
• Use the slider to choose the size of the frame.
• Tap S to turn off the display of the AF target.

14
10
7
5
3x

Off

P

2

Use the slider to adjust the size of the AF
target, and then tap Y to zoom in at the frame
position.
• Use your finger to scroll the display when the
picture is zoomed in.
• Tap Z to cancel the zoom display.

100%

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

1x

10x

• The situations in which touch screen operations are not available include the following.
When buttons or dials are in use• You can disable the touch screen operation. g “Disabling Touch Controls (Touchscreen
Settings)” (P. 249)

EN 41

Photo Review

2(Image Review)

PA S M B n

Pictures are displayed immediately after shooting. This gives you a chance to quickly
review the shot. You can choose how long pictures are displayed or disable photo
review altogether.
To end photo review and resume shooting at any time, press the shutter button
halfway.

Shooting

0.3–20sec

Choose how long photos are displayed.

Off

Photo review disabled. The camera continues to display the view
through the lens after shooting.

Auto q

Switch to playback after shooting. You can delete images and perform
other playback operations.

1

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

2

Highlight the _ tab using the front dial.

e

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image Quality

My

Custom ModeKKYF

KK Detailed Settings
Image Aspect

3

Highlight [1. Basic Settings/Image Quality] using
the HI buttons or the rear dial.

4

Highlight [Image Review] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

Image Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Offe

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image Quality

My

Custom ModeKKYF

KK Detailed Settings
Image Aspect

5

Change the setting using the FG buttons andpress the Q button.

Image Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Off

Image Review
Auto qOff

0.3sec0.5sec

1sec

2sec

Images are not displayed
after shooting.

MENU

6

42 EN

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

OKTaking Pictures Using the Shooting Modes
Letting the camera choose aperture and shutter speed(P: Program AE)
PA S M B n

1

Rotate the mode dial to P.

2

Focus and check the display.

3• Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 106)
Rear dial: Program shift (P. 44)• The shutter speed and aperture chosen by the camera
are displayed.
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the
F button. Press the F button and then rotate the frontor rear dial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

2Shooting

The camera chooses the optimal aperture and shutter speed according to subject
brightness.

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Aperture
Shutter speed
Shooting mode

Take pictures.

%You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles
to the Front and Rear Dials (KDial Function / nDial Function)” (P. 216)
%You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (Fn Lever Settings)”(P. 219)

EN 43

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed and aperture
displays will flash as shown.
Display
Large aperture (low f/-number)/slow shutter speed

260" F2.8

Shooting

Small aperture (high f/-number)/fast shutter speed

8000 F22

Problem/solution
The subject is too dark.
• Use a flash.
Subject is too bright.
• The limits of the camera metering system have been
exceeded. Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density)
filter to reduce the amount of light entering thecamera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available
in s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silents Settings)” (P. 132), “Performing thesequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 126)

%When [KISO] is not set to [Auto], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing thesetting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 113)
%The aperture value shown when the displays flash varies with the lens and focal length.

 Program ShiftWithout changing exposure, you can choose from different
combinations of aperture and shutter speed selected
automatically by the camera. This is known as program
shift.

1

Rotate the rear dial until the camera displays thedesired combination of aperture and shutter speed.
• The shooting mode indicator in the display changes
from P to Ps while program shift is in effect. To end
program shift, rotate the rear dial in the opposite
direction until Ps is no longer displayed.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

S-AF

3

Ps

1/ 125

F 6.3

-

0

+

0.0

Program shift%You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. g “Changing the look of thedisplay (KLV Mode)” (P. 225)

44 EN

1 4K 60p L-8

ISO
Auto

200

Choosing aperture (A: Aperture-Priority AE)
PA S M B n

Lower aperture values…

F2.8

F4.0

…reduce depth of field and increase
blur.

1

Rotate the mode dial to A.

2

Choose an aperture.

3

Higher aperture values…

F5.6

F8.0

F11

2
Shooting

In this mode, you choose the aperture (f/-number) and the camera automatically sets
the shutter speed for optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Lower aperture
values (larger apertures) reduce the depth of the area that appears to be in focus(depth of field), blurring the background. Higher aperture values (smaller apertures)increase the depth of the area that appears to be in focus in front of and behind thesubject.

…increase depth of field.

• Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 106)
Rear dial: Aperture• The shutter speed selected automatically by the camera
will appear in the display.
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the
F button. Press the F button and then rotate the frontor rear dial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

A

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Aperture value

Take pictures.

%You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles
to the Front and Rear Dials (KDial Function / nDial Function)” (P. 216)
%You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (Fn Lever Settings)”(P. 219)%You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. g “Changing the look of thedisplay (KLV Mode)” (P. 225)
%You can stop aperture down to the selected value and preview depth of field.
g “Changing the roles of buttons (Button Settings)” (P. 208)

EN 45

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the shutter-speed display will
flash as shown.
Display
Slow shutter speed

260" F5.6

Shooting

Fast shutter speed

8000 F5.6

Problem/solution
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value.
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher value, the limitsof the camera metering system have been exceeded. Use athird-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce the amount oflight entering the camera.
• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available in s(silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter sound (Silents
Settings)” (P. 132), “Performing the sequential/self-timer
shooting” (P. 126)

%When [KISO] is not set to [Auto], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing thesetting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 113)

46 EN

Choosing shutter speed (S: Shutter-Priority AE)
PA S M B n

In this mode, you choose the shutter speed and the camera automatically sets aperturefor optimal exposure according to subject brightness. Faster shutter speeds appear
to “freeze” fast-moving subjects. Slower shutter speeds add blur to moving objects,
lending them a sense of motion for a dynamic effect.
Slower shutter speeds…
15

30…produce dynamic shots with a senseof motion.

1

Rotate the mode dial to S.

2Choose a shutter speed.

60

125

250

8000

…“freeze” the motion of fast-moving
subjects.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following settings.
Front dial: Exposure compensation (P. 106)
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/8000 and
60 s.
1/ 250F 5.6
0.0
S• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available
Shutter speed
in s (silent) mode. g “Shooting without shutter
sound (Silents Settings)” (P. 132), “Performing thesequential/self-timer shooting” (P. 126)
• The aperture selected automatically by the camera will appear in the display.
• Exposure compensation can also be adjusted using the F button. Press the F
button and then rotate the front or rear dial.
-

3

1 LF

2
Shooting

60”

Faster shutter speeds…

0

+

3

ISO
Auto

200

Take pictures.

%You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles
to the Front and Rear Dials (KDial Function / nDial Function)” (P. 216)
%You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever can also
be assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (Fn Lever Settings)” (P. 219)
%You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. g “Changing the look of thedisplay (KLV Mode)” (P. 225)
%To achieve the effect of a slow shutter in brightly-lit settings in which slow shutter speeds
are not otherwise available, use the live ND filter. g “Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light(Live ND Shooting)” (P. 158)
%Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g “Reducing Flicker
in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)” (P. 135), “Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(KFlicker Scan / nFlicker Scan)” (P. 108)

EN 47

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure, the aperture display will flash as
shown.
Display
Low aperture value

22000 F2.8

Shooting

High aperture value

125 F22

Problem/solution
Underexposure.
• Choose a slower shutter speed.
Overexposure.
• Choose a faster shutter speed. Shutter speeds as fast as
1/32000 s are available in silent mode.
• If the subject is still overexposed at the higher speed, thelimits of the camera metering system have been exceeded.
Use a third-party ND (Neutral Density) filter to reduce theamount of light entering the camera.

%When [KISO] is not set to [Auto], optimal exposure may be achieved by changing thesetting. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 113)
%The aperture value shown when the display flashes varies with the lens and focal length.

48 EN

Choosing aperture and shutter speed (M: Manual Exposure)
PA S M B n

In this mode, you choose the aperture and shutter speed. You can adjust settings
according to your goals, for example by combining fast shutter speeds with small
apertures (high f/-numbers) for increased depth of field.

Rotate the mode dial to M.

2Adjust aperture and shutter speed.

2
Shooting

1

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• Use the front and rear dials to adjust the following
settings.
Front dial: Aperture
3
Rear dial: Shutter speed• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/8000–60 s.
ISO 200
1/ 250F 5.6-2.0
M• Shutter speeds as fast as 1/32000 s are available insilent mode. g “Shooting without shutter soundDifference from optimal(Silents Settings)” (P. 132)
exposure• The display shows the difference between the exposure
produced by the selected aperture and shutter speed
and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• When [Auto] is selected for [K ISO], ISO sensitivity will automatically be adjusted
for optimal exposure at the selected exposure settings. [K ISO] defaults to [Auto].
g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 113)
-

3

1 LF

BKT 0S-OVF+

Take pictures.

%You can choose the functions performed by the front and rear dials. g “Assigning Roles
to the Front and Rear Dials (KDial Function / nDial Function)” (P. 216)
%You can use the Fn lever to reverse the roles of the front and rear dials. The lever
can also be assigned other roles. g “Customizing the Fn Lever (Fn Lever Settings)”(P. 219)%Depending on the shutter speed selected, you may notice banding in the display causedby flicker from fluorescent or LED light sources. The camera can be configured to reduce
the effects of flicker during live view or when pictures are taken. g “Reducing Flicker
in Photographs (Anti-Flicker Shooting)” (P. 135), “Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting(KFlicker Scan / nFlicker Scan)” (P. 108)
%You can choose whether the display reflects the effects of exposure compensation or
maintains a constant brightness for ease of viewing. g “Changing the look of thedisplay (KLV Mode)” (P. 225)

EN 49

Subject Too Dark or Too BrightIf the camera is unable to achieve optimal exposure with [Auto] selected for [K ISO],
the ISO sensitivity display will flash as shown.
DisplayISO
Auto L80

2
Shooting

ISO
Auto 25600

Problem/solution
Overexposure.
• Choose a higher aperture value or faster shutter speed.
Underexposure.
• Choose a lower aperture value or slower shutter speed.
• If the warning does not clear from the display, choose a higher
value for ISO sensitivity. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)”(P. 113), “Setting the range of ISO sensitivity values selectedin [Auto] mode (KISO-A Upper/Default / bISO-A Upper/
Default)” (P. 114)

 Using Exposure Compensation in Mode M
In mode M, exposure compensation is available when [Auto] is selected for [K ISO].
Because exposure compensation is performed by adjusting ISO sensitivity, apertureand shutter speed are not affected. g “Changing ISO sensitivity (ISO)” (P. 113),“Setting the range of ISO sensitivity values selected in [Auto] mode (KISO-A Upper/Default/ bISO-A Upper/Default)” (P. 114)

1

Hold the F button and rotate the front or rear dial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• Exposure compensation is added to the exposure
difference shown in the display.

3M

1/ 250

F 5.6-

BKT 0S-OVF+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Exposurecompensation plus
exposure difference
Exposurecompensation

50 EN

(B: Bulb/Time)Long Exposures 

PA S M B n

Select this mode to leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can preview thephoto in live view and end the exposure when the desired results have been achieved.
Use when long exposures are required, for example when photographing night scenes
or fireworks.

2
Shooting# For long exposure shooting, it is recommended that you fix the camera securely on a
tripod and set [KImage Stabilizer] (P. 136) to [S-IS Off].
“Bulb” and “Live Bulb” Photography
The shutter remains open while the shutter button is pressed. Releasing the button ends the
exposure.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live bulb photography is selected, you can check the results in the live view display
and end exposure when you want to.
“Time” and “Live Time” Photography
The exposure begins when the shutter button is pressed all the way down. To end theexposure, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The amount of light entering the camera increases the longer the shutter is open.
• When live time photography is selected, you can check the results in the live view display
and end exposure when you want to.

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select [Bulb] (for bulb photography) or [Time] (timephotography).
• At default settings, the selection is made with the reardial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

B

Bulb

F 5.6

ISO 200

Bulb or time photography

EN 51

3

Press the MENU button.

Live Bulb• You will be prompted to choose the interval at which thepreview is updated.

Off
Display Counts of each ISO sensitivity
ISO

L80~ 400~ 800~ 1600~

times

24

19

14

MENU

2
Shooting

45Highlight an interval using FG.

6

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

7

Adjust aperture.

9
OK

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.
• The menus will be displayed.
• If an option other than [Off] is selected, [Live Bulb] or [Live Time] will appear in the display.
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using thefront dial.
3

B

Bulb

F 5.6

ISO 200

Aperture

8

Take pictures.
• In bulb and live bulb modes, keep the shutter button pressed. The exposure ends
when the button is released.
• During live time photography, you can refresh the preview by pressing the shutter
button halfway.
• In time and live time modes, press the shutter button all the way down once to start
the exposure and again to end it.
• The exposure ends automatically when the time selected for [Bulb/Time Timer]
is reached. g “Configuring BULB/TIME/COMP Settings (BULB/TIME/COMP
Settings)” (P. 173)
• [Noise Reduction] is applied after shooting. The display shows the time remaining
until the process is complete. You can choose the conditions under which noise
reduction is performed (P. 117).

# Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
# Bulb photography is used in place of live bulb photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
# Time photography is used in place of live time photography when multiple exposure,keystone compensation, or fisheye correction is in effect.
# During shooting, there are limits on the settings for the following functions.
Sequential shooting, self-timer shooting, time lapse shooting, AE bracket shooting, flash
bracketing, focus bracketing, Focus Stacking, etc.
# Depending on camera settings, the temperature, and the situation, you may notice noiseor bright spots in the monitor. These may sometimes appear in pictures even when [Noise
Reduction] (P. 117) is enabled.
%Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (KAF
Mode / nAF Mode)” (P. 72), “Changing the settings of Starry Sky AF (Starry Sky AF
Setting)” (P. 85)

52 EN

%Display brightness can be adjusted during bulb/time photography. g “Configuring
BULB/TIME/COMP Settings (BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)” (P. 173)
%In mode B (bulb), you can adjust focus manually while the exposure is in progress.
This allows you to defocus during the exposure or focus at the end of the exposure.
g “Configuring BULB/TIME/COMP Settings (BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)” (P. 173)

! Noise2
Shooting

While shooting at slow shutter speeds, noise may appear on screen. These phenomena
occur when the temperature rises in the image pickup device or image pickup device internal
drive circuit, causing current to be generated in those sections of the image pickup device
that are not normally exposed to light. This can also occur when shooting with a high ISO
setting in a high-temperature environment. To reduce this noise, the camera activates thenoise reduction function. g “Long Exposure Noise Reduction Options (Noise Reduction)”(P. 117)

EN 53

Lighten Blending 2(B: Live Composite Photography)
PA S M B n

Leave the shutter open for a long exposure. You can view the light trails left by
fireworks or stars and photograph them without changing the exposure of the
background. The camera combines multiple shots and records them as a single
photograph.

Shooting# For live composite photography, it is recommended that you fix the camera securely on a
tripod and set [KImage Stabilizer] (P. 136) to [S-IS Off].

1

Rotate the mode dial to B.

2

Select [Live Comp].
• At default settings, the selection is made with the reardial.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

Press shutter button once
to prepare for composite
shooting.

B

LiveComp

F 5.6

-

0

+

3

0.0

ISO 200

Live composite photography

3

Press the MENU button.

Composite Settings• The [Composite Settings] menu will be displayed.

1/2secExposure time per image.
Exposure time and aperture
will determine your base exposure.
MENU

54 EN

4

Highlight an exposure time using FG.

5

Press the Q button to select the highlighted option.

6
7

Press the MENU button repeatedly to exit the menus.

• Choose an exposure time of from 1/2 to 60 s.
• The menus will be displayed.

Adjust aperture.
• At default settings, aperture can be adjusted using the front dial.

OK8Press the shutter button all the way down to readythe camera.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• The camera is ready to shoot when [Ready forcomposite shooting] is displayed.

3

Ready for composite shooting

B

9

LiveComp

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO 200

Press the shutter button to start shooting.

10 Press the shutter button again to end shooting.

• Shooting ends automatically after the time selected for [Live Composite Timer](P. 173). Other options can be selected.
• The maximum recording time available varies with battery level and shooting
conditions.

2
Shooting• Live composite photography will start. The display will be updated after eachexposure.

# Some limitations apply to the choice of ISO sensitivity settings available.
# Limitations apply to some features during shooting, including:sequential shooting, the self-timer, interval timer photography, AE bracketing, flash
bracketing, focus bracketing, High Res Shot, HDR photography, Focus Stacking,multiple exposure, keystone compensation, the live ND filter, and fisheye correction.
%Starry sky AF can be used for shots of the night sky. g “Choosing a focus mode (KAF
Mode / nAF Mode)” (P. 72), “Changing the settings of Starry Sky AF (Starry Sky AF
Setting)” (P. 85)%Display brightness can be adjusted during live composite photography. g “Configuring
BULB/TIME/COMP Settings (BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)” (P. 173)
%The exposure time for each exposure made during live composite photography can bechosen in advance using the menus. g “Configuring BULB/TIME/COMP Settings(BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)” (P. 173)

EN 55

Saving Custom Settings to the Mode Dial
(C1/C2/C3/C4 Custom Modes)

2Frequently-used settings and shooting modes can be saved as custom modes andrecalled as needed simply by rotating the mode dial. Saved settings can also berecalled from the menus.
• Save settings to positions C1 through C4.

Shooting

Saving Settings

1(Assign to Custom Mode)
PA S M B n

Choose a mode other than n and adjust settings
as desired.
• For information on the settings that can be saved, see
the menu list (P. 311).

2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

3

Highlight the _ tab using the front dial.

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image QualityeMy

Custom ModeKKYF

KK Detailed Settings
Image Aspect
Image Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Off

4Highlight [1. Basic Settings/Image Quality] using the
HI buttons or the rear dial.

5

Highlight [Custom Mode] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

6

Highlight the desired custom mode ([C1]–[C4])using FG buttons and press the Q button.

C1

--

C2

--

• The menu for the selected custom mode will be
displayed.

C3

--

C4

--

Custom Mode

MENU

7

Highlight [Assign] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

C1
Recall--AssignSave Settings

MENU

56 EN

OK

Reset

OK

8

Highlight [Set] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

C1
Set current shooting
mode and settings.

• Any existing settings will be overwritten.
• To restore default settings for the selected custom
mode, highlight [Reset] and press the Q button.

Set
Reset
MENU

9

OK

2

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

Using Custom Modes

(C1/C2/C3/C4)

PA S M B n

Shooting%Custom modes can be updated automatically to reflect any changes made to settings(C1, C2, C3, or C4) during shooting. g “Saving the Changes Made to Settings while
in Custom Modes” (P. 57)

To recall all saved settings, including the shooting mode:

1

Rotate the mode dial to the desired custom mode
(C1, C2, C3, or C4).
• The camera will be set to the settings for the selectedmode.

%By default, changes made after recall will not be applied to the stored settings. The saved
settings will be restored when next you select the custom mode with the mode dial.

 Saving the Changes Made to Settings while in Custom Modes
You can save the changes made to settings while in custom modes in the camera.
The changed settings remain even if you rotate the mode dial. You can use the custom
modes just like the P/A/S/M/B modes.

1
2
3

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

45Highlight [Custom Mode] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

678Highlight [Save Settings] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Highlight the _ tab using the front dial.
Highlight [1. Basic Settings/Image Quality] using the HI buttons or the reardial.
Highlight the desired custom mode ([C1]–[C4]) using FG buttons and press
the Q button.
Highlight [Hold] using the HI buttons and press the Q button.
Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

EN 57

 Recalling Saved Settings
In modes other than n, you can recall the settings stored in custom modes [C1]through [C4].

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight the _ tab using the front dial.

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image Quality

e

My

2

Custom Mode

Shooting

1
2

Image Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Off

KK

YF

KK Detailed Settings
Image Aspect

3

Highlight [1. Basic Settings/Image Quality] using the
HI buttons or the rear dial.

4

Highlight [Custom Mode] using the FG buttons
and press the Q button.

5

Highlight the desired custom mode ([C1]–[C4])using FG buttons and press the Q button.

Custom Mode
C1

Set

C2
C3

Set
--

C4

--

MENU

6

Highlight [Recall] using the FG buttons and press
the Q button.

OK

C1
RecallAssignSet

Save Settings

Reset

MENU

7

Highlight [Yes] using the HI buttons and press the
Q button.

OK

C1
Apply C1 settings? Current camera
settings will be overwritten.

Yes
No
MENU

8

OK

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

%When you recall a setting while the mode dial is set to C1, C2, C3, or C4, the shooting
mode also changes to the saved mode.
%Settings recalled by pressing a button to which [C1] - [C4] (Custom Mode C1 - 4) has
been assigned in [KButton Function] (P. 208) cease to apply when you:
- Turn the camera off- Rotate the mode dial to another setting- Press the MENU button during shooting- Perform a reset- Save or recall custom settings

58 EN

Recording Movies# When recording movies, use an SD card that supports an SD speed class of 10 or higher.
# A UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better is required when:a movie resolution of [4K] or [C4K] is selected in the [nK] menu or a Motion
Compensation of [A-I] (All-Intra) is selected in the [nK] menu

Recording movies in movie mode (n)Rotate the mode dial to n (movie mode) to record movies using the effects available
in P, A, S, and M modes (P. 60).

1
2

Rotate the mode dial to n.

3

Press the R button again to end recording.

2
Shooting

PA S M B n

Press the R button to begin recording.
• A beep does not sound when the camera focuses inmovie mode.
• Movie you are recording will be displayed on themonitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfinder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
• A red frame is displayed during movie recording (P. 185).
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
• The camera will start the recording count and display the recording time.

# When the camera is used continuously for extended periods, the temperature of theimage sensor will rise and noise and color splotches may be visible in the display.
Should this occur, turn the camera off and wait for it to cool. Noise and color splotches
are particularly likely to occur at high ISO sensitivities. If the temperature of the sensor
increases further, the camera will turn off automatically.
# When using a Four Thirds system lens, the AF will not operate while recording movies.
# When high-speed movie recording is selected for [nK], movies shot with [i-Enhance] oran art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in [Natural] mode.
# The sound of touch operations and button operations may be recorded.
# CMOS image sensors of the type used in the camera generate a so-called “rolling
shutter” effect that can cause distortion in pictures of moving objects. This distortion isa phenomenon that occurs in pictures of fast-moving subjects or if the camera is moved
during shooting. It is particularly noticeable in pictures taken at long focal lengths.
# When an SDXC card is used, movies up to 3 hours long can be recorded. Movies over 3
hours are recorded over multiple files (depending on shooting conditions, the camera may
start recording to a new file before the 3-hour limit is reached).
# When an SD/SDHC card is used, movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
files (depending on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file
before the 4 GB limit is reached).
%You can also begin recording movies by pressing the shutter button. g “Recording amovie by pressing the shutter button (nShutter Function)” (P. 216)
%Divided movie files can be played back as a single movie. g “Playing back separated
movies” (P. 189)

EN 59

 Choosing an Exposure Mode (n Mode (Movie Exposure Modes))PA S M B n

You can create movies that take advantage of the effects available in P, A, S, and M
modes.

2
Shooting

1
2
3

Press the MENU button to display the menus.

45Highlight [nMode] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Highlight the n tab using the front dial.
Highlight [1. Basic Settings/Image Quality] using the HI buttons or the reardial.
Highlight the desired mode using FG buttons and press the Q button.
P

Optimal aperture is set automatically according to the brightness of the subject.
Use the front dial or rear dial to adjust exposure compensation.

A

Depiction of background is changed by setting the aperture.
Use the front dial to adjust exposure compensation and rear dial to adjust aperture.

S

Shutter speed affects how the subject appears. Use the front dial to adjust exposurecompensation and rear dial to adjust shutter speed.
Shutter speed can be set to values between 1/24 s and 1/32000 s.

M

Freely adjust both aperture and shutter speed.
Use the front dial to select aperture value and the rear dial to select shutter speed.
• Choose from shutter speeds of 1/24–1/32000 s. Values of ISO 200–12800 are
available using the [n ISO] manual sensitivity control options.
• The display shows the difference between the exposure produced by the selected
aperture and shutter speed and the optimal exposure metered by the camera. The
display will flash if the difference exceeds ±3 EV.
• The option chosen for [bISO-A Upper/Default] (P. 114) takes effect.

%The low end of the shutter speed changes according to the frame rate of the movie record
mode.

6

Press the MENU button to exit the menus.

%[nMode] can also be set from the super control panel. g “The Super Control Panel/LV
Super Control Panel” (P. 69)

60 EN

Recording movies in photo shooting modes
Movies can be recorded in program AE mode even when the mode dial is not in the nposition.
# [RREC] must be assigned to a button using [KButton Function] (P. 208).
# The AF target takes on the shape selected for movie mode (P. 59). Rotate the mode
dial to n (movie mode) and choose target shape in the AF target selection display(P. 77).

2

Press the button, to which [RREC] has been assigned, to begin recording.

Shooting

1• During recording, “(REC”, recording time, and a red frame (P. 185) will be
displayed on the monitor.
• If you put your eye to the viewfinder, movie you are recording will be displayed in the
viewfinder.
• You can change the focus location by tapping the screen while recording.
145 minRecording time(REC 00:12
TC00:00:01 DF

1 [1:02:03]

1 4K 60p L-8

C-AF
Off

M-IS2
3

±0 RL

nP

2

WBAuto1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Press the button again to end recording.
• “(REC”, recording time, and the red frame (P. 185) disappear when you end
recording.

# Even if you press a button to which [RREC] has been assigned, you cannot record
movies in the following instances:
During a multiple exposure (still photography also ends), while the shutter button
is pressed halfway, during sequential shooting, time-lapse photography, keystonecompensation, or fish-eye correction, or while the live ND filter is in use

EN 61

Touch Controls2(Silent Controls)
PA S M B n

You can prevent the camera from recording operating
sounds that occur due to camera operations whileshooting. After tapping an item, tap the displayed arrows 1
to select the settings.
2
3

145 min(REC 00:12
TC00:00:01 DF

1 [1:02:03]

1 4K 60p L-8

C-AF
Off

W T

M-IS2

P8

3

±0 RL

nP

WBAuto1/ 250

F 5.6

Shooting

4 5

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

6

7

1 power zoom

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out.

2 headphone volume

Adjust volume when using headphones.

3 recording level

Choose the recording level.

4 shutter speed

Adjust shutter speed when [S] (shutter-priority AE) or [M](manual) is selected for [nMode] (movie exposure mode)(P. 60).

5 aperture

Adjust aperture when [A] (aperture-priority AE) or [M] (manual) is
selected for [nMode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 60).

6 exposurecompensation

Adjust exposure compensation. If [M] is selected for [nMode](movie exposure mode) (P. 60), exposure compensation isavailable when [Auto] is selected for [n ISO] (P. 113).

7 n ISO sensitivity

Adjust [n ISO] (P. 113). This option is available when [M] isselected for [nMode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 60).

# Silent controls are not available during high-speed movie recording (P. 142).
%You can configure the camera so that silent controls using the touch panel can also be
used during still photography. g “Configuring nInfo Settings” (P. 231)

62 EN

200

3 Using the Menus
What you can do with menus
In addition to shooting and playback options, the menus contain options that let you
customize the operation and display of the camera, and set up the camera.
There are several tabs which represent function categories, and related functions arecontained in each page.

How to operate the menus
Front dial		

: Select a tab.

HI/Rear dial

: Select a page.

FG		: Move the cursor.

Q button		: Confirm the setting/proceed to the next screen.

MENU button: Cancel operation/return to previous screen.

3
Using the Menus

For information on tab categories and functions on each page, see “Default Settings”(P. 311).

The following explanation uses [AE BKT] as an example.

1

Tabs

Press the MENU button todisplay the menus.

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image QualityeMy

Custom ModeKKYF

KK Detailed Settings
Image Aspect

MENU button

2

Use the front dial to select thedesired tab.
• [AE BKT] is on the ‘ tab.
Rotate the front dial until the‘ tab is highlighted.

Image Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Off

CursorPage title, page guide
K1 K
K2 AF n2
1. Computational Modes

q

G

e

My

High Res Shot

Off

Live ND Shooting

Off

Focus Stacking

Off

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

EN 63

3

Use HI or the rear dial to selectthe desired page.
• [AE BKT] is on the 3rd page: [3.
Bracketing]. Operate the HI
buttons or the rear dial until the [3.
Bracketing] page is highlighted.

K1 K
K2 AF n2
1. Computational Modes

Using the Menus

Use FG to select [AE BKT] andpress the Q button.

e

My
Off

Live ND Shooting

Off

Focus Stacking

Off

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

3. Bracketing

4

G

High Res Shot

K1 K
K2
2

3

q

AF n

q

G

e

My

AE BKTOffWB BKTOffFL BKT

OffISO BKT

OffART BKT

Off

Focus BKT

Off

K1 K
K2
2

3. Bracketing

AF n

q

G

e

My

AE BKTOffWB BKTOffFL BKT

OffISO BKT

OffART BKT

Off

Focus BKT

Off

K1 K
K2
2

3. Bracketing

AF n

q

G

e

My

AE BKTOffWB BKT

3f 0.3EV

FL BKT

3f 0.7EV

ISO BKT

3f 1.0EV

ART BKT

5f 0.3EV

Focus BKT

5f 0.7EV
5f 1.0EV

This appears next to thecurrently selected option.

5

Use FG to highlight an option and press the Q button to select.
• The setting is confirmed.
• Pressing the MENU button closes the menu.
• The procedure after selecting an item and pressing the Q button varies
depending on the menu item.
• Some menu items require further settings after you select an option in step
5. For operation, see the explanation of each function.

In this manual, the procedure for selecting a menu items is shown as follows.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n AE BKT%You can use the multi selector in place of FGHI when operating menus.
%To cancel menu operation, press the MENU button.
%For information on each menu function and default settings, see “Default Settings”(P. 311).

64 EN

 Displaying the description of a menu item
When you press the INFO button whilea menu item is selected, the descriptionof the menu is displayed.

K1 K
K2 AF n2
1. Computational Modesq

GHigh Res Shot
High Res ShotTakes
and combines multiple
Live ND
Shooting

to create a super highFocuspictures
Stacking
HDR resolution image.
Multiple Exposure

e

My
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off

2. AF

K1 K2

AF

n q

G

e

My

Q

2. AF

K1 K2

AF

n q

On1

AF Area PointerFace & Eye Detection

Off

Face & Eye DetectionOff

Eye Detection Frame

On

My
On

On

AF Area PointerSubject Detectione

On1

AF Illuminator

KFace & Eye AF Button

G

This item cannot be selected
AF Illuminator
for the following reason.

& Eye AF Button
KFace
KAF Mode

Off

Subject DetectionOff

Eye Detection Frame

On

3
Using the Menus

 Items shown in grayIf an item is currently unavailable due to the condition of the camera or other settings, it
is shown in gray.
When you press the Q button while a gray item is highlighted, the reason it is notavailable is displayed.

EN 65

4 Shooting Settings
How to change the shooting settings (Direct buttons/
Super Control Panel)
The camera offers many photography-related functions. Depending on how often you
use them, you can access settings via buttons or icons in the display.

Direct Buttons

4

Frequently-used photographic functions are assigned to buttons. These are referred toas “direct buttons”. The buttons to which functions can be assigned are listed below.

Shooting Settings

3
4
5
6
1

78
9

2
0

b
c

a
%Buttons excluding 0 (jY# button) and a (AF m button) can be assigned different
roles. g “Changing the roles of buttons (Button Settings)” (P. 208)

66 EN

 Direct buttons during photo shooting
Direct button

Assigned functiongOne-touch white balance

P. 1522 Z button

Preview

P. 2243 u (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewfinder) selection

P. 37

4 AEL button

AEL

P. 1095 AF-ON button

AF-ON

P. 83,
84

6 ISO button

ISO sensitivity

P. 113

7 Multi selector (T)N (AF target position)

P. 76

8 Multi selector (S)

Off*

-

9 Arrow pad(FGHI)

Off*-

0 jY# button

Sequential/self-timer shooting/flash

P. 120,126

a AFm button

AF/metering mode

P. 72,
109b F button

Exposure compensation

P. 106c R(h) buttonHigh Res Shot

P. 156

4
Shooting Settings

1 Y button* No function is assigned by default.

 Direct buttons during movie recording
Direct button

Assigned functiong

1 Y button

Peaking

P. 1522 Z button

Magnify

P. 80

3 u (LV) button

Display (monitor/viewfinder) selection

P. 37

4 AEL button

AEL

P. 1095 AF-ON button

AF-ON

P. 83,
84

6 ISO button

ISO sensitivity

P. 113

7 Multi selector (T)N (AF target position)

P. 76

8 Multi selector (S)

Off*

-

9 Arrow pad(FGHI)

Off*-a AFm button

AF/metering mode

P. 72,
109b F button

Exposure compensation

P. 106c R(h) button

Movie recording

P. 59* No function is assigned by default.

EN 67

For information on how each direct button function works, see the explanation page ofeach function.
This section explains how to operate when a selection menu is displayed, using [AFMode] as an example.

1

Press the button of the function you want to use.
• Press the AF m button• A selection menu appears.

p B C CHi CSh
ESPSingle AF
S-AF C-AF b C-AF+TR Preb FAF

4

Selection menu

Shooting Settings

2

Rotate the front/rear dial so select a setting.

• You can also use the FGHI buttons.
If setting values appear at the top and bottom of thedisplay when you press the button in step 1, use thefollowing buttons.
FG: Selects items displayed at the top.
HI: Selects items displayed at the bottom.
• In this example, rotate the rear dial to set [AF Mode].
• Pressing the shutter button halfway to exit to theshooting display.
• You can also return to the shooting display by pressing the button you pressed in step 1.
• With some functions, further detailed settings are available after selecting the setting instep 2. For information on how to operate, see the explanation of each function.

In this manual, the procedure for changing a setting using a direct button is shown as
follows.
ButtonAF m button n j

Quickly changing the setting while keeping the button pressed

Some settings can be changed by rotating the front/rear dial while keeping the buttonof the function pressed.
The setting screen closes when you release the button.

68 EN

The Super Control Panel/LV Super Control Panel
The super control panel/LV super control panel lists shooting settings and their current
values. Use the super control panel when framing shots in the viewfinder, the LV supercontrol panel when framing shots in the monitor (“live view”).
• In photo shooting mode, pressing the u (LV) button switches between viewfinder
photography and live view photography.
u(LV button)
100%

P

1/

Small

250

-

F
+

0

5.6

ISO

Auto

± 0.0

S-AF

Off

#

G
x ±0.3p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:03

1023

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

200

r

WB Auto3

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

100% r O

2022.02.01 16:30:43

0

4

3

P

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Live view photography

Super Control Panel (Viewfinder Photography)

When you frame subjects in the viewfinder, the super LV control panel will be displayedin the monitor at all times. Press the Q button to activate the cursor.
100%2022.02.01 16:30:43

P

1/

250

-

Small

F
+

0

5.6

± 0.0

Q

200

r

WB Auto

3
S-AF

ISO

Auto

Shooting Mode

P

Small

3

G
0.3

1/

250

-

F
+

0

5.6

ISO

Auto

± 0.0

WB Auto

S-AF

200

r

G
0.3

Off

#

x±

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Autop

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:03

1023

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:031023

0Shooting Settings

Viewfinder photography (monitor
turns off while viewfinder is on)

1/ 2500

LV Super Control Panel (Live View Photography)

To display the LV super control panel in the monitor, press the Q button during liveview.
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

Q

Natural

P
Small

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

3
S-AF

200

1/

250

-

F
+

0

5.6

ISO

Auto

± 0.0

200

r

WB Auto

G
0.3

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:031023

0This section explains how to operate super control panel/LV super control panel using[Face & Eye Detection] as an example.

1

Press the Q button.
• If you press the button during live view, the LV supercontrol panel will be displayed in the monitor.
• The last setting used will be highlighted.

Cursor
Shooting Mode

P

Small

1/

250

-

0

5.6
+

ISO

Auto

200

0.0

s

3

WB Auto

S-AF

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:42:22

4567

0

G
0.3

EN 69

2

Highlight an item using FGHI.

Face & Eye DetectionP• The selected setting will be highlighted.
• You can also highlight items by tapping them in thedisplay.

1/

Small

250

-

F
+

0

5.6

ISO

Auto

± 0.0

WB Auto

3
S-AF

200

r

G
0.3

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:03

1023

0

The name of the selectedfunction appears.

3

Rotate the front/rear dial to change thehighlighted setting.

4
Shooting Settings• Press the shutter button halfway to save the current setting and exit to the shooting
display.

In this manual, the procedure for changing a setting using a direct button is shown as
follows.
Super Control Panel

Q n Face & Eye Detection

Additional Options

Pressing the Q button in Step 2 displays options for the highlighted
setting. In some cases, additional options can be configured.

Q button

INFO button
Single

P

Small

3
S-AF

1/

250

-

0

F
+

5.6

± 0.0

WB Auto

ISO

Auto

200
G
0.3

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS Auto

YF

YF

60p L-8
1:02:03

1023

0

LV Super Control Panel/Super Control Paneldisplay

70 EN

Q

INFO

r
Number of Frames
Y

1s

x3

ProCap

ProCap

0.5s

Off

INFO

Y

1s

x3

0.5s

Off

Custom Self-timer
ProCap SH1

SH2

Y12s Y 2s

♥Y

2s

YC

Selection menu display

Detailed setting display Settings Available in the Super Control/LV Super Control Panel
Photo shooting mode

LV super control panel
1
2 Natural
3
P
4
Small
5
3
6
7
S-AF
8
9

1/

250

-

F
+

0

5.6

± 0.0

Super control panel
ISO

Auto

200

r

CWB

5400K

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS AutoYF

60p L-8
1:02:03

l m

n

YF

1023

0

h ij k

G
0.3

0
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

1
2 Natural
3
P
4
Small
5
3
6
7
S-AF
8
9

1/

250

-

0

5.6

± 0.0

ISO

Auto

200

r

CWB

5400K

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS AutoYF

60p L-8
1:02:03

l m

n

YF

1023

h ij k

0

G
0.3

0
a
b
c
d
e
f
g

d K Button function assignment.....P. 208
e Manual flash output.......................P. 123
f Flash mode....................................P. 120
g K Image stabilizer.......................P. 136
h K Storage options.......................P. 243
i Face & Eye Detection......................P. 88
j Metering mode...............................P. 109
k Slot 1: K Image quality, number ofstorable still pictures......................P. 140
l Slot 2: K Image quality, number ofstorable still pictures......................P. 140
m Aspect ratio....................................P. 144
n n Image quality, Available recording
time................................................P. 141

4
Shooting Settings

1 Name of the currently selected option
2 Shutter speed............................P. 43, 47
3 Shooting mode................................P. 43
4 Exposure compensation................P. 106
5 K AF target....................................P. 77
6 K White balance..........................P. 150
7 K Picture mode...........................P. 145
8 K AF mode....................................P. 72
9 Drive mode (sequential shooting/self-timer).......................................P. 126
0 Aperture value...........................P. 43, 45
a K ISO sensitivity..........................P. 113
b Wi-Fi/Bluetooth..............................P. 261
c K Color temperature ...................P. 150

F+

Movie recording mode

LV Super control panel
1
2 Natural
3
nP
4
Mid
5
6
3
7
C-AF
8
±0
9
P 8

gh

1/
-

250

F
+

0

5.6
0.0

CWB

5400K

Off

M-IS 1

LR-dB 40

12

0

ISO

Auto

800

r

G
60p L-8
1:42:22

0
a
b
c
d
e
f

i

1 Name of the currently selected option
2 Shutter speed..................................P. 60
3 n mode (movie exposure mode).........................................................P. 60
4 Exposure compensation................P. 106
5 n AF target.....................................P. 77
6 n White balance..........................P. 150
7 n Picture mode............................P. 145
8 n AF mode.....................................P. 72
9 Sound Recording Level...................P. 62
0 Aperture value.................................P. 60

a n ISO sensitivity..........................P. 113
b Wi-Fi/Bluetooth..............................P. 261
c n Color temperature ....................P. 150
d n Button function assignment......P. 208
e n Image quality, Available recording
time................................................P. 141
f nImage stabilizer.........................P. 136
g Headphone Volume.........................P. 62
h Face & Eye Detection......................P. 88
i Recording level meter......................P. 62

EN 71

Basic functions for focusing
Choosing a focus mode (KAF Mode / nAF Mode)
PA S M B n

You can select a focusing method (focus mode).

4

ButtonAF m button n HIj

Super Control Panel

Q n KAF Mode / nAF Mode

Menu

MENU n AF n1. AF n KAF Mode
MENU n AF n4. Movie AF n nAF Mode

Shooting Settings

S‑AF(Single AF)

The camera focuses once when the shutter button is pressed halfway
or the AF-ON button is pressed. When the focus is locked in still
photography mode, a beep sounds, and the AF confirmation mark and
the AF target mark light up. When the focus is locked in movie recording
mode, the AF confirmation mark and the AF target are displayed. Thismode is suitable for taking pictures of still subjects or subjects withlimited movement.

In photo shooting mode, the camera repeats measuring the distance
between the subject and the camera and focusing while the shutter
button remains pressed halfway or while the AF-ON button is pressed.
C‑AF
When the subject is in focus, the AF confirmation mark lights up on the(Continuous AF) monitor and the beep sounds when the focus is locked at the first time.
In movie recording mode, the camera repeats focusing both before andduring recording.
This mode is suitable when the distance to the subject keeps changing.

MF(Manual focus)

This function allows you to manually focus on
any position by operating the focus ring on the
lens.

Near
)
Focus ring

S-AFb

72 EN

The camera focuses in S-AF mode. You can adjust the focus position by
operating the focus ring on the lens.

C‑AF+TR(AF tracking)Preb(Preset MF)

The camera automatically focuses on the preset focus point whenshooting.

FAF(Starry Sky AF)(only during
photo shooting)Choose this mode for pictures of stars in the night sky. Press the AF-ON
button to focus on the stars. g “Using Starry Sky AF” (P. 74)

4
Shooting Settings

Press the shutter button halfway or press the AF-ON button to focus; thecamera then tracks and maintains focus on the current subject while thebutton is held in position.
In movie recording mode, the camera keeps continues AF tracking even
if you release the button before you start recording. To stop it, press the
Q button.
When you start recording a movie while the camera is tracking the
subject, it will continue tracking.
• The AF target is displayed in red if the camera can no longer track
the subject. Release the button and then frame the subject again andpress the shutter button halfway or press the AF-ON button.
• Autofocus does not work while the AF target is displayed in red even if
the camera is tracking the subject.
• Tracking AF cannot be used with:
keystone compensation, High Res Shot, focus bracketing, focus
stacking, interval-timer photography, HDR photography, the live ND
filter, or fisheye correction.

# [S-AFb] only appears in [nAF Mode]. To focus manually during autofocus when
taking pictures, use [KAF+MF]. g “Combined Auto and Manual Focus (K AF+MF)”(P. 82)# The camera may be unable to focus if the subject is poorly lit, obscured by mist or smoke,or lacks contrast.
# When using a Four Thirds system lens, AF will not be available during movie recording.
# [AF Mode] selection is not available (P. 292) when the lens focus ring is in the MF
position and [Operative] is selected for [MF Clutch] (P. 104).
%The Fn lever can be used to quickly switch the AF mode. g “Customizing the Fn Lever(Fn Lever Settings)” (P. 219)
%You can choose whether to focus when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
g “Configuring the AF operation when the shutter button is pressed (KAF by halfpressing a)” (P. 83)

EN 73

Using Starry Sky AF

4
Shooting Settings
74 EN

1
2

Select [FAF] for AF mode.

3

Press the shutter button all the way down to take the picture.

Press the AF-ON button to initiate starry sky AF.

• To interrupt starry sky AF, press the AF-ON button again.
• You can configure the camera so that starry sky AF starts when the shutter button
is pressed halfway.g “Changing the settings of Starry Sky AF (Starry Sky AF
Setting)” (P. 85)• The camera displays [Starry Sky AF is Running] during starry sky AF. The in-focus
indicator (() is displayed for about two seconds after the camera focuses; if thecamera is unable to focus, the in-focus indicator will instead flash for about two
seconds.

# The camera will not be able to focus in bright locations.
# Starry sky AF cannot be used with Pro Capture.
# [KOrientation Linked N] (P. 97), [N Loop Settings] (P. 100), [KAF Limiter](P. 92), [AF Illuminator] (P. 96), [Face & Eye Detection] (P. 88), and [KAF
Scanner] (P. 94) are fixed at [Off] and [Frame Rate] (P. 225) is fixed at [Normal].
# Manual focus is selected when a Four Thirds lens is attached.
# Starry sky AF is available with Micro Four Thirds lenses made by OM Digital Solutions or
OLYMPUS. It cannot, however, be used with lenses with a maximum aperture over f/5.6.
For more information, visit our website.
%The [Starry Sky AF Setting] (P. 85) item offers a choice of [Accuracy] and [Speed].
Mount the camera on a tripod before taking photographs with [Accuracy] selected.
%Your choice of AF target modes (P. 77) is restricted to ySmall, AMid, andBLarge.
%The camera automatically focuses at infinity when starry sky AF is selected.
%When [On] is selected for [Release Priority], the shutter can be released even when thesubject is not in focus.

Setting a focus position for Preb

1
2

Select [Preb] with the AFm button, and press INFO button.

3

Press the Q button.

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.
• Focus can be adjusted by rotating the focus ring.

%The distance for the preset focus point can be set with [Preset MF distance] (P. 104).
%The camera also focuses at the preset distance:- when turned on and- when you exit the menus to the shooting display.

1

Choose a focus mode marked with an b icon (P. 72).

2

Press the shutter button halfway to focus using autofocus.

3

Keeping the shutter button pressed halfway, rotate the focus ring to adjust
focus manually.

• When recording movies, choose [S‑AFb].
• In [FAFb] mode, press the AF-ON button to initiate starry sky AF.

4
Shooting Settings

Adjusting Focus Manually During Autofocus• Before proceeding, select [On] for [K AF+MF] (P. 82). b will be displayed in [S‑AF],[C‑AF], [C‑AF+TR], and [FAF] modes.

• To refocus using autofocus, release the shutter button and press it halfway again.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is not available in [FAFb] mode.
• Manual focus adjustment during autofocus is available via the focus ring on M.ZUIKOPRO (Micro Four Thirds PRO) lenses. For information on other lenses, see our
website.

4

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture.

EN 75

Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)
PA S M B n

The frame showing the location of the focus point is referred to as the “AF target”. You
can position the target over your subject. At default settings, the multi selector is used
to position the AF target.

1

Use the multi selector to position the AF target.

4
Shooting Settings

Multi selector• The AF target is displayed at the start of the operation.
• To select the center AF target, press the multi selector
or press and hold the Q button.
• You can choose whether AF target selection “wraps
around” the edges of the display (P. 100).

f

Small

AF target

2

Take pictures.

• The AF target selection display will clear from the monitor when the shutter button ispressed halfway.
• The AF frame is displayed in place of the selected AF target.
%You can reposition the AF target during focusing when [C‑AF] or [C‑AFb] is selected instill photography mode.
%You can also reposition the AF target during movie recording.
%The size and number of the AF target changes depending on shooting settings.
%When [On] is selected for [AF Targeting Pad] (P. 101), you can reposition the AF target
using monitor touch controls while framing your subject in the viewfinder.

76 EN

Choosing an AF Target Mode (AF Target Mode)

ButtonS (kept pressed) and k

Super Control Panel

Q n AF Target Mode

1

Keep the multi selector pressed whilerotating the front or rear dial.

+

4
Shooting Settings

Multi selector• The camera cycles through AF target modes as shown.
f

All

f

Single

f

Small

f

Large

f Middlef

Cross• The only options available when FAF is selected are ySmall, AMiddle, andBLarge.
• The only options available during movie recording are ySmall, AMiddle, BLarge,
and oAll.
• The AF target modes to be displayed can be selected in [KAF Target Mode Settings](P. 79).
o All

f

All

f

Single

The camera chooses the target used for focus from allavailable targets.

• The camera chooses from 1053 (39 × 27) targets during still
photography and from 741 (39 × 19) targets in movie mode.

M Single

Select a single focus target.

EN 77

y SmallfSmallz Crossf

Cross

A Middle

f Middle

B Largef

Select a small-sized group of targets. The camera chooses
the target used for focus from within the selected group.

Select a group of targets arranged in a cross. The camera
chooses the target used for focus from within the selectedgroup.

4
Shooting Settings

Select a middle-sized group of targets. The camera
chooses the target used for focus from within the selectedgroup.

Large

Select a large-sized group of targets. The camera chooses
the target used for focus from within the selected group.

C C1 - C C4 Custom Target

You can change the size of the AF target and the step (the distance it moves at onetime). Custom target modes can be selected when there is a check (v) next to acustom target in [KAF Target Mode Settings] (P. 79).

2

Release the multi selector when the desired mode is displayed.

• AF target mode options will no longer be displayed.
%The number of AF targets available may be reduced depending on shooting settings.
%The AF target display can be accessed by pressing the multi selector. The multi selector
can be configured using [SCenter Button] (P. 218).
%Separate AF target modes can be selected according to camera orientation.
g “Matching AF Target Selection to Camera Orientation (KOrientation Linked N)”(P. 97)%The following focus settings can be recalled simultaneously using the Fn lever. Separate
settings can be assigned to Positions 1 and 2. Use this option to quickly adjust settings
according to shooting conditions.
[AF Mode] (P. 72), [AF Target Mode] (P. 77), and [AF Target Point] (P. 76)
The Fn lever can be configured using the [KFn Lever Function] item (P. 220) or the[nFn Lever Function] item (P. 220).
%You can adjust AF target settings for [C‑AF]. g [KC-AF Center Priority] (P. 86)%Separate options can be selected for still photography and movie mode.

78 EN

Setting the options for AF target modes
(KAF Target Mode Settings)
PA S M B n
Specify which options are displayed when setting the KAF Target Mode.
Menu

1

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n KAF Target
Mode Settings

Select the AF target modes that you want to havedisplayed as options and put a check (v) next toeach of them.

KAF Target Mode Settings

oAll
MSinglezCrossAMid• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.

BLargeOK

oAllzCrossAMid

If you put a check (v) next to an option, it will be displayed as theoption when selecting the AF target.

Shooting Settings

CC2
MENU

KAF Target Mode Settings
screenISingle4

CC1

BLargeIf you put a check (v) next to an option, it will be displayed as theoption when selecting the AF target mode.
Press I to configure the size of the
AF target and the step (the distance it
moves at one time).

Size
CC1

Step

3

1

3

1

MENU

Item

INFO

OK

Horizontal

VerticalSize

12 types (1 / 3 / 5 / 7/ 9 / 11 / 15 / 19 / 23 /27 / 33 / 39)
Switch using HI or
the front dial.

10 types (1 / 3 / 5 /7 / 9 / 11 / 15 / 19 /23 / 27)
Switch using FG
or the rear dial.

Step

8 types (1 to 8)
Switch using HI or
the front dial.

5 types (1 to 5)
Switch using FG
or the rear dial.

C C1 - C C4

Press the INFO button to switch between Size and Step.

EN 79

Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF 

(Super Spot AF)

PA S M B n

You can zoom in on the display during shooting. For greater precision during focusing,zoom in on the focus area. At higher zoom ratios, you can focus on areas smaller than
the standard focus target. You can reposition the focus area as desired during zoom.
ButtonA button to which a has been assigned# Before you will be able to use Super Spot AF, you must use [Button Settings] (P. 208) toassign [a] (P. 210) to a camera control.

4

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

a

100%

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

a

100%

Shooting Settings

3
Off

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

Shooting display

ISO
Auto

200

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

Zoom frame AF displaya

10x

Zoom AF displaya (Press and hold) / Q

1

Press the button to which [a] (magnify) is
assigned.

100%

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8• The zoom frame will be displayed.
Off

P

2

Position the frame using the multi selector.
• To re-center the frame, press the multi selector or press
and hold the Q button.
• The frame can also be positioned using the arrow pad(FGHI).

100%

Adjust the size of the zoom frame to choose thezoom ratio.

• Press the INFO button and then use the FG buttons
or the front or rear dial to adjust the size of the zoom
frame.
• Press the Q button to accept and exit.

80 EN

F 5.6

-

0

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

+

0.0

1 LF

Off

P

3

1/ 250100%

3x

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

1 4K 60p L-8

4

Press the button to which [a] is assigned once
more.

3x

100%

4
Bulb

F 5.6

Exposure adjustment display
for modes M and B# Focus zoom applies to the display only. Pictures taken with the camera are not affected.
# Zoom AF does not work during zoom display and when using a Four Thirds system lens.
# When [nDigital Tele-converter] is [On] in movie recording mode, camera cannot zoom.
%Pictures can also be taken during zoom frame AF display and zoom AF display.
%Touch controls can be used for focus zoom. g “Shooting with touch screen operations”(P. 41)%You can configure the camera to exit focus zoom when the shutter button is pressedhalfway to focus. g “Choosing What Happens When the Shutter Button Is Pressed
During Live View Zoom (LV Close Up Mode)” (P. 223)

Shooting Settings• The camera will zoom the selected area in to fill thedisplay.
• Use the front or rear dial to zoom in or out.
• Use the multi selector to scroll the display.
• Use FGHI to scroll the display.
• If the shooting mode is M (manual) or B (bulb) and [ISOAuto] is not selected, you can press the INFO button
during zoom to choose aperture or shutter speed.
• Press the a button to return to the zoom frame.
• Press the Q button to end focus zoom.
• You can also end focus zoom by pressing and holding
the a button.

100%

EN 81

Functions for configuring how to focus
Combined Auto and Manual Focus

(K AF+MF)

PA S M B n

After focusing using autofocus, you can adjust focus manually by keeping the shutter
button pressed halfway and rotating the focus ring. Switch from auto to manual focus atwill or fine-tune focus manually after focusing with autofocus.
%The procedure varies with the AF mode selected.

4

Menu

MENU n AF n1. AF n KAF+MF

Shooting Settings

On

Enable manual focus adjustment in autofocus mode. b is displayed next to[S‑AF], [C‑AF], [C‑AF+TR], or [FAF].
• When [S‑AFb] is selected, you can keep the shutter button pressed halfway or
keep the AF-ON button pressed after focusing using single AF and adjust focus
manually. Alternatively, you can switch to manual focus by rotating the focus ring
while the camera is focusing. Focus can also be adjusted manually while the
shutter is open and during burst photography.
• When [C‑AFb] or [C‑AF+TRb] is selected, you can switch to manual focus
by rotating the focus ring while the camera is focusing in continuous AF andcontinuous tracking AF modes. Press the shutter button halfway or press the AFON button a second time to refocus using autofocus. Focus can also be adjusted
manually while the shutter is open and during burst photography.
• When [FAFb] is selected, you can focus manually after focusing or before
initiating focus using autofocus.

Off

Manual focus adjustment disabled during autofocus.

# Manual focus is not available during burst photography in [♥jSH1] or [ProCap SH1]
mode.
%Autofocus with manual focus is also available when autofocus is assigned to other camera
controls. g “Changing the roles of buttons (Button Settings)” (P. 208)
%The lens focus ring can be used to interrupt autofocus only when M.ZUIKO PRO (Micro
Four Thirds PRO) lenses are used. For information on other lenses, visit our website.
%In B (bulb) mode, manual focus is controlled by the option selected for [Bulb/Time
Focusing] (P. 173).

82 EN

Configuring the AF operation when the shutter button is pressed(KAF by half-pressing a)
PA S M B n
You can choose whether the camera focuses when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
MENU n AF n1. AF n KAF by half-pressing a

S-AF

Set the AF operation for when the AF mode is [S-AF].
[No]: The camera does not start AF operation when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Yes]: The camera starts AF operation when the shutter button
is pressed halfway. If you press the shutter button halfway whilepressing the AF-ON button, autofocus will be continued.

C-AF/C-AF+TR

Set the AF operation for when the AF mode is [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR].
[No]: The camera does not start AF operation when the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
[Yes]: The camera starts AF operation when the shutter button
is pressed halfway. If you press the shutter button halfway whilepressing the AF-ON button, autofocus will be continued.

Autofocus using the AF-ON button

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

PA S M B n

The camera starts AF operation when you press the AF-ON button. Autofocus ends
when you release the AF-ON button. When you press the AF-ON button while thecamera is performing autofocus because the shutter button has been pressed halfway,
autofocus will be continued.
ButtonAF-ON button%If [C-AF] is selected for [nAF Mode], the camera operates in S-AF mode when the
AF-ON button is pressed during movie recording. If [C-AF+TR] is selected, the camera
performs AF tracking when the AF-ON button is pressed.

EN 83

Using Autofocus in Manual Focus Mode(e in MF mode)
PA S M B n

You can configure the camera so that it focuses with autofocus when you press the
AF-ON button, even if the AF mode is [MF] or [Preb].

4
Shooting Settings
84 EN

Menu

MENU n AF n1. AF n e in MF modeNo

If the AF mode is [MF] or [Preb], the camera does not focus with
autofocus even when the AF-ON button is pressed.

Yes

If the AF mode is [MF] or [Preb], the camera focuses with
autofocus in [S-AF] mode when the AF-ON button is pressed.

Configuring camera operation when it cannot focus on the subject
(Release Priority)
PA S M B n
You can choose whether the camera takes a picture when it cannot focus on thesubject with autofocus.
Menu

MENU n AF n1. AF n Release Priority

S-AF

Set the camera operation for when the AF mode is [S-AF] and it
cannot focus on the subject with autofocus.
[Off]: If the camera cannot focus on the subject with autofocus, theshutter cannot be released even when the shutter button is pressed
fully. If the flash is configured to fire, the shutter cannot be released
until the flash is charged.
[On]: The shutter is released when the shutter button is pressed
fully, even if the camera cannot focus on the subject with autofocus.

C-AF/C-AF+TR

Set the camera operation for when the AF mode is [C-AF] or[C-AF+TR] and it cannot focus on the subject with autofocus.
[Off]: If the camera cannot focus on the subject with autofocus, theshutter cannot be released even when the shutter button is pressed
fully. If the flash is configured to fire, the shutter cannot be released
until the flash is charged.
[On]: The shutter is released when the shutter button is pressed
fully, even if the camera cannot focus on the subject with autofocus.

Changing the settings of Starry Sky AF

(Starry Sky AF Setting)
PA S M B n

You can configure the operation of the Starry Sky AF function.
MENU n AF n1. AF n Starry Sky AF Setting

AF Priority[Accuracy]: Prioritize focus accuracy over speed. Use a tripod.
[Speed]: Prioritize focus speed over accuracy.

AF Operation[a]: Focuses with autofocus while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
[e]: Focuses with autofocus while the AF-ON button is pressed.
[eStart/Stop]: Focusing starts when the AF-ON button ispressed. Press again to stop focusing.

Release Priority[Off]:
If [AF Operation] is set to [a], the shutter cannot be released evenwhen the shutter button is pressed fully, unless the camera is in
focus.
If [AF Operation] is set to [e] and the AF-ON button is pressed,
the shutter cannot be released even when the shutter button ispressed fully, unless the camera is in focus. If the AF-ON button
is not pressed, you can start shooting at any time by pressing the
shutter button fully.
If [AF Operation] is set to [eStart/Stop] and Starry Sky AF isbeing executed, shooting does not start even when the shutter
button is pressed fully. If Starry Sky AF is not being executed, you
can start shooting at any time by pressing the shutter button fully.
[On]:
Shooting starts when the shutter button is pressed fully, regardlessof the setting of [AF Operation].

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

EN 85

Functions for customizing AF operation to fit the subject
C‑AF Center Target Priority 

4(KC-AF Center Priority)
PA S M B n

When focusing using group-target AF in [C‑AF] and [C‑AFb] modes, the camera
always assigns priority to the center target in the selected group for a repeated seriesof focus operations. Only if the camera is unable to focus using the center focus target
will it focus using the surrounding targets in the selected focus group. This helps
you track subjects that are moving quickly but relatively predictably. Center priority is
recommended in most situations.
Menu

Shooting Settings

1

MENU n AF n3. AF n KC-AF Center Priority

Select an AF target mode for which the camera
always assigns priority to the center target for arepeated series of focus operations and put a check(v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

z CrossA Mid
B Large

KC-AF Center Priority

zCrossAMid
BLarge
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC4
MENU

OK

KC-AF Center Priority
setting screen

If you put a check (v) next to an option, the camera always assigns
priority to the center target for a repeated series of focus operations
when the AF target mode is used.

C C1 - C C4
# C C1 - C C4 can only be checked (v) when either the horizontal or vertical [Size]
specified in [KAF Target Mode Settings] (P. 79) is 5 or larger.

86 EN

C‑AF Tracking Sensitivity  (KC-AF Sensitivity / nC-AF Sensitivity)
PA S M B n
Choose how rapidly the camera responds to changes in the distance to the subject
while focusing with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR] or [C-AF+TRb] selected for[KAF Mode], or with [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] selected for [nAF Mode]. This can help
autofocus track a quickly-moving subject or prevent the camera refocusing when an
object passes between the subject and the camera.
Menu

MENU n AF n1. AF n KC-AF Sensitivity
MENU n AF n4. Movie AF n nC-AF Sensitivity

C-AF Focus Speed

(nC-AF Speed)
PA S M B n

4
Shooting Settings• Choose from five levels ([KC-AF Sensitivity]) / three levels ([nC-AF Sensitivity]) oftracking sensitivity.
• The higher the value, the higher the sensitivity. Choose positive values for subjects thatsuddenly enter the frame, that are moving rapidly away from the camera, or that change
speed or stop suddenly while moving toward or away from the camera.
• The lower the value, the lower the sensitivity. Choose negative values to prevent thecamera refocusing when the subject is briefly obscured by other objects or to prevent thecamera focusing on the background when you are unable to keep the subject in the AF
target.

Choose how quickly the camera responds to changes to the distance to subject when
[C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for focus mode. This can be used to adjust the time
the camera takes to refocus when, for example, you switch subjects.
Menu

MENU n AF n4. Movie AF n nC-AF Speed• Choose from three focus speed levels.
• Refocusing is quicker at +1 and slower at −1. Choose −1 to refocus slowly when shifting
to a new subject.

EN 87

Face priority AF/Eye priority AF 

(Face & Eye Detection)

The camera automatically detects and focuses on the faces or eyes of portrait
subjects.
Super Control Panel

Q n Face & Eye Detection

Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n Face & Eye Detection
Face Detection On

The camera detects and focuses on faces.

Off

Face priority AF off.

Ii

Face & Eye Detection On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the eyeclosest to the camera.

IiL

Face & Left Eye
Detection On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the left eye.

IiR

Face & Right Eye
Detection On

The camera detects faces and focuses on the right eye.

I

4Shooting Settings

 Selecting a face to focus on

1

Point the camera at your subject.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

88 EN

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

-

2

1 LF

i
• When the camera detects faces, a white frame appearson the face which is focused on. Gray frames appear
on other faces. On the face which is focused on, an
3additional frame appears surrounding the white frame.
• When eye priority is on, white frames also appear on
1/ 250
F 5.6
0.0
200
P
the eyes of the face which is focused on. The frames on
The face chosen for focus
the eyes can be hidden from the menu (P. 91).
is indicated by white double• When faces/eyes of multiple persons are detected,
brackets.
choose the face to focus on by pressing the button towhich [IFace Selection] (P. 212) has been assigned
in [Button Settings] (P. 208). When you press the
button, a face that is closest to the AF target is selected.
Switch faces by rotating the front or rear dial while
holding the button pressed. Release the button to
finalize your choice.
• The face used for focus can also be selected via touch controls (P. 41).

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

%You can also press the AF-ON button to focus(P. 83).
• The area of the subject used for focus is indicated by agreen border.
• If the camera detects the subject’s eyes, it will focus onan eye.
• Face and eye priority are also available in [MF](P. 72). Faces and eyes detected by the camera
are indicated by white frames. Exposure will be set
according to the value metered for the center of theface.

100% r O

0

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

+

ISO
Auto

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF
i

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

3

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to shoot.
• When set to [p] (Digital ESP metering) (P. 109), metering is performed with priority
given to faces.

# You may be unable to use [Face & Eye Detection] depending on the setting of [Subject
Detection] (P. 90). Set [Subject Detection] to [Off].
# Depending on the subject and the art filter setting, the camera may not be able to correctly
detect the face.
# This function is disabled when the AF target mode (P. 77) is ISingle or ySmall, themetering mode (P. 109) is C and [NSpot Metering] (P. 112)is being used.
# This function is disabled when the [KAF Mode] (P. 72) is set to [FAF] or [FAFb].
%We recommend selecting [Off] when photographing non-portrait subjects using [C‑AF] or[C‑AFb] in still photography mode.

PA S M B n

You can configure the camera so that pressing the shutter button halfway or pressing
the AF-ON button does not make the camera focus on faces and eyes even when
[KFace & Eye AF Button] is set to a setting other than [Off].
Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n KFace & Eye AF ButtonaSelect the AF operation for when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
[I Priority]: When the camera detects faces and/or eyes, itfocuses on faces and/or eyes.
[N Priority]: Even when the camera detects faces and/or
eyes, the camera focuses giving priority to the selected AF target
positions.

eSelect the AF operation for when the AF-ON button is pressed.
[I Priority]: When the camera detects faces and/or eyes, itfocuses on faces and/or eyes.
[N Priority]: Even when the camera detects faces and/or
eyes, the camera focuses giving priority to the selected AF target
positions.

Shooting Settings

 Assigning focus priority to buttons (KFace & Eye AF Button)

4

EN 89

Tracking Focus on Selected Subjects

(Subject Detection)
PA S M B n

The camera can detect subjects of specific types when focusing. You may find it hard
to focus on the driver or cockpit of a fast-moving subject such as a race car or airplane.
This feature detects and focuses on specific elements of such subjects.

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n Subject Detection

D

The camera detects cars or motorcycles. It tracks focus on suchelements as the chassis (chiefly of types used in motor sports) ordriver.

E

The camera detects planes and helicopters. It tracks focus on suchelements as the fuselage or cockpit.

F

The camera detects trains. It tracks focus on such elements as thecars or driver’s compartment.

G

The camera detects birds. It tracks focus on such elements as thehead or eyes.

H

The camera detects cats, dogs and similar animals. It tracks focus
on such elements as the head or eyes.

Off

Tracking subject selection disabled.

# When you set this to a setting other than [Off], [Face & Eye Detection] is set to [Off].
# During photo shooting, this function is disabled when [KAF Mode] is set to [FAF] or[FAFb].
During movie recording, this function is available only when [nAF Mode] is set to[C-AF+TR].

90 EN

 Taking Pictures Using [Subject Detection]1

Select the [KAF Mode] or the [nAF Mode].

2

Point the camera at your subject.

• For photo shooting, select a setting other than [FAF] or [FAFb].
• For movie recording, select [C-AF+TR].
1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

D

1 4K 60p L-8

AF Limit S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

3

Press the shutter button halfway to focus.

4

Press the shutter button the rest of the way down to take the picture.

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

• You can also press the AF-ON button to focus (P. 83).
• When the camera focuses on a subject, a green frame appears on the focus position.
• When the camera detects specific elements such as the driver or the cockpit, it
focuses on them.

4
Shooting Settings• When the camera detects subjects, a white frame
appears on the subject which is focused on. Grayframes appear on other subjects. On the subject which
is focused on, an additional frame appears surrounding
the white frame.
• If the white frame indicating a subject to be focused ondoes not appear, change the size and/or position of the
AF target so that it covers the subject.
When the AF target mode is o All, the subject
closest to the center of the display is focused on.
• When the camera further detects specific elements
such as the driver or the cockpit, smaller white framesalso appears on them. These frames can be hiddenfrom the menu (P. 91).

100% r O# The camera may fail to detect the subject depending on the subject or art filter selected.
# The camera may fail to detect the subject depending on its type or on shooting conditions.

Configuring the frame displays for detected eyes(Eye Detection Frame)
PA S M B n
You can choose whether to display small frames when the camera detects small parts
such as the eyes and cockpits.
Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n Eye Detection Frame

OffFrames are not displayed on small parts such as the eyes or
cockpits.

On

Frames are displayed on small parts such as the eyes or cockpits.

• Even if [Eye Detection Frame] is set to [Off], the camera focuses on the eyes or specificelements such as the cockpit when they are detected.

EN 91

Functions for changing camera operation regarding
focus
Lens Focus Range

4(KAF Limiter)
PA S M B n

Choose the range in which the camera will focus using autofocus. This is effective insituations in which an obstacle presents itself between the subject and the camera
during the focus operation, causing drastic changes in focus. You can also use it toprevent the camera focusing on foreground objects when shooting through a fence,
window, or the like.
 Using the settings saved in [AF Limiter]

Shooting Settings

Menu

1
2

MENU n AF n3. AF n KAF Limiter

Select [AF Limiter] using FG and press the Q
button.
Select [On1] / [On2] / [On3] using FG and press
the Q button.

KAF Limiter

AF Limiter

Off

Release Priority

5.0~999.9m
10.0~999.9m
50.0~999.9m
On

MENU

OK

Distance for On1
Distance for On2
Distance for On3

KAF Limiter setting screen

OffThe camera does not use the saved range of focusing distances.

On1

The camera uses the range saved in [Distance for On1].

On2

The camera uses the range saved in [Distance for On2].

On3

The camera uses the range saved in [Distance for On3].

3

Return to the KAF Limiter setting screen.

# AF Limiter is not available in the following cases.
- When the focus limiter is enabled on the lens- When using focus bracketing- While in the movie mode or recording a movie- When [FAF] or [FAFb] is selected for focus mode

92 EN

 Configuring [AF Limiter]

1

Configure options.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• Press the Q button again to return to the KAF Limiter
setting screen.

KAF Limiter

AF Limiter

On1

Release Priority

5.0~999.9m
10.0~999.9m
50.0~999.9m
On

MENU

OK

Distance for On1
Distance for On2
Distance for On3

Set the range of focusing distances to be used when [On1] isselected.
Change the number with FG. Use HI to move between digits.
[000.0] – [999.9 m/ft]

Distance for On2

Set the range of focusing distances to be used when [On2] isselected.
Change the number with FG. Use HI to move between digits.
[000.0] – [999.9 m/ft]

Distance for On3

Set the range of focusing distances to be used when [On3] isselected.
Change the number with FG. Use HI to move between digits.
[000.0] – [999.9 m/ft]

Release Priority[Off]: Complies to the [Release Priority] (P. 84) setting.
[On]: The shutter can still be released if the camera is unable tofocus when a setting other than [Off] is selected for [AF Limiter].

4
Shooting Settings

Distance for On1# The figures displayed in [Distance for On1] - [Distance for On3] are intended as guides
only.

EN 93

C-AF Lens Scanning(KAF Scanner)
PA S M B n

Choose whether the camera performs a focus scan. If the camera is unable to focus,
it will scan for the focus position by cycling the lens from the minimum focus distanceto infinity. You can limit the scanning operation if desired. This option takes effectwhen [C-AF], [C-AF+TR], [C-AFb], or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [KAF Mode](P. 72).

4
Shooting Settings
94 EN

Menu

MENU n AF n3. AF n KAF Scanner

OffThe camera will not scan if unable to focus. This prevents focus
changing to such an extent that you lose sight of your subject whenattempting to track small objects and the like.

On

When unable to focus, the camera scans only once. The camera will
not scan again as long as the focus operation continues.

• Regardless of the option selected, the camera will scan once if unable to focus when [SAF] or [S-AFb] is selected for [KAF Mode].

Fine-Tuning Autofocus

(KAF Focus Adjustment)
PA S M B n

Fine-tune phase-detection autofocus. Focus can be fine-tuned by up to ±20 steps.
Menu

MENU n AF n3. AF n KAF Focus Adjustment# Normally there is no need to fine-tune autofocus using this item. Fine-tuning focus may
prevent the camera focusing normally.
# Focus fine-tuning has no effect in [S‑AF] and [S‑AFb] modes.

 Using the saved focus adjustment value

Select [AF Focus Adjustment] using FG andpress the Q button.

2

Select [On] using FG and press the Q button.

KAF Focus Adjustment

AF Focus Adjustment

OffFine-tuning Value

±0

MENU

OK

KAF Focus Adjustment
setting screen

OffThe camera does not use the saved focus adjustment value.

On

The camera uses the saved focus adjustment value.

3

4
Shooting Settings

1

Return to the KAF Focus Adjustment setting screen.

 Configuring [AF Focus Adjustment]

1

Configure the option.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• Press the Q button again to return to the KAF Focus
Adjustment setting screen.

KAF Focus Adjustment

AF Focus Adjustment

On

Fine-tuning Value

±0

MENU

Fine-tuning ValueOK

Adjusts focus for all lenses. Focus can be fine-tuned by up to ±20
steps.
[-20] – [±0] – [+20]%You can zoom in on the display by using the front dial or R button to check the results.
%You can take a test picture to check the results by pressing the shutter button before
pressing the Q button.

EN 95

AF Illuminator Autofocus Assist(AF Illuminator)

PA S M B n

The AF illuminator lights to assist the focus operation when lighting is poor.

4
Shooting Settings
96 EN

Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n AF IlluminatorOn

The illuminator lights during autofocus if the subject is poorly lit.

OffThe illuminator does not light even if the subject is poorly lit.

# To use the AF illuminator during silent photography, you will need to change the option
selected for [Silents Settings] (P. 132).

AF Target Display Mode(AF Area Pointer)
PA S M B n

In autofocus mode, the position of the subject on which the camera has focused isshown by a green focus target. This item controls the display of the focus target.
Menu

MENU n AF n2. AF n AF Area Pointer

OffThe focus target is not displayed.

On1

The focus target is displayed only briefly after the camera focuses.

On2

After the camera focuses, cluster AF targeting is enabled and thecamera will display AF targets for all areas that are in focus while the
shutter button is pressed halfway or the AF-ON button is pressed.

Functions for setting the focusing position
Matching AF Target Selection to Camera Orientation(KOrientation Linked N)
PA S M B n

Menu

1

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n
KOrientation Linked N

Select a function with which you want to savedifferent settings for landscape and portrait
orientations, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

KOrientation Linked N

AF Target Mode
AF Target Point

MENU

4
Shooting Settings

The camera can be configured to change the AF target position and AF target mode
automatically when it detects that it has been rotated between landscape (wide)or portrait (tall) orientations. Rotating the camera changes the composition andconsequently also the position of the subject in the frame. The camera can store the
AF target mode and AF target position separately according to camera orientation.
When this option is active, [KN Set Home] (P. 98) can be used to store separate
home positions for landscape and portrait orientations.

OK

KOrientation Linked N
setting screen

AF Target Mode

When you put a check (v) next to this, the camera saves separate
AF target modes (e.g., oAll, ySmall) for landscape and portrait
orientations.

AF Target Point

When you put a check (v) next to this, the camera saves separate
AF target positions for landscape and portrait orientations.

2
3
4

The display returns to the KOrientation Linked N setting screen.
Press the MENU button to return to shooting screen.
Choose the AF target mode or target position with the camera first in one
orientation and then the other.
• Separate settings are stored for landscape orientation, portrait orientation with thecamera rotated to the right, and portrait orientation with the camera rotated to the left.

EN 97

Choosing the AF Home Position (KN Set Home)PA S M B n

Choose the home position for the [NHome] feature. The [NHome] feature lets you
recall a previously-saved “home position” for AF target at the touch of a button. This
item is used to choose the home position.
Menu

4

1

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n KN Set
Home

Select a setting you wish to store with the home
position and put a check (v) next to it.

KN Set HomeAF Target ModeoAll

AF Target Point

Shooting Settings• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.
MENU

H

OK

AF Target Mode

Choose the home position AF target mode. Only options selected for[KAF Target Mode Settings] (P. 79) are available.

AF Target Point

Choose the home position focus target position.

2

Press I to configure options for the selected item.
• Choose settings for the home position• When [KOrientation Linked N] is active, you will be prompted to select landscapeor portrait (camera rotated left/camera rotated right) orientation before pressing the
Q button to display options.

 Using the [NHome] function
The [NHome] function can be used in the following ways.

• In [KButton Function] (P. 208), assign [NHome] to a button. The AF target moves tothe saved home position when you press the button.
• Select [NHP] for [SCenter Button] (P. 218). The AF target moves to the saved home
position when you press the multi selector.

98 EN

AF Target Selection

(NSelect Screen Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials or arrow pad during AF target
selection. The controls used can be selected according to how the camera is used or
personal taste.
Menu

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n NSelect
Screen Settings

d button

Assign roles to FGHI.
[Off]: None.
[6Pos]: Position the AF target (P. 76).
[NMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., oAll, ySmall)(P. 77).

4
Shooting Settings

f dialAssign roles to the front and rear dials.
[Off]: None.
[6Pos]: Position the AF target (P. 76).
[NMode]: Choose the AF target mode (e.g., oAll, ySmall)(P. 77).

EN 99

Enabling AF Target Selection Wrap

(N Loop Settings)
PA S M B n

You can choose whether AF target selection “wraps around” the edges of the display.
You can also choose whether you have the option of selecting oAll (all targets)
before AF target selection “wraps around” to the opposite border of the display.
Menu

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n N Loop
Settings[Off]: Wrap disabled. Target selection stays within the borders of thedisplay.

4
Shooting Settings[Loop 1]: If you continue to press themulti selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, thetarget in the same row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.
N LoopSelection“Loop 1”[Loop 2]: If you continue to press themulti selector in the same direction after
reaching the border of the display, thetarget in the next row or column on the
opposite border will be selected.

“Loop 2”

Via oAll[No]: Target selection does not pass through oAll (all targets) before
wrapping around.
[Yes]: If [Loop 1] or [Loop 2] is chosen for [N Loop Selection], target
selection will pass through oAll (all targets) before wrapping aroundto the opposite border.
• Hiding oAll (all targets) in [KAF Target Mode Settings] fixes [ViaoAll] at [No].

# [N Loop Settings] is fixed at [Off] during movie recording and when [FAF] or [FAFb]
is selected for focus mode.

100 EN

Touch AF Target Selection for Viewfinder Photography
(AF Targeting Pad)
PA S M B n
Use touch controls in the monitor to select the AF target during viewfinder photography.
Glide a finger over the monitor to position the focus target while viewing your subject inthe viewfinder.
Menu

MENU n AF n5. AF Target Settings & Operations n AF Targeting
Pad
Monitor touch controls cannot be used for AF target selection during
viewfinder photography.

On

Monitor touch controls can be used for AF target selection during
viewfinder photography. Gently tap the monitor twice to enable ordisable touch AF target selection. When the target reaches theedge of the display and you lift and glide your finger again, the AF
target moves to the other side or becomes oAll (all target) mode
depending on the [N Loop Selection] setting (P. 100).

%When [On] is selected, touch controls can also be used to position the zoom frame(P. 80).

4
Shooting Settings

Off

EN 101Other functions that are useful when focusing
Manual Focus Assist (MF Assist)

PA S M B n

This is a focus assist function for MF. When the focus ring is rotated, the edge of thesubject is enhanced or a portion of the screen display is magnified. When you stop
operating the focus ring, the screen returns to the original display.
Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n MF Assist

Magnify

Magnifies a portion of the screen.
[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Magnifies a portion of the screen.
The portion to be magnified can be set in advance using AF target.
g “Choosing a Focus Target (AF Target Point)” (P. 76)

Peaking

Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement.
[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Displays clearly defined outlines with edge enhancement.
You can select the enhancement color and intensity. g “Focus
Peaking Options (Peaking Settings)” (P. 103)

Focus Indicator

Rotating the focus ring during manual focus displays an indicatorshowing the direction and approximate amount of rotation required
to bring the subject into focus.
[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Rotating the focus ring during manual focus displays anindicator showing the direction and approximate amount of rotation
required to bring the subject into focus.

4
Shooting Settings# When Peaking is in use, the edges of small subjects tend to be enhanced more strongly.
This is no guarantee of accurate focusing.
# Focus zoom is not available in the following instances:
During movie recording / when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for focus mode
/ during a multiple exposure / when [nDigital Tele-converter] is set to [On] in movie
recording mode
# When using third-party lenses with focus clutch mechanism, the direction of focus and thedisplay of Focus Indicator may be reversed. If this happens, change the setting of [Focus
Ring] (P. 104).
# Focus Indicator cannot be displayed when using a Four-Thirds system lens.
%Rotate the front or rear dial to zoom in or out during focus zoom.
%Press the INFO button to change the color and intensity when Peaking is displayed.

102 ENFocus Peaking Options(Peaking Settings)
PA S M B n

Highlight objects using color outlines. This makes objects that are in focus easier tosee during manual focus and the like.
A button to which [Peaking] has been assigned n INFO button

Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n Peaking Settings

Peaking Color

Choose the focus peaking color.
[White] / [Black] / [Red] / [Yellow]

Highlight Intensity

Choose the focus peaking level.
[Low] / [Normal] / [High]

Image Brightness
Adj.

Adjust background brightness to make focus peaking easier to see.
[Off]: Normal display.
[On]: Adjusts background brightness.

• When [On] is selected for [Image Brightness Adj.], the live view display may be brighter or
darker than the final photograph.

 Using Focus Peaking
The following options are available for using focus peaking.

• Assigning [Peaking Settings] to a control using [KButton Function] or [nButton
Function]: Focus peaking can be assigned to a control by selecting [Peaking] for[KButton Function] (P. 208) or [nButton Function] (P. 208). Pressing the button
enables focus peaking. [Peaking] can also be selected for [Multi Function] (P. 215).
• Using [Peaking] for [MF Assist]:
If [Peaking] is selected for [MF Assist], focus peaking will activate automatically when thelens focus ring is rotated.
%Press the INFO button to view peaking options.

4
Shooting Settings

Button

EN 103

Choosing a Focus Distance for Preset MF

(Preset MF distance)
PA S M B n

Set the focusing position for Preset MF.
Specify the number and unit (m or ft).
Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n Preset MF distance# If the lens is equipped with a focus limiter, disable it before proceeding.
# The figures displayed are intended as guides only.

Disabling the MF Clutch

4(MF Clutch)

PA S M B n

Shooting Settings

Disable the manual focus clutch, which is found on some lenses. This can prevent
autofocus being disabled by the focus ring being rotated accidentally.
Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n MF Clutch

Operative

The camera responds to the position of the lens focus ring.

Inoperative

The camera focuses according to the option selected for [KAF
Mode] / [nAF Mode], regardless of the position of the lens focus
ring.

# Manual focus using the lens focus ring is not available when [Inoperative] is selected for[MF Clutch], even if the lens focus ring is in the manual focus position.
%For details about lenses equipped with MF clutch, see P. 292.

Lens Focus Direction

(Focus Ring)
PA S M B n

Choose the direction in which the focus ring is rotated to adjust focus.

104 EN

Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n Focus Ring

V

Rotate the ring counterclockwise to increase the focus distance.

U

Rotate the ring clockwise to increase the focus distance.

Resetting the Lens Position at Shutdown(Reset Lens)

PA S M B n

You have the option of not restoring the lens to the reset focus position when thecamera is turned off. This lets you turn the camera off without changing the focus
position.
Menu

MENU n AF n6. MF n Reset Lens

OffThe lens focus position is not reset when the camera is turned off.
Power zoom lenses also return to the zoom position they were in
before the camera was turned off.

On

The lens focus position is reset when the camera is turned off.

4
Shooting Settings
EN 105

Metering and Exposure
Controlling exposure (Exposure Compensation)
PA S M B n

The exposure selected automatically by the camera can be altered to suit your artistic
intent. Choose positive values to make pictures brighter, negative values to make themdarker.

4

Button*F (Exposure compensation) button n HIkj

Super Control Panel

Q n Exposure Comp.

Shooting Settings* When using in M mode, rotate the front or rear dial while pressing the F (Exposurecompensation) button.
%To enable exposure compensation in mode M, select [Auto] for [K ISO] (P. 113).

Negative (–)

No compensation (0)• During photo shooting, exposure compensation can be
adjusted by up to ±5.0 EV. The viewfinder and live view
show the effects of values not exceeding ±3.0 EV. The
exposure bar flashes when the value exceeds ±3.0 EV.
• During movie recording, exposure compensation can be
adjusted by ±3.0 EV.
• To preview the effects of exposure compensation in live
view, select [Standard] for [KLV Mode] (P. 225) and [Off]for [KNight Vision] (P. 225).

Positive (+)
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

+1.3

ISO
Auto

• The front and rear dials or touch controls can be used to adjust exposure during movie
recording.

106 EN

200

Exposure bar
Exposurecompensation Adjusting Exposure Compensation
Modes P, A, and S
In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [P], [A], or [S] is selected for[nMode] (movie exposure mode) (P. 60).

1

Rotate the front dial to adjust exposure compensation.

2

Take pictures.

• You can also choose a value by pressing the F button and using HI.

Mode M
In movie mode, exposure compensation can be adjusted when [M] is selected for [nMode](movie exposure mode). You must first however select [On] for [bISO-Auto] (P. 115) and[Auto] for [n ISO] (P. 113).

Press the F button and then rotate the front dial or rear dial to adjust
exposure compensation.

2

Take pictures.

 Resetting Exposure Compensation
To reset exposure compensation, press and hold the Q button.

EV Steps for Exposure Control(EV Step)
PA S M B n

Shooting Settings

1

4

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting shutter speed, aperture,
exposure compensation, and other exposure-related settings. Choose from 1/3, 1/2,
and 1 EV.
Menu

MENU n _ n4. Exposure n EV Step

Fine-Tuning Exposure(Exposure Shift)
PA S M B n

Fine-tune exposure. Use this option if you want the results of auto exposure to beconsistently brighter or darker.

# Fine-tuning is not normally required. Use only as necessary. In normal circumstances,
exposure can be adjusted using exposure compensation (P. 106).
# Fine-tuning exposure reduces the amount of exposure compensation available in the
direction (+ or −) exposure was fine-tuned.
Menu

MENU n _ n4. Exposure n Exposure Shiftp (digital ESP)

Set the fine-tuning amount for when the metering method is p.
[-1] – [±0] – [+1]B (centerweighted
averaging)Set the fine-tuning amount for when the metering method is B.
[-1] – [±0] – [+1]C (spot)

Set the fine-tuning amount for when the metering method is C.
[-1] – [±0] – [+1]

EN 107

Reducing Flicker Under LED Lighting
(KFlicker Scan / nFlicker Scan)
PA S M B n
Banding may occur in photographs taken under LED lighting. Use [KFlicker Scan] /[nFlicker Scan] to optimize shutter speed while viewing banding in the display.

# K: This item can be used in S, M, and silent mode and with Pro Capture shooting.
n: This item can be used when [nMode] (movie exposure mode) is [S] or [M].
# The range of available shutter speeds is reduced.

4

Menu

MENU n _ n4. Exposure n KFlicker Scan
MENU n n n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n nFlicker Scan

• When set to [On], “FlickerScan” will be displayed.

FlickerScan

Shooting Settings

100%

S

FlickerScan

1/ 250.0# Focus peaking and the LV super control panel are not available in the flicker scan display.
To view these items, first press the INFO button to exit the flicker scan display.

 Choosing the Shutter Speed• Choose a shutter speed using the front or rear dial or the FG buttons. If desired,
the shutter speed can be selected by keeping FG pressed.
• You can also rotate the front dial to adjust shutter speed in the exposure increments
selected for [EV Step] (P. 107).
• Continue adjusting shutter speed until banding is no longer visible in the display.
Magnifying the display (P. 80) makes it easier to check for banding.
• Press the INFO button; the display will change and the “FlickerScan” will no longer
be displayed. You can adjust aperture and exposure compensation. Do so using thefront or rear dial or the arrow pad.
• Press the INFO button repeatedly to return to the flicker scan display.

108 EN

Choosing how the camera measures brightness (Metering)

PA S M B n

You can choose how the camera meters subject brightness.
ButtonAF m button n FGk

Super Control Panel

Q n Metering

Menu

MENU n _ n5. Metering n Metering
Suited to most scenes, including back-lit subjects. The
camera meters 324 areas of the frame and calculates optimal
exposure taking into consideration the nature of the scene.

B

Center weighted
averagingmetering

Suited to compositions that place the main
subject at the center of the frame. The camera
sets exposure based on the average light level
for the entire frame while assigning the greatest
weight to the area in the center.

C

Spot metering

Use a specific area of the subject meter
exposure. The camera meters a small portion(approximately 2%) of the frame.

CHi

Spot metering(highlight)

Increases spot metering exposure. Ensures bright subjects
appear bright.

CSh

Spot metering(shadow)

Lowers spot metering exposure. Ensures dark subjects
appear dark.

4
Shooting Settings

Digital ESP
meteringp%The spot metering position can be set at the selected AF target. g “Metering the Focus
Target (NSpot Metering)” (P. 112)

Locking the exposure (AE Lock)

PA S M B n

You can lock the exposure by pressing the AEL button. Use this when you want toadjust the focus and exposure separately or when you want to shoot several images atthe same exposure.
Button

AEL button%The camera can be configured to automatically release the lock after shooting. g [BAuto Reset] (P. 110)
• If the AEL button has been assigned a different role, you will need to assign [AEL](P. 213) to a control using [Button Function] (P. 208).
• If you press the AEL button once, the exposure is locked and “AEL” is displayed.
• Press the button once again to release the AE Lock.
• The lock will be released if you operate the mode dial, MENU button, or Q button.

EN 109

AE Lock Exposure Metering(Metering during B)
PA S M B n

Choose the metering method used to meter exposure when exposure is locked using
the AEL button.
Menu

MENU n _ n5. Metering n Metering during B• For more information on AE lock, see P. 109.

4
Shooting Settings

Auto

Exposure is metered using the method selected for[Metering] (P. 109).

B (center-weighted averaging)

The camera sets exposure based on the average lightlevel for the entire frame while assigning the greatest
weight to the area in the center.

C (spot metering)

The camera meters a small portion (approximately 2%)of the frame.

CHi (spot highlight metering)

Brightens the spot metering area, brightening highlights.

CSh (spot shadow metering)

Darkens the spot metering area, darkening highlights.

Releasing AE Lock after shooting(B Auto Reset)
PA S M B n

Configure the camera so that it automatically releases the lock after shooting when
exposure is locked using the AEL button.
Menu

MENU n _ n5. Metering n B Auto ResetNo

Exposure remains locked after shooting. Press the AEL button torelease the lock.

Yes

Exposure lock is released after shooting.

%When multiple photos are taken using such functions like sequential shooting, custom
self-timer or interval shooting, exposure lock will be released after a series of photos havebeen taken.

110 EN

Locking exposure when the shutter button is pressed halfway
(AEL by half-pressing a)
PA S M B n
Configure the camera so that it locks exposure when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.
MENU n _ n5. Metering n AEL by half-pressing aNo

Exposure is not locked when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Exposure is determined based on the shooting conditions when the
shutter button is pressed fully.

Yes

Exposure is locked when the shutter button is pressed halfway.

S-AF Only

Exposure is locked when the shutter button is pressed halfway only
when the AF mode is [S-AF], [S-AFb], [FAF] or [FAFb].

# If exposure is locked by pressing the AEL button, it remains locked when you press the
shutter button halfway regardless of this setting.
%If you configure the camera so that it does not lock exposure when the shutter button
is pressed halfway, you can choose whether the camera meters brightness for eachframe during sequential shooting. g “Setting metering options for sequential shooting(Metering during j)” (P. 112)

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

EN 111

Setting metering options for sequential shooting(Metering during j)
PA S M B n

4

Menu

MENU n _ n5. Metering n Metering during j

No

The camera meters exposure when capturing the first frame andexposure is locked during sequential shooting.

Yes

The camera meters brightness and determines exposure for eachframe.

Shooting Settings# If exposure is locked by pressing the AEL button (P. 109) or pressing the shutter button
halfway (P. 111), exposure remains locked during sequential shooting even when
[Metering during j] is set to [Yes].
# When [♥jSH1] or [ProCap SH1] is set, [Metering during j] is fixed at [No].

Metering the Focus Target(NSpot Metering)
PA S M B n

Choose whether the camera meters the current AF target when [C] is selected for[Metering]. Settings can be adjusted separately for spot, spot highlight, and spot
shadow metering.
Menu

1

MENU n _ n5. Metering n NSpot Metering

Select a metering method with which you want the camera to meter thecurrent AF target, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

Spot

Applied when [Metering] is [C] (spot metering).

Spot Hilight

Applied when [Metering] is [CHi] (spot highlight metering).

Spot Shadow

Applied when [Metering] is [CSh] (spot shadow metering).

# [Face & Eye Detection] turns off automatically.
# The selected option takes effect when ISingle or ySmall is selected as the AF target
mode (P. 77).
# The camera zooms in on the selected AF target during focus zoom (P. 80).

112 ENChanging ISO sensitivity (ISO)

PA S M B n

Select a value according to subject brightness. Higher values let you photographdarker scenes but also increase image “noise” (mottling). Select [Auto] to let thecamera adjust sensitivity according to lighting conditions.
ButtonISO button n HIj

Super Control Panel

Q n ISO# ISO sensitivity is fixed at [Auto] during movie recording when [P], [A], or [S] is selected
for [nMode] (movie exposure mode). Setting [nMode] to [M] allows other options to be
selected. g “Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials (KDial Function / nDial
Function)” (P. 216)

L80, L100,
200–102400(still photography)

Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range. Choose [L100] or [L80] for larger
apertures (higher f-numbers) or slower shutter speeds. [L80] is
equivalent to ISO 80, [L100] to ISO 100.
# [L80] and [L100] are available at all exposure step values.
# [L80] and [L100] reduce dynamic range.

200–12800(movie recording)Choose a value for ISO sensitivity. ISO 200 offers a good balance
between noise and dynamic range.

Shooting Settings

Auto

Sensitivity is adjusted automatically according to shooting conditions.
During still photography, you can choose the maximum and standard
values for ISO sensitivity. ([KISO-A Upper/Default] (P. 114))
You can change the shutter speed at which ISO sensitivity starts torise in P and A modes. ([KISO-A Lowest S/S] (P. 115))# During movie recording, ISO sensitivity will be set to values offrom ISO 200 to 12800. When [M] is selected for [nMode] (movie
exposure mode), auto ISO sensitivity control can be enabled by
selecting [On] for [bISO-Auto]. You can also choose maximum
and standard values for ISO sensitivity.
g “Setting the shutter speed at which the camera automaticallyraises ISO sensitivity (KISO-A Lowest S/S)” (P. 115)

4

# Combining values over ISO 16000 with settings that use an electronic shutter (forexample, silent mode or focus bracketing) sets the flash sync speed to 1/50 s.
# Regardless of the value selected for ISO sensitivity, the flash sync speed for photos takenusing ISO bracketing in silent mode is 1/50 s.
# When [M] is selected for [nMode] (movie exposure mode), ISO sensitivity can be
adjusted during recording using touch controls (P. 62) or by rotating the front or reardial.
# If [Dramatic Tone] or [Watercolor] is chosen for picture mode during still photography,
sensitivity will not exceed ISO 1600 when [Auto] is selected.

EN 113

4
Shooting Settings# The following restrictions apply when [M] is selected for [n Mode] (movie exposuremode) depending on the picture mode:• [a2 OM-Log400] / [a3 HLG]:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 23.98p, 24.00p, 25.00p, or 29.97p, [Auto]is restricted to sensitivities of ISO 400–6400.
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 50.00p or 59.94p, [Auto] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 400–12800.
- The lowest value that can be selected manually is ISO 400.
• [Dramatic Tone] / [Watercolor]:- [Auto] is restricted to sensitivities of ISO 200–3200.
• Art filters other than [Dramatic Tone] / [Watercolor]:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 23.98p, 24.00p, 25.00p, or 29.97p, [Auto]is restricted to sensitivities of ISO 200–3200.
- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 50.00p or 59.94p, [Auto] is restricted tosensitivities of ISO 200–6400.
• Other picture modes:- If the frame rate selected for [nK] is 23.98p, 24.00p, 25.00p, or 29.97p, [Auto]is restricted to sensitivities of ISO 200–6400.

EV Steps for ISO Sensitivity Control(ISO Step)
PA S M B n

Choose the size of the increments used when adjusting ISO sensitivity. Choose from
1/3 and 1 EV.
Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n ISO Step

Setting the range of ISO sensitivity values selected in [Auto] mode(KISO-A Upper/Default / bISO-A Upper/Default)
PA S M B n
Choose the range of ISO sensitivity values selected by the camera when [Auto] isselected for [KISO] or [nISO].
Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n KISO-A Upper/Default
MENU n n n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n bISO-A Upper/
Default

Upper Limit

Choose the maximum sensitivity selected automatically by thecamera.
Set the value using FG or the front/rear dials.

Default

Choose the default sensitivity.
Set the value using FG or the front/rear dials.

• Switch between [Upper Limit] and [Default] using HI.
# The upper limit and the default settings differ between [KISO] and [nISO]. If the optimal
exposure cannot be achieved under the aperture and shutter speed conditions, a lower
sensitivity is applied.

114 EN

Setting the shutter speed at which the camera automatically raises
ISO sensitivity
(KISO-A Lowest S/S)
PA S M B n
Choose the shutter speed at which the camera starts raising the ISO sensitivity when
[Auto] is selected for [KISO].
Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n KISO-A Lowest S/SAuto

The camera sets it automatically.

1/8000 – 60”

The camera starts raising the ISO sensitivity at the specified shutter
speed.
Press the Q button and set the shutter speed using FG.

Choose the modes in which [Auto] can be used for ISO sensitivity.
Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n KISO-Auto
MENU n n n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n bISO-AutoShooting Settings

Choosing the modes in which [Auto] can be used for ISO
sensitivity(KISO-Auto / bISO-Auto)
PA S M B n

4

KISO-Auto
P/A/S[Auto] can be used for ISO sensitivity when the shooting mode is P,
A, or S.

P/A/S/M[Auto] can be used for ISO sensitivity when the shooting mode is P,
A, S, or M.

bISO-Auto
Off[Auto] cannot be used for ISO sensitivity when [nMode] (P. 60)
is [M].

On[Auto] can be used for ISO sensitivity when [nMode] (P. 60) is[M].

EN 115

High ISO Noise Reduction Options
(KNoise Filter / nNoise Filter)
PA S M B n
Reduce image artifacts (“noise”) in footage filmed at high ISO sensitivities. This canhelp reduce “graininess” in footage filmed under low light. You can choose the amountof noise reduction performed.

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n KNoise Filter
MENU n n n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n nNoise Filter

Off

Noise reduction disabled.

Low / Standard /High

Choose the amount of noise reduction performed.

Image Processing Options(Low ISO Processing)
PA S M B n

Choose the type of processing applied to photographs taken at low ISO sensitivities
using sequential shooting.
Menu

MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n Low ISO Processing

Drive Priority

Image processing is adapted so as not to curtail the number of
pictures that can be taken in a single burst.

Detail Priority

Image processing prioritizes image quality.

%Photographs taken in single shooting are processed in [Detail Priority] mode even if [Drive
Priority] is selected.

116 ENLong Exposure Noise Reduction Options(Noise Reduction)
PA S M B n

Choose whether to process photos taken at slow shutter speeds to reduce image
artifacts (“noise”). At slow shutter speeds, noise is caused by the heat generated fromthe camera itself. After each photo is taken, the camera captures a second image fornoise reduction, causing a delay equal to the selected shutter speed before the next
photo can be taken.
MENU n _ n3. ISO/Noise Reduction n Noise Reduction

Off

Noise reduction not performed.

On

Noise reduction is performed at all shutter speeds.

Auto

Noise reduction is performed automatically when the camera’sinternal temperature is elevated.

# During noise reduction, the camera displays the time remaining until the process iscomplete.
# During sequential shooting, [Off] is selected automatically and noise reduction is not
performed.
# Noise reduction may not produce the desired effects depending on the subject andshooting conditions.
%To use this function in silent mode, it is required that you configure the [Silents Settings]
setting (P. 132).

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

EN 117

Flash photography
Using a flash(Flash photography)

When using a flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose fromvarious shooting modes to meet your needs.
 Flash units designed for use with the camera

4
Shooting Settings

Choose a flash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of flash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe orconnected using a cable (available separately) and flash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless flash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which flash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fitted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use ofunits that do not otherwise support radio flash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of optical signals. The
flash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 124).
 Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Flash unit

Supported flash control
modes

GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100)

Supported wirelesssystems

FL-700WR

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL

GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)

CMD, #CMD, RCV,X-RCV, RC

FL-900R

TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUALGN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

STF-8

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2

GN 8.5

RC *2

FL-LM3

Varies with camera
settings.

GN 9.1 (12/24 mm *1)

RC *2*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide flash coverage (figures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

118 EN Attaching Compatible Flash Units
The methods used to attach and operate external flash units vary with the unit. See
the documentation provided with the unit for details. The instructions here apply to the
FL-LM3.
# Confirm that both the camera and flash unit are off. Attaching or removing a flash unit
while either the camera or flash unit is on could damage the equipment.

1

Remove the hot shoe cover and attach the flash.
• Slide the flash in until the foot clicks into place at theback of the shoe.

42

Shooting Settings

Hot shoe cover

Position the flash head for bounce-flash
photography or direct lighting.
• The flash head can be rotated up and left or right.
• Note that flash output may be insufficient for correct
exposure when bounce flash lighting is used.

3

Rotate the flash ON/OFF lever to the ON position.
• Rotate the lever to the OFF position when the flash is
not in use.

ON/OFF lever

EN 119 Removing Flash Units

1

Keeping the UNLOCK button pressed, slide theflash unit from the hot shoe.
2

1
UNLOCK button

4

Choosing a Flash Mode 

Shooting Settings

ButtonjY# button n FGk

Super Control Panel

Q n Flash Mode Flash Modes
Flash modes that are displayed vary depending on the configuration of [Flash Mode
Settings] (P. 123).

#

Fill In

Enable the flash.
# Shutter speed can be set to values between that selected for[# Slow Limit] (P. 124) and [# X-Sync.] (P. 124).

$

Flash Off

Disable the flash.
# The flash will not fire even if the unit is on.

Slow

Slow shutter speeds are used to capture both the main subject
and the background.
# Shutter speed is set according to the exposure value
metered by the camera and is not restricted by the option
selected for [# Slow Limit].

#Slow#Manual Manual

120 EN(Flash Mode)

The flash fires at the selected level.
Appears only when the FL-LM3 is attached.

 Flash Mode and Shutter Speed
The range of shutter speeds available varies with the flash mode. The range ofavailable speeds can be further restricted using the options in the menu.
g [# X-Sync.] (P. 124), [# Slow Limit] (P. 124)
Exposure
mode

Flash
mode

[Reduce
Red-eye](P. 123)[Synchro
Settings](P. 123)

Super
controlpanel[FirstCurtain]#[No]

Red-eyereduction

No

Flash
timingFrontcurtain
sync

#2

Rearcurtain
sync[FirstCurtain]V

Frontcurtain
sync

[Yes]

Yes
[Second
Curtain]

V2

Rearcurtain
sync[FirstCurtain]#Slow

Frontcurtain
sync[Second
Curtain]#Slow2

Rearcurtain
sync[FirstCurtain]

VSlow

Frontcurtain
sync[Second
Curtain]

VSlow2

Manualvalue*1(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)#ManualNo

Frontcurtain
sync

Flash off

(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)

$

—

—

P/A

[No]

No

Slow

[Yes]

Yes

4

60 - 1/250 s

Shooting Settings[Second
Curtain]
Fill flash

Shutter
speed

Rearcurtainsync—

EN 121

Exposure
mode

Flash
mode

[Reduce
Red-eye](P. 123)[Synchro
Settings](P. 123)

Super
controlpanel[FirstCurtain]#[Second
Curtain]#2

Rearcurtain
sync[FirstCurtain]V

Frontcurtain
sync[Second
Curtain]

V2[No]

Red-eyereduction

No

Fill flash

4

S/M

[Yes]

Yes

Flash
timingShutter
speed

Frontcurtainsync

60 - 1/250 s

Shooting Settings

Rearcurtain
sync

Manualvalue*1(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)#ManualNo

Frontcurtain
sync

Flash off

(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)

$

—

—

—

Frontcurtain
sync—[FirstCurtain]#[Second
Curtain]#2

Rearcurtain
sync*2—[FirstCurtain]V

Frontcurtain
sync—[Second
Curtain]

V2

Rearcurtain
sync*2

—

[No]

No

Fill flash

B

[Yes]

Yes

Manualvalue*1(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)#ManualNo

Frontcurtain
sync—

Flash off

(regardless (regardlessof setting) of setting)

$

—

—

—

*1 This is displayed only when the FL-LM3 is attached. You can select the value by selecting[Manual Value] from the super control panel.
*2 When [Live Comp] (P. 54) is selected, flash operates in [First Curtain] mode even when
[Second Curtain] is selected.
• In red-eye reduction mode, the shutter will be released approximately one second after
the initial red-eye reduction pre-flash. Do not move the camera until shooting is complete.
Also note that red-eye reduction may not produce the desired results in some conditions.
• The fastest shutter speed available when the flash fires is 1/250 s. Bright backgrounds inpictures taken with the flash may be overexposed.

122 EN• The flash sync speed for silent modes (P. 132), High Res Shot (P. 156), and focus
bracketing (P. 178) is 1/100 s. Setting [K ISO] to a value over ISO 16000 whenusing an option that requires the electronic shutter (for example, silent mode or focus
bracketing) sets the flash sync speed to 1/50 s. The flash sync speed is also set to 1/50 s
during ISO bracketing (P. 176).
• Even the minimum available flash output may be too bright at short range. To prevent
overexposure in pictures taken at short range, select mode A or M and choose a smaller
aperture (higher f-number) or choose a lower setting for [K ISO].

Configuring flash modes

(Flash Mode Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose which modes are displayed on the flash mode selection screen.
MENU n _ n6. Flash n Flash Mode Settings

Reduce Red-eye

Reduce “red-eye” in portrait photos.
[No]: The camera does not display Reduce Red-eye modes.
[Yes]: The camera displays Reduce Red-eye modes.

Synchro Settings

Choose when the flash fires.
[First Curtain]: The flash fires when the shutter is fully open.
[Second Curtain]: The flash fires immediately before the shutter
closes. Moving objects appear to leave trails oflight behind them.

Adjusting flash output 

4Shooting Settings

Menu(Flash Exposure Comp.)
PA S M B n

Flash output can be adjusted if you find that your subject is over- or under-exposedeven though the exposure in the rest of the frame is appropriate.
Flash compensation is available in modes other than manual.
Super Control Panel

Q n Flash Exposure Comp.

• Changes to flash intensity made with the external flash unit are added to those made withthe camera.

EN 123

Wireless Remote Flash Control(# RC Mode)

PA S M B n

Adjust settings for wireless remote flash control. Remote control is available with
optional flash units that support wireless remote control (“wireless RC flash”). For
information on using wireless remote flash control, see P. 298.

4

Menu

MENU n _ n6. Flash n # RC Mode

Off

Wireless remote flash control disabled.

On

Wireless remote flash control enabled. The camera displays settings
for wireless remote flash control.

Shooting Settings• Selecting [On] displays the RC mode super control panel in the camera monitor. To viewthe regular super control panel, press the INFO button.

Choosing a Flash Sync Speed(# X-Sync.)

PA S M B n

Choose the fastest shutter speed available for flash photography.
Choose the fastest shutter speed available for flash photography, irrespective of
subject brightness.
Menu

MENU n _ n6. Flash n # X-Sync.

Choosing the Minimum Shutter Speed

(# Slow Limit)

PA S M B n

Choose the slowest shutter speed available for flash photography in P/A modes.
This item is used to select the slowest setting available to the camera when selecting
the shutter speed automatically during flash photography, regardless of how dark thesubject may be. It does not take effect in slow-sync (#Slow, #Slow2, VSlow andVSlow2) modes.
• Available values: 60 s to value selected for [# X-Sync.]
Menu

MENU n _ n6. Flash n # Slow Limit

Flash and Exposure Compensation

(x+F)
PA S M B n

Choose whether exposure compensation is added to the value for flash compensation.
For information on flash compensation, see P. 123.

124 EN

Menu

MENU n _ n6. Flash n x+F

OffFlash and exposure compensation are set independently.

On

The value for exposure compensation is added to the value for flash
compensation.

Setting the exposure balance for TTL metering(Balanced Flash Metering)
PA S M B n
Set the exposure balance to be used when using an external flash in TTL metering
mode.
Menu

MENU n _ n6. Flash n Balanced Flash Metering

Off

Gives priority to the subject during metering.

On

Gives priority to the balance between the subject and thebackground during metering.

4
Shooting Settings%When selecting [On], it is recommended that you set [KISO] to [Auto].

EN 125Sequential Shooting/Self-Timer
Performing the sequential/self-timer shooting

PA S M B n

Adjust settings for burst or self-timer photography. Choose an option according to yoursubject. Other options, including anti-shock and silent modes, are also available.
# Fix the camera securely on a tripod for self-timer shooting.

4
Shooting Settings

ButtonjY# button n HIj

Super Control PanelQ n Drive j/Y

Menu

MENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Drive j/YSingleSingle-frame advance. The camera takes one
photo each time the shutter button is pressed all
the way down.

j / tj�♥jSequential

The camera takes photos at up to about 20
fps while the shutter button is held all the way
down. When [KAF Mode] (P. 72) is set to[C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb],
the camera will focus before each shot. When
[Metering during j] (P. 112) is set to [Yes], thecamera will meter the brightness and determines
the exposure before each shot.

♥jSH1

High-speed
Sequential SH1

The camera takes photos at up to about 120 fps
while the shutter button is held all the way down.
Focus, exposure, and white balance are locked atthe values for the first shot in each series.

High-speed
Sequential SH2

The camera takes photos at up to about 50
fps while the shutter button is held all the way
down. When [KAF Mode] (P. 72) is set to[C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb],
the camera will focus before each shot. When
[Metering during j] (P. 112) is set to [Yes], thecamera will meter the brightness and determines
the exposure before each shot.

Pro Capture

Capture starts when the shutter button is pressedhalfway. The camera starts recording pictures,
including those captured while the button waspressed halfway, when the button is pressed all theway down (P. 133).
Focus and exposure during each ProCap mode
are the same as [♥j] (♥Sequential), [♥jSH1](♥High-speed Sequential SH1) and [♥jSH2](♥High-speed Sequential SH2).

o / to♥o♥jSH2

ProCap
ProCap SH1
ProCap SH2

126 ENY12s / tY12s
Self-timer 12 sec♥Y12s

The shutter is released 12 seconds after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down. The
self-timer lamp will light for about 10 seconds andthen start to flash about 2 seconds before the
shutter is released. The camera focuses when the
shutter button is pressed halfway.

Y2s / tY2s
♥Y2s

Self-timer 2 sec

When the shutter button is pressed all the way
down, the self-timer lamp will start to flash anda photo will be taken after about 2 seconds. The
camera focuses when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

YC / tYC♥YC

Custom Self-timer

Adjust self-timer settings, including the self-timer
delay and the number of shots taken when thetimer expires (P. 130).

Shooting Settings%You can choose the frame advance rate and the maximum number of shots in each series(P. 128).
%Items marked with t allows you to take pictures with the small amount of blur caused byoperation of the shutter reduced. Use this option when even slight camera motion cancause blur, for example during macro or telephoto photography. This option is available
when [Anti-Shockr] is set to [On] in [Anti-Shockr Settings] (P. 131).
%Items marked with ♥ use the electronic shutter. Use these with shutter speeds faster than
1/8000 seconds, or in settings where the sound of the shutter would be unwelcome.
%♥jSH2 and ProCap SH2 can only be used with specific lenses. Visit our website fordetails.
%To cancel the activated self-timer, press G.
%In j, tj and ♥j and ProCap modes, the camera displays the view through the lensduring shooting. In ♥jSH1, ♥jSH2, ProCap SH1, and ProCap SH2 modes, it displays
the shot immediately preceding the current frame.

4# When using ♥jSH2 or ProCap SH2 with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR] or[C-AF+TRb] selected for [KAF Mode] (P. 72) and an aperture value larger than F8,
the focus accuracy will decrease. (F will be displayed.
# In ♥jSH1 and ProCap SH1 modes, the lower limit of the shutter speed is 1/15 s.
# In ♥jSH2 and ProCap SH2 modes, the lower limit of the shutter speed is 1/640 s when[Max fps] under [Sequential Shooting Settings] is set to 50 and 1/320 s when it is set to25.
# Shooting speed will be lower when [KISO] is 16000 or higher.
# When [KISO] set to 16000 or higher in ♥j mode, the flash sync speed will be 1/50 s
and the shooting speed will be limited to a maximum of 10 fps.
# If you stand in front of the camera to press the shutter button when using the self-timer,
the picture may be out of focus.
# The speed of sequential shooting varies depending on the lens you are using and thefocus of the zoom lens.
# During sequential shooting, if the battery level icon blinks due to low battery, the camera
stops shooting. The camera may not save all of the pictures depending on how muchbattery power remains.
# Photographs taken in silent and pro-capture modes may be distorted if the subject orcamera moves quickly during shooting.
# To use the flash in silent shooting modes (P. 132), select [Allow] for [Flash Mode] in[Silents Settings] (P. 132).

EN 127

# Shooting speed may be lower when shooting in a dark place. You may be able to increase
shooting speed by setting [KNight Vision] to [Off]. g “Making the display easier to see
in dark places (KNight Vision)” (P. 225)

4

 Number of pictures that can be taken
The camera displays the number of pictures that can be stored in theremaining buffer in the following instances:
When the shutter button is pressed halfway, when the shutter button ispressed fully, when writing to SD card
When it becomes [00] (red), the camera will be unable to record the next
picture. When the images in the buffer are written to the card, the number
will increase and the will be able to record pictures.

Shooting Settings# It is not displayed when there is no card in the camera.
# It may not be displayed depending on the functions that are in use.
%The number is approximate and not exact. It may change depending on the shooting
conditions.

Configuring the sequential shooting functions(Sequential Shooting Settings)
PA S M B n
You can choose which types of sequential shooting modes are displayed when
you press the jY# button, and the maximum speed/number of frames for eachsequential shooting mode.
MENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Sequential Shooting
Settings

Menu

1

Select a sequential shooting mode that you want tohave displayed, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.
%[tj] is displayed when [Anti-Shockr] is set to [On]in [Anti-Shockr Settings] (P. 131).

2
3

Sequential Shooting Settings
10fps

j
♥j

20fps

♥jSH1

120fps

♥jSH2

50fps

ProCap10 / 20fps

ProCapSH1

28 / 120fps

ProCapSH2
MENU

12 / 50fps
H

OK

Sequential Shooting Settings
screenPress I.
Configure options.

Max fps

128 EN[99]

100%

Set the shooting speed for sequential shooting. The numbers
indicate the approximate maximum speeds.
j/tj: 1 – 10 fps♥j: 5, 10, 15, 20 fps♥jSH1: 60, 100, 120 fps♥jSH2: 25, 50 fps
ProCap: 5, 10, 15, 20 fps
ProCap SH1: 60, 100, 120 fps
ProCap SH2: 25, 50 fps

Pre-shutter Frames(ProCap/ProCap
Set the number of frames to be captured before the shutter button is
SH1/ProCap SH2
pressed fully from between 0 and 70.
only)

Frame Count
Limiter# When [HDR], [Focus Stacking] or [Focus BKT] is enabled, [Frame Count Limiter] will be[Off].
# When using ♥jSH2 or ProCap SH2, shooting speed can only be configured withspecific lenses. For compatible lenses, visit our Website.

4
Shooting Settings

Set the total number of frames from 2 to 99 (including the preshutter frames) to be captured. You can limit the number of framesthat are captured after you press the shutter button fully. Shooting
stops automatically when the limit is reached.
• Select [Off] if you do not want to put a limit on the number offrames.
• To put a limit on the number of frames, select the number andpress the Q button. The setting screen appears. You can change
the number with FG.
• For Pro Capture shooting, the number of frames includes the preshutter frames. g “Shooting without a release time lag (Pro
Capture shooting)” (P. 133)

EN 129

Configuring the self-timer functions(Self-timer Settings)
PA S M B n

You can choose which types of self-timer modes are displayed when you press thejY# button, and change the self-timer settings such as the time the camera waits
before taking a picture, and the number of frames it captures.
Menu

1

Select a self-timer mode that you want to havedisplayed, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.
%[tY12s] / [tY2s] / [tYC] are displayed when [AntiShockr] is set to [On] in [Anti-Shockr Settings](P. 131).

4
Shooting Settings
130 ENMENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Self-timer Settings

2
3

Self-timer Settings
Y12s
♥Y12s
Y2s
♥Y2s
YC
♥YC
MENU

OK

Self-timer Settings screen

When setting Custom Self-timer, select [YC] / [tYC] / [♥YC] and press I.
Configure options.

Number of Frames

Choose the number of shots taken when the timer expires.

Y Timer

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down.

Interval Length

If the number of shots is 2 or more, choose the interval between the
shots taken when the timer expires.

Every Frame AF[Off]: If the number of shots is 2 or more, focus is locked when thefirst shot is taken.
[On]: The camera focuses before each shot.

Shooting without the vibration caused by shutter button operations
(Anti-Shockr Settings)
PA S M B n
Anti-shock shooting modes can be used to reduce the slight blur caused by shutter
motion.
Use this option when even slight camera motion can cause blur, for example during
macro or telephoto photography.
MENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Anti-Shockr Settings

Anti-Shockr[Off]: Anti-shock shooting modes ([to], [tj], etc.) are notdisplayed on the drive mode selection screen. Normal shooting
modes ([o], [j], etc.) are displayed.
[On]: Anti-shock shooting modes ([to], [tj], etc.) are displayedon the drive mode selection screen. Normal shooting modes ([o],[j], etc.) are not displayed.

Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down when shooting in antishock shooting modes.
[0sec], [1/8sec], [1/4sec], [1/2sec], [1sec], [2sec], [4sec], [8sec],[15sec], [30sec]

4
Shooting Settings

Menu• Be sure there is a check (v) next to a sequential shooting mode with  in [Sequential
Shooting Settings] (P. 128).
• Select a mode with t (P. 126), press the Q button, then take pictures. After the specified
time elapses, the shutter will be released and pictures will be taken.

EN 131

Shooting without shutter sound (Silents Settings)
PA S M B n

In situations where the shutter sound is a problem, you can use the silent shooting
modes to shoot without making a sound. An electronic shutter is used to reduce theminuscule camera shake caused by the motion of the mechanical shutter, much as is
the case for anti-shock photography.

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

MENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Silents Settings

Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits to begin shooting after the
shutter button is pressed all the way down when shooting in silent
shooting modes.
[0sec], [1/8sec], [1/4sec], [1/2sec], [1sec], [2sec], [4sec], [8sec],[15sec], [30sec]

Noise Reduction[Off]: Shoots normally.
[Auto]: Reduces image “noise” in long exposures during silent
photography. The sound of the shutter may be audible when noise
reduction is active.

8

Choose whether to allow the beep to sound as specified (P. 251).

AF Illuminator

Choose whether to allow AF Illuminator to work as specified(P. 96).

Flash Mode

Choose whether the flash works as specified.

# During High Res Shot shooting (P. 156), [8], [AF Illuminator], and [Flash Mode] work in[Allow] mode even if they are set to [Not Allow].
When [High Res Shot] is set to [Onn], however, [Flash Mode] is fixed at [$Flash Off].
• Be sure there is a check (v) next to a sequential shooting mode with ♥ in [Sequential
Shooting Settings] (P. 128).
• Select a mode with ♥ (P. 126), press the Q button, then take pictures. The monitor turns
dark for a short while when the shutter is released. The shutter does not sound.
# The desired results may not be achieved under flickering light sources such as fluorescentor LED lamps or if the subject moves abruptly during shooting.
# The fastest available shutter speed is 1/32000 s.
# The flash sync speed will be 1/50 s when [KISO] is 16000 or higher.

132 ENShooting without a release time lag (Pro Capture shooting)
PA S M B n

Capture starts when the shutter button is pressed halfway; the moment the button
is pressed the rest of the way down, the camera will start saving the last n captured
pictures to the memory card, where n is a number selected before shooting begins. If
the button is held all the way down, shooting will continue until the selected number of
pictures is recorded. Use this option to capture moments you might otherwise miss due
to your subject’s reactions or shutter lag.
Burst shooting
continues

Up to 70 frames

Moment you
want

Shutter button pressed all
the way down

Shutter lag

Shooting Settings

Shutter button pressedhalfway

4

Pro Capture (ProCap)

Choose this option if you anticipate that the distance to the subject will change
during shooting. The camera shoots at up to 20 fps. A maximum of 70 frames can be
captured before the shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF], [C-AFb],[C-AF+TR], or [C-AF+TRb] is selected for [KAF Mode] (P. 72), the camera will
focus before each shot.
Pro Capture SH1 (ProCap SH1)

Choose this option if the distance to the subject is unlikely to change very muchduring shooting. The camera shoots at up to 120 fps. A maximum of 70 frames can be
captured before the shutter button is pressed all the way down. The camera will use [SAF] when [C-AF] or [C-AF+TR] is selected for [KAF Mode] (P. 72) and [S-AFb]
when [C-AFb] or [C-AF+TRb] is selected.
Pro Capture SH2 (ProCap SH2)

The camera shoots at up to 50 fps. A maximum of 70 frames can be captured before
the shutter button is pressed all the way down. If [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR], or[C-AF+TRb] is selected for [KAF Mode] (P. 72), the camera will focus before
each shot.

# This option can only be used with specific lenses. Visit our website for details# When using ProCap SH2 with [C-AF], [C-AFb], [C-AF+TR] or [C-AF+TRb] selected
for [KAF Mode] (P. 72) and an aperture value larger than F8, the focus accuracy will
decrease. (F will be displayed.
# In ProCap SH1 mode, the lower limit of the shutter speed is 1/15 s.
# In ProCap SH2 mode, the lower limit of the shutter speed is 1/640 s when [Max fps] under[Sequential Shooting Settings] is set to 50 and 1/320 s when it is set to 25.

EN 133

ButtonjY# button n HIj

Super Control PanelQ n Drive j/Y

Menu

MENU n _ n 7. Drive Mode n Drive j/Y1
2

4
Shooting Settings
134 EN

Select ProCap, ProCap SH1, or ProCap SH2 and press the Q button.
Press the shutter button halfway to start capturing.
• When the shutter button is pressed halfway, a capture
icon ( ) will be displayed. If the button is kept pressedhalfway for over a minute, capture will end and theicon will clear from the display. Press the shutter button
halfway again to resume shooting.
• Shooting will continue while the shutter button ispressed all the way down, up to the number of shots
selected for [Frame Count Limiter].

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Capture icon%[Max fps], [Pre-shutter Frames], and [Frame Count Limiter] can be adjusted in[Sequential Shooting Settings] (P. 128).

3

Press the shutter button all the way down to start saving pictures to thememory card.

# Pro Capture is not available while the camera is connected to a smartphone (Wi-Fi).
# Flickering occurred by fluorescent lights or the large movement of the subject, etc. may
cause distortions in images.
# During capture, the monitor will not go dark and the sound of the shutter will not be heard.
# The slowest shutter speed is limited.
# Depending on subject brightness and the options selected for [ISO] and exposurecompensation, the display frame rate may drop below that selected for [Frame Rate](P. 225).

Reducing Flicker in Photographs

(Anti-Flicker Shooting)
PA S M B n

You may notice uneven exposure in photos taken under flickering light. When thisoption is enabled, the camera will detect the flicker frequency and adjust the timing of
the shutter release accordingly.
Menu

MENU n _ n7. Drive Mode n Anti-Flicker Shooting• “FLK” appears in the display when [On] is selected.

FLK100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

FLK

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

Shooting SettingsP# The camera may be unable to detect flicker at some settings. Normal release timing will
be used if flicker is not detected.
# Normal release timing is used at slow shutter speeds.
# Enabling flicker reduction may cause release lag, slowing the frame advance rate during
burst photography.

4

EN 135

Image Stabilization
Reducing camera shake  (KImage Stabilizer / nImage Stabilizer)
PA S M B n
You can reduce the amount of camera shake that can occur when shooting in low lightsituations or shooting with high magnification.

4

Super Control Panel

Q n KImage Stabilizer / nImage Stabilizer

Menu

MENU n _ n8. Image Stabilizer n KImage Stabilizer
MENU n n n4. Image Stabilizer n nImage Stabilizer

Shooting Settings

KImage Stabilizer
S-IS Off (Still-I.S. Off)

Image stabilization disabled. Select this option whenusing a tripod.

S-IS Auto (Auto I.S.)

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.
If panning motion is detected, the camera willautomatically suspend image stabilization on that axis.

S-IS1 (All Direction Shake I.S.)

Image stabilization applies to motion on all axes.

S-IS2 (Vertical Shake I.S.)

Image stabilization applies to vertical motion. Use
when panning the camera horizontally.

S-IS3 (Horizontal Shake I.S.)

Image stabilization applies to horizontal motion. Use
when panning the camera vertically.

nImage Stabilizer

136 EN

M-IS Off (Movie-I.S. Off)

Image stabilizer is off.

M-IS1 (All Direction Shake I.S.)

Electronic image stabilization combined with VCMcontrolled image sensor movement.

M-IS2 (All Direction Shake I.S.)

VCM-controlled image sensor movement only.

 Setting the detailed option of image stabilizer
When using lenses other than Micro Four Thirds or Four Thirds system lenses, input
the focal length of the lens.

1

Press the INFO button while configuring [KImage
Stabilizer] or [nImage Stabilizer]. Input the focal
length using FGHI and then press the Q
button.

KImage Stabilizer
Focal Length

0

0

0

9 . 0

mm

MENU

Focal LengthOK

Set the lens focal length. Input the number that is printed on thelens.
[0.1] – [1000.0] mm

Image stabilization optionsShooting Settings# Image stabilization may be unable to compensate for excessive camera motion or very
slow shutter speeds. Use a tripod in these cases.
# You may notice noise or vibration while image stabilization is in effect.
# The setting selected with the lens image stabilization switch, if any, takes priority over that
selected with the camera. This can be changed. g “Image Stabilization for IS Lenses(Lens I.S. Priority)” (P. 139)
# [S-IS Auto] functions as [S-IS1] when [On] is selected for [Lens I.S. Priority] (P. 139).
# When you select [S-IS Auto] or [S-IS1] with ♥jSH2/ProCap SH2 selected as the drivemode (P. 126), the image stabilization will be suitable for camera moves in the depth
direction, compared to when used with other sequential shooting modes.
%You can choose whether image stabilization will be performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway. g “Half-press image stabilization (aImage Stabilizer)” (P. 138)
%The selected value is not reset when you select [Reset Shooting Settings] in [Reset/
Initialize Settings] (“Restoring Default Settings (Reset/Initialize Settings)” (P. 257)).

4(nIS Level)

PA S M B n

Choose the amount of image stabilization applied during movie recording.
Menu

MENU n n n4. Image Stabilizer n nIS Level+1

Choose for static hand-held shots.

±0

Recommended in most situations.

–1

Choose for hand-held panning, tilting, or tracking shots.

EN 137

Half-press image stabilization

(aImage Stabilizer)
PA S M B n

Choose whether image stabilization applies while the shutter button is pressed halfway.
An example of a situation in which you might want to suspend image stabilization
would be when using the level gauge to keep the camera level while framing
photographs.

4
Shooting Settings
138 EN

Menu

MENU n _ n8. Image Stabilizer n aImage Stabilizer

On

Image stabilization is performed while the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

Off

Image stabilization is not performed while the shutter button ispressed halfway.

Burst mode image stabilization(jImage Stabilizer)
PA S M B n

Choose the type of image stabilization applied during burst shooting.
To maximize the effects of image stabilization during burst shooting, the camera centers
the image sensor for every shot. This slightly reduces the frame advance rate.
Menu

MENU n _ n8. Image Stabilizer n jImage Stabilizer

IS Priority

Priority is given to image stabilization. The frame advance rate drops
slightly.

Fps Priority

Priority is given to the frame advance rate. Image stabilization may
be slightly less effective under some conditions.

Displaying camera motion on the monitor
You can configure the camera todisplay the motion of the camera andthe boundaries of motions that can becorrected by the image stabilizer when
the shutter button is pressed halfway
and during exposure. This is usefulwhen you want to reduce camera
motion during long exposure with thecamera held by hand.

(Handheld Assist)
PA S M B n
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

The boundaries of motions
that can be corrected by
the image stabilizer (gray)1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Menu

MENU n _ n8. Image Stabilizer n Handheld Assist

Off

Camera motion is not displayed on the monitor.

On

Camera motion is displayed on the monitor when the shutter button
is pressed halfway and during exposure.

# There is no guarantee that the picture will be without blurs, even if the camera motion
indicator stays within the gray frame.
# Camera motion cannot be displayed correctly when the camera is close to the subject.
# Camera motion is not displayed if [KImage Stabilizer] is set to [Off] or if you are using
third-party lenses, with which only the lens image stabilizer operates.
# If [aImage Stabilizer] is set to [Off], camera motion is only displayed during exposure.

Image Stabilization for IS Lenses

4Shooting Settings

Cameramotion Camera(horizontal/ motion (roll)vertical)(Lens I.S. Priority)
PA S M B n

When using a third-party lens with an on-board image stabilizer, choose whether image
stabilization gives priority to the camera or the lens.
# This option has no effect if the lens is equipped with an IS switch that can be used toenable or disable image stabilization.
Menu

MENU n _ n8. Image Stabilizer n Lens I.S. Priority

On

Priority is given to lens image stabilization.

Off

Priority is given to camera image stabilization.

EN 139Color and Quality
Setting the Quality of Photos and Movies

(KK / nK)

You can set the image quality modes for photos and movies. Select a quality suitable
for the application (such as for processing on PC, use on website etc.).

4

Super Control Panel

Q n KK / nK

Menu

MENU n _ n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n KK
MENU n n n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n nK

 Setting KK

Shooting Settings

OptionImage size

Compression ratio

File format

YSF

5184 × 3888

SuperFine (1/2.7)

JPG

YF

5184 × 3888

Fine (1/4)

JPG

YN

5184 × 3888

Normal (1/8)

JPG

uN

3200 × 2400

Normal (1/8)

JPG

RAW

5184 × 3888

Lossless compression

ORF

RAW+JPEG

RAW plus the JPEG option selected above%The image size/compression combinations available can be selected in the menus.
g “Combinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates (KK Detailed
Settings)” (P. 143)
%During the high resolution shooting (P. 156), you can select between AF, IF,
JF, AF+RAW, IF+RAW, and JF+RAW.
# When [Standard], [Dual Same1], or [Dual Same3], or [Auto Switch] is selected for[KSave Settings] (P. 242), the selected option applies to the cards in both slots 5
and 4.
# AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Onn] is selected for High Res Shot
(P. 156).
# Selecting High Res Shot (P. 156) changes the image quality option selected; besure to check the image quality setting before shooting.
%RAW files store raw image data in an unprocessed state. Choose this format (extension“.ORF”) for pictures that will later be enhanced.
- Cannot be viewed on other cameras- Can be viewed on computers using OM Workspace Digital Photo Managing software- Can be saved in JPEG format using the [RAW Data Edit] (P. 200) retouch option in
the camera menus

140 EN Setting nK• To change the settings of each image quality mode, press I while an image quality modeis selected.
The Movie Quality Icon

Changes to settings are reflected in the [nK] icon as shown below. Up to threecombinations can be saved.
Movie Resolution
4K

3840×2160

FHD

Full HD

1920×1080

C4K

4K Digital Cinema

4096×2160• Fixed to [L-GOP]
when [Movie
Resolution] is [4K] or[C4K].

Motion Compensation
I-8

A-I

ALL-Intra*

L-8

L-GOP

LongGOP

When [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is [H.264]: “-8”When [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is [H.265]: “-10”4
Shooting Settings

4K* When ALL-Intra is used, the movie will be recorded without interframe
compression. It is suitable for editing, but the data will be large.
Playback Frame Rate
60p

59.94p59.94fps

50p

50.00p50.00fps

30p

29.97p29.97fps

25p

25.00p25.00fps

24.00p24.00p24.00fps

24p

23.98p23.98fps• [24.00p] can only be
selected when [Movie
Resolution] is [C4K].

Slow or Fast Motion
-

Off

-

Number (rate)• Large rate means fast recording and small rate means slow
recording.
• Because the movies are played back at the designated speed,
they will look like slow motion/fast motion movies.
# Sound is not recorded.
# Art filters selected in [Picture Mode] are disabled.
# Slow recording and/or fast recording may be unavailable
depending on the [nK] setting.
# Only 1/24 or higher shutter speed is available. Availability
depends on the [Frame Rate] setting.

EN 141

# Depending on the card used, recording may end before the maximum length is reached.
# Motion Compensation selection may be unavailable at some settings.
# Movies are recorded at an aspect ratio of 16:9. C4K movies are recorded at an aspectratio of 17:9.
Filming High-Speed Movies

4Film at high frame rates. Movies are filmed at 100 - 240 fps and play back at 23.98- 59.94 fps. Stretching playback to 2x - 10x the recording time lets you view in slow
motion movements that in real life took only the blink of an eye.
A high-speed movie option can be included in the movie image quality menu. Your
choice of playback frame rate determines the playback speed multiplier. Limitations
apply to combination of the Sensor Frame Rate and Playback Frame Rate.
Changes to settings are reflected in the movie quality icon as shown.

Shooting Settings

Movie Resolution
FHD

Full HD

1920×1080

Sensor Frame Rate
240fps/200fps/120fps/100fps• 240fps can only be selected when [nVideo Codec] is[H.264].
Motion Compensation
L-8

L-GOP

LongGOP

When [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is [H.264]: “-8”When [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is [H.265]: “-10”Playback Frame Rate
60p

59.94p59.94fps Playback rate : ×0.5/0.25

50p

50.00p50.00fps Playback rate : ×0.5/0.25

30p

29.97p29.97fps Playback rate : ×0.25/0.12

25p

25.00p25.00fps Playback rate : ×0.25/0.13

24p

23.98p23.98fps Playback rate : ×0.2/0.1• To change the settings for high-speed movies, press I while an image quality modeis selected.

142 ENCombinations of JPEG image sizes and compression rates
(KK Detailed Settings)
PA S M B n
You can set the JPEG image quality by combining image size and compression rate.

4
Shooting Settings# When an SD/SDHC card is used, the size of one file is limited to 4 GB.
When an SDXC card is used, recording stops before the playback time reaches 3 hours.
# Focus, exposure, and white balance lock during recording.
# Sound is not recorded.
# The picture angle is slightly reduced.
# Aperture, shutter speed, exposure compensation, and ISO sensitivity cannot be changed
during recording.
# Time codes cannot be recorded or displayed.
# Brightness may change if zoom is adjusted during recording.
# High-speed movie recording is not available while the camera is connected to an HDMI
device.
# When recording high-speed movies, [oAll] cannot be selected for AF target mode.
# [M-IS1] cannot be selected for [nImage Stabilizer] (P. 136).
# [i-Enhance], and art filter picture modes (P. 145) are not available.
# [Gradation] (P. 147) is fixed at [Gradation Normal].
# High-speed movie recording is not available during remote photography when the camera
is connected to a smartphone.

MENU n _ n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n KK Detailed
Settings

Menu
Image size
Name

Pixel Count

Compression rate
SF
(Super Fine)

F(Fine)N(Normal)Y (Large)

5184×3888

YSF

YF

YN

u (Middle)

3200×2400

uSF

uF

uN

v (Middle)

1920×1440

vSF

vF

vN

w (Small)

1280×960

wSF

wF

wN

x (Small)

1024×768

xSF

xF

xN

Application

Select for the printsize
For small prints anduse on a website

EN 143

Choosing the codec for recording movies

(nVideo Codec)
PA S M B n

Choose the codec to be used when recording movies.

4

Menu

MENU n n n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n nVideo Codec

H.264

Records 8-bit movies using H.264, which is a versatile codec. Use
this setting for general use.

H.265

Records 10-bit movies using the H.265 codec. This setting is
primarily for movies that are intended to be edited on a computer.

Shooting Settings# When [H.265] is selected, only [a2 OM-Log400] and [a3 HLG] are available for[nPicture Mode] (P. 146). For playback with the correct color and brightness, a TV
or a display compatible with 10-bit input is required. When outputted to a HDMI devicecompatible with 10-bit input, the colors of icons may look different from the way theyusually look.

Setting the image aspect(Image Aspect)

PA S M B n

Choose the ratio of width to height for pictures according to your intent or your goals
for printing or the like. In addition to the standard aspect (width-to-height) ratio of [4:3],
the camera offers settings of [16:9], [3:2], [1:1], and [3:4].
Super Control Panel

Q n Aspect

Menu

MENU n _ n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n Image Aspect• JPEG images are recorded at the selected aspect ratio. RAW images are the same sizeas the image sensor and are recorded at an aspect ratio of 4:3 with a tag indicating the
aspect ratio selected. A crop indicating the selected aspect ratio is displayed when images
are played back.

Peripheral illumination

(Shading Comp.)
PA S M B n

Compensate for the drop in brightness at the edges of the frame due to the opticalcharacteristics of the lens. Some lenses may exhibit a drop in brightness at the edgesof the frame. The camera can compensate for this by making the edges brighter.
Menu

MENU n _ n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n Shading Comp.

Off

Shading compensation disabled.

On

The camera detects and compensates for reduced peripheral
illumination.

# [On] has no effect when a teleconverter or extension tube is attached.
# Noise may be more noticeable at the edges of the frame at high ISO sensitivities.

144 ENProcessing options (KPicture Mode / nPicture Mode)
PA S M B n

Choose how pictures are processed during shooting to enhance color, tone, and otherproperties. Choose from preset picture modes according to your subject or artistic
intent. Contrast, sharpness, and other settings can be adjusted separately for eachmode. You can also add artistic effects using art filters. Art filters give you the optionof added frame effects and the like. Adjustments to individual parameters are stored
separately for each picture mode and art filter.
Super Control Panel

Q n Picture Mode

Menu

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n KPicture Mode
MENU n n n2. Picture Mode/WB n nPicture Mode

Shooting Settings# When in movie mode with the camera configured as follows, you can set the same setting
as the [KPicture Mode] (P. 146) setting by selecting [nPicture Mode] from the supercontrol panel.
- [nVideo Codec] is set to [H.264] and [nPicture Mode] is set to [Same as K]

4

EN 145

 Setting KPicture Mode

1

Select a picture mode using the rear dial or HI.

OptionPicture Mode

3
K ±0
u ±0
t ±0
L

Norm

Natural
1

2

3

4

5

M

C

Picture Mode setting screen

4
Shooting Settings
146 EN

1 i-Enhance

The camera adjusts colors and contrast for optimal
results according to the type of subject.

2 Vivid

Choose for vivid colors.

3 Natural

Choose for natural colors.

4 MutedChoose for pictures that will later be retouched.

5 Portrait

Enhance skin tones.

M Monochrome

Record pictures in monochrome. You can apply color
filter effects and choose a tint.

C Custom

Adjust picture mode parameters to create a custom
version of a selected picture mode.

F

Underwater

Process pictures to preserve the vivid colors seen
under water.
• We recommend choosing [Off] for [#+WB](P. 154) when this option is selected.

cColor Creator

Adjust hue and color to suit your creative intent.

e
f
g
h
i
j
k
l
m
n
o
p
q
r
v
9

Pop ArtSoft Focus
Pale&Light Color
Light Tone
Grainy Film
Pin Hole
Diorama
Cross Process
Gentle Sepia
Dramatic Tone
Key Line
Watercolor
Vintage
Partial Color
Bleach Bypass
Instant Film

Uses Art Filter settings. Art effects can also be used.
Available effects differ depending on the art filter.

 Setting detailed options of a KPicture Mode

1

Press FG on the Picture Mode setting screen(P. 146) to select the option you want to set.
• Available settings vary depending on the selectedpicture mode.

3
K ±0
u ±0
t ±0
L

Norm

Sharpness±0

Adjust image sharpness. Outlines can be emphasized for a
sharp, clear picture.
[-2] – [±0] – [+2]uContrast

Adjust image contrast. Increasing contrast heightens thedifference between bright and dark areas for a harder, morewell-defined picture.
[-2] – [±0] – [+2]tSaturation

Adjust color saturation. Increasing saturation makes pictures
more vivid.
[-2] – [±0] – [+2]Gradation

Adjust color brightness and shading. Bring pictures closer
to what you envisage by, for example, brightening the entire
picture.
[Shadow Adj]: Divides the image into detailed regions andadjusts the brightness separately for each region. This iseffective for images with areas of large contrast in which thewhites appear too bright or the blacks appear too dark.
[Gradation Normal]: Optimal shading. Recommended inmost circumstances.
[Gradation High Key]: Uses a tone suitable for a brightsubject.
[Gradation Low Key]: Uses a tone suitable for a dark
subject.

L

Effect EffectChoose the strength of i-Enhance.
[Effect: Low]: Adds a low effect to images.
[Effect: Standard]: Adds an effect between “low” and “high”
to images.
[Effect: High]: Adds a high effect to images.

Filter Color Filter

Color filter effects can be added to monochrome picturemodes. Depending on the color of the subject, color filter
effects can make subjects brighter or enhance contrast.
Orange adds more contrast than yellow, red more contrast
than orange. Green is a good choice for portraits and the like.
[N:None]: No filter effect.
[Ye:Yellow]: Reproduces clearly defined white cloud withnatural blue sky.
[Or:Orange]: Slightly brings out blue skies or the light of thesetting sun.
[R:Red]: Further brings out blue skies or autumn foliage.
[G:Green]: Adds warmth to skin tones in portraits. The green
filter also emphasizes the reds in lipstick.

4
Shooting Settings

SharpnessK

EN 147

4
Shooting Settings
148 EN

Color

Monochrome
Color

Add a tint to pictures when using monochrome picture modes.
[N:Normal]: Creates a normal black and white image.
[S:Sepia]: Shoot in sepia-tinted monochrome.
[B:Blue]: Shoot in blue-tinted monochrome.
[P:Purple]: Shoot in purple-tinted monochrome.
[G:Green]: Shoot in green-tinted monochrome.

l

Picture Mode

Choose a picture mode you want to adjust when using[Custom].
[i-Enhance], [Vivid], [Natural], [Muted], [Portrait],[Monochrome]

Color Creator

Rotate the front dial to adjust hue. Rotate the rear dial toadjust saturation.
To restore default values, press and hold the Q button.

Add Effects

Add effects to an art filter.
The effects that can be added differ depending on the art
filter.
With some art filters, Color Filter and Monochrome Color canbe adjusted.

Color

Selects the art filter “partial color”.

Partial Color• Art filters apply only to the JPEG copy. [RAW+JPEG] is automatically selected for image
quality in place of [RAW].
# Depending on the scene, the effects of some settings may not be visible, while in othercases tone transitions may be ragged or the image rendered more “grainy”.
%You can choose whether to show or hide each picture mode using the [KPicture Mode
Settings] menu (P. 149).

 Setting nPicture Mode1
2

Select [nPicture Mode] from the menu.

Same as K

Select an option using FGHI.

K
Off

a1

a2

a3

Records videos using the samesettings as in K Picture Mode.

MENU

OK

Movies are recorded using the same setting as configured in[KPicture Mode].

a1 FlatMovies are recorded using a tone curve adapted to color grading.

a2 OM-Log400

Movies are recorded using a log tone curve for greater freedom
during color grading.

a3 HLG

Movies are recorded with a high dynamic range, reproducing images
as seen with the naked eye when played back using compatible
equipment.

# [a3 HLG] cannot be selected when [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is set to [H.264].
# [K] and [a1 Flat] cannot be selected when [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) is set to [H.265].

Choosing which options are displayed when selecting a picturemode(KPicture Mode Settings)
PA S M B n

4
Shooting Settings

K Same as K

You can display only the options you need when selecting a picture mode.

• For details on picture modes, see “Processing options (KPicture Mode / nPictureMode)” (P. 145).
Menu

1

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n KPicture Mode Settings

Select a picture mode that you want to havedisplayed, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.

KPicture Mode Settings

i-Enhance
Vivid
Muted
Portrait
Monochrome
CustomUnderwater
MENU

OK

KPicture Mode Settings
screenEN 149Adjusting color (WB (white balance))
PA S M B n

White balance (WB) ensures that white objects in images recorded by the camera
appear white. [Auto] is suitable in most circumstances, but other values can beselected according to the light source when [Auto] fails to produce the desired results
or you wish to introduce a deliberate color cast into your images.
 Setting the white balanceSuper Control Panel

Q n WB

4

Menu

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n KWBMENU n n n2. Picture Mode/WB n nWB

Shooting Settings

1
2

Select a WB mode using the rear dial or HI.
To set the detailed options of the selected picturemode, select an option using FG.

WB mode

WB
Auto

On
x

WB Auto
Auto

5

N

O

1

>

WBV

WB setting screen

WBAuto WB Auto

Most normal scenes (scenes containing objects that are
white or close to white)• This mode is recommended in most situations.
• You can choose the white balance used underincandescent lighting (P. 154).

5

Sunny 5300K

Sunlit outdoor scenes, sunsets, fireworks• Color temperature is set to 5300K.

N

Shadow 7500K

Daylight shots of subjects in the shade• Color temperature is set to 7500K.

O

Cloudy 6000K

Shots taken in daylight under overcast skies• Color temperature is set to 6000K.

1Incandescent 3000K

Subjects under incandescent lighting• Color temperature is set to 3000K.

>

Fluorescent 4000K

Subjects under fluorescent lighting• Color temperature is set to 4000K.

WBV Underwater
n
1
2
3
4

150 EN

OptionUnderwater photography

WB Flash 5500K

Light sources with the same color temperature as flash
lighting• Color temperature is set to 5500K.

One-touch WB 1-4

Situations in which you want to set white balance for a
specific subject• Color temperature is set to a value metered from awhite object under the lighting what will be used in
the final photograph (P. 152).

CWB

Custom WB

Situations in which you can identify the appropriate color
temperature• Choose a color temperature.

 Making fine adjustments to white balance of each WB mode
You can fine-tune the white balance settings. Adjustments can be made separately.

1

Configure options.
• Press FG on the WB setting screen (P. 150) to
select the option to adjust.

WB
Auto

G

On
x

B

A
M

[Off]: The camera suppresses the warm tones produced byincandescent lighting when WB Auto is used.
[On]: The camera preserves the warm tones produced byincandescent lighting when WB Auto is used.

x (WB
Compensation)

Use the front dial or HI to adjust the (amber–blue) axis. When the
pointer (M) gets closer to A, a red cast is added and when it getscloser to B, a blue cast is added.
Use the rear dial or FG to adjust the (green–magenta) axis.
When the pointer (M) gets closer to G, a green cast is added andwhen it gets closer to M, a magenta cast is added.
Adjustments made will be reset when you press and hold the Q
button.
You can adjust the settings for all white balance modes at once.
g [All x] (P. 153)

Kelvin(only for Custom
WB)

You can set the color temperature.
[2000K] - [14000K]

Shooting Settings

W Keep Warm
Color
(only when WB
Auto is used)

4%When x (WB Compensation) is done, a mark (*) appears next to the WB mode icon.

EN 151 One-touch white balance
Measure white balance by framing a piece of paper or other white object under
the lighting that will be used in the final photograph. Use this option to fine-tune
white balance when you find it hard to obtain the desired results with white balancecompensation or preset white balance options such as 5 (sunlight) or O (overcast).
The camera stores the metered value for quick recall as required.
Settings for still photography and movie recording can be stored individually.

4
Shooting Settings

1

After selecting [u1], [u2], [u3], or [u4] (one-touch white balance 1, 2,
3, or 4) on the WB setting screen, press the Q button followed by the INFO
button.

2
3

Select [uSet].

4

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

Photograph a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper.
• Frame the piece of paper so that it fills the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.
• Press the INFO button.
• The one-touch white balance screen appears.
• The new value is saved as a preset white balance option.
• The new value is stored until one-touch white balance is measured again. Turning thepower off does not erase the data.

Metering White Balance with the One-Touch White Balance Button (Y)Assigning [u] to a button allows the control to be used to measure white balance. Bydefault, the Y button can be used to measure white balance during still photography.
To measure white balance during movie recording, you must first assign one-touch
white balance to a control using [nButton Function] (P. 208).

1

Frame a piece of colorless (white or gray) paper in the center of the display.

2

Hold the button to which One-TouchWhite Balance is assigned and press the
shutter button all the way down.

• Frame the piece of paper so that it fills the display. Ensure that it is free of shadows.

• When recording movies, press the onetouch white balance button to proceed to
Step 3.
• You will be prompted to choose the onetouch white balance option that will be
used to store the new value.

3+
One-touch white balance button (Y)Highlight a one-touch white balance setting using
FG and press the Q button.

One Touch WB

14000K• The new value will be saved as the value for theselected setting and the camera will exit to the shooting
display.

1
2
3
4
MENU

152 EN

OK

Locking the white balance in movie mode
(nButton Function: WLock)
PA S M B n
When the camera is in movie mode and the white balance is set to [WB Auto], you canlock the white balance to prevent it from changing even if the subject or the lightingchanges.
# It is required that you assign [WLock] to a button using [nButton Function] (P. 208).
ButtonA button to which [WLock] has been assigned
145 min1 [1:02:03](REC 00:12
TC00:00:01 DF

1 4K 60p L-8

C-AF
Off

M-IS2
3

±0 RL

nP

Lock WBAuto

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Lock

Making fine adjustments to white balance(KAll x/nAll x)
PA S M B n

4
Shooting Settings

When you press the button, white balance is locked withthe currently selected settings and “Lock” appears to theleft of “WBAuto”. Lock is released when you press the
button again.

Fine-tune white balance of all white balance modes at once.
Menu

KAll x / nAllx

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n KAll x
MENU n n n2. Picture Mode/WB n nAll x
Use the front dial or HI to adjust the (amber–blue) axis. When the
pointer (M) gets closer to A, a red cast is added and when it getscloser to B, a blue cast is added.
Use the rear dial or FG to adjust the (green–magenta) axis.
When the pointer (M) gets closer to G, a green cast is added andwhen it gets closer to M, a magenta cast is added.
Adjustments made will be reset when you press and hold the Q
button.

%When [KAll x] / [nAll x] is done, a mark (*) appears next to each WB mode icon.

EN 153

Preserving the warm tones of incandescent lighting when in WB
Auto mode(KW Keep Warm Color/nW Keep Warm Color)
PA S M B n
Choose how the camera adjusts white balance for pictures taken using auto whitebalance under incandescent lighting.
Menu

4
Shooting Settings
154 ENMENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n KW Keep Warm ColorMENU n n n2. Picture Mode/WB n nW Keep Warm Color

OffThe camera suppresses the warm tones produced by incandescentlighting.

On

The camera preserves the warm tones produced by incandescentlighting.

%This can also be set from the WB setting screen. g “Making fine adjustments to whitebalance of each WB mode” (P. 151).

Flash White Balance

(#+WB)PA S M B n

Choose the white balance used for photos taken with a flash. Instead of using a setting
adapted to flash lighting, you can opt to prioritize the value selected for non-flash
photography. Use this option to automatically switch from one white balance setting toanother when you find yourself frequently enabling and disabling the flash.
Menu

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n #+WB

Off

The camera uses the value currently selected for white balance.

WBAutoThe camera uses auto white balance ([WB Auto]).

WB#5500K

The camera uses flash white balance ([n]).

Setting the color reproduction format (Color Space)

PA S M B n

You can select a format to ensure that colors are correctly reproduced when shot
images are regenerated on a monitor or using a printer.
Menu

MENU n _ n2. Picture Mode/WB n Color Space

AdobeRGB

It can reproduce a wider gamut of colors than sRGB. Accurate color
reproduction is available only with software and devices (displays,
printers, and the like) that support this standard. An underscore (“_”)
appears at the beginning of the file name (e.g., “_xxx0000.jpg”).

# [AdobeRGB] is not available in HDR or movie (n) mode or when an art filter is selected
for picture mode.

Preview Options for Movie Picture Modes

( nView Assist)
PA S M B n

The display can be adjusted for ease of viewing when a movie-only picture mode
option ([a1 Flat] or [a2 OM-Log400]) is selected (P. 149).
Menu

MENU n n n2. Picture Mode/WB nOn

Adjust the picture for ease of viewing. The indicators in the display
may change color.

Off

Do not adjust the picture for ease of viewing.

4
Shooting Settings

sRGB

The color space standardized by an international standards organization.
It is widely supported across displays, printers, digital cameras,and computer applications. This setting is recommended in mostcircumstances.

nView Assist# This option applies only to the display, not to the actual movie files.
# This option does not apply when movies recorded using [a1 Flat] or [a2 OM-Log400]
are played back on the camera. It also does not apply when the movies are viewed on a
TV.
%The histogram (P. 38) and zebra pattern (P. 184) are processed based on the picture
beforenView Assist is applied.

EN 155

Special shooting modes (Computational Modes)
The camera combines images or processes them digitally to create special effects thatcannot be achieved in normal shooting modes.

Shooting still pictures in a higher resolution 

4(High Res Shot)

PA S M B n

Shooting Settings

Shoot at resolutions higher than that of the image sensor. The camera takes a seriesof shots while moving the image sensor and combines them to create a single highresolution photo. Use this option to capture details that normally would not be visible
even at high zoom ratios.
When High Res Shot is enabled, the image quality mode for High Res Shot can beselected using [KK] (P. 140).
Buttonh button

Menu

MENU n ‘ n1. Computational Modes n High Res Shot Enabling High Res Shot

1
2

Use FG to select [High Res Shot] and press the
Q button.
Use HI to select [Onm] (tripod) or [Onn](handheld) and press the Q button.

High Res Shot
High Res ShotOffhK
Waiting Time
#Charge Time

80M F+RAW

MENU

OK

0sec
0sec

High Res Shot setting screen

OffHigh Res Shot is disabled.

Onm

Shoot with the camera fixed to a tripod. The RAW picture is recorded
in 80M (10368 × 7776).

Onn

Shoot with the camera in your hands. The RAW picture is recorded
in 50M (8160 × 6120).

3

The display returns to the High Res Shot setting screen.

%When setting from the button, you can turn this function on and off using the h button.
You can also switch between [Onm] (tripod) and [Onn] (handheld) by rotating the front orrear dial while pressing the h button.

156 EN Configuring High Res Shot1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto High Res Shot setting screen.

High Res Shot
High Res Shot

Onm

hK
Waiting Time
#Charge Time

80M F+RAW

MENU

OK

0sec
0sec

hK

Choose the image quality of High Res Shot shooting (P. 140).

Waiting Time

Set how long the camera waits before releasing the shutter after
you press the shutter button fully. Use this to prevent the effect ofcamera shake caused by the pressing of the shutter button.

#Charge Time

Choose how long the camera waits for the flash to charge between
shots when using a flash unit not specifically designated for use withthe camera.
[0.5 sec] / [0.2 sec] / [0.1 sec] / [0 sec]

4

1

Press the MENU button to close the High Res Shot setting screen and returnto shooting screen.
• A h icon will be displayed. The icon will flash if thecamera is not steady. The icon stops flashing when thecamera is steady and ready to shoot.
• After enabling High Res Shot, check the option selected
for image quality. Image quality can be adjusted in the
super control panel.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

Shooting Settings

 Shooting

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

S-ISOff
3$P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Camera readying for HighRes Shot (flashes)

2

Take pictures.
• Shooting is complete when the green h icon clears from the display.
• The camera will automatically create the composite image when shooting iscomplete. A message will be displayed during this process.

• Choose from JPEG (AF, IF, or JF) and RAW+JPEG modes. When image quality
is set to RAW+JPEG, the camera saves a single RAW image (extension “.ORI”) before
combining it with the high resolution shooting. Pre-combination RAW images can beplayed back using the latest version of OM Workspace.
# AF and AF+RAW are unavailable when [Onn] (handheld) is selected as the shooting
method.
# [S-IS Off] is automatically selected for [KImage Stabilizer] (P. 136) when [Onm] (tripod)
is chosen, [S-IS Auto] when [Onn] (handheld) is selected.
# The maximum wait time for [Onn] (handheld) is 1 second.
# During RC flash photography, the maximum flash wait time is 4 seconds and the flash
control mode is fixed at MANUAL.
# The following cannot be used:
multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, focus stacking, fisheye
correction, and HDR.
# When [High Res Shot] is set to [Onm] (tripod), [Time Lapse Movie] becomes [Off].

EN 157

# When High Res Shot is enabled, [Drive j/Y] is set to [♥o]. [♥Y12s] (Silent self-timer12s), [♥Y2s] (Silent self-timer 2s) and [♥YC] (Silent custom self-timer) can be set.
# Pictures taken with an art filter selected for picture mode will be recorded in [Natural]mode.
# Image quality may drop under flickering light sources such as fluorescent or LED lamps.
# If the camera is unable to record a composite image due to blur or other factors, only the
first shot will be recorded. If [JPEG] is selected for image quality, the shot will be recordedin JPEG format, while if [RAW+JPEG] is selected, the camera will record two copies, one
in RAW (.ORF) and the other in JPEG format.

Slowing the Shutter in Bright Light

4(Live ND Shooting)
PA S M B n

Shooting Settings

The camera makes a series of exposures and combines to create a single photo thatappears to have been taken at a slow shutter speed.
• Changing exposure compensation or shutter speed resets the [LV Simulation] display.

 Enabling Live ND Shooting
Menu

1
2

MENU n ‘ n1. Computational Modes n Live ND Shooting

Use FG to select [Live ND Shooting] and press
the Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Live ND Shooting
Live ND Shooting
ND Number
LV Simulation

MENU

Off
ND8(3EV)
On

OK

Live ND Shooting setting
screenOff

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with the slow shutter effect enabled.

3

158 ENThe display returns to the Live ND Shooting setting screen.

 Configuring Live ND Shooting

1

Configure options.

Live ND Shooting• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Live ND Shooting setting screen.

Live ND ShootingOn
ND8(3EV)On

ND Number
LV Simulation

MENU

OK

LV Simulation

Choose whether to preview the effect of the selected filter at thecurrent shutter speed.
[Off]: Use the standard shooting display.
[On]: The effects of shutter speed are shown in the display.

4
Shooting Settings

ND Number

Choose an ND filter type; the camera will convert it to an exposure
value and reduce exposure by that amount. Options are available inincrements of 1 EV:[ND2 (1EV)], [ND4 (2EV)], [ND8 (3EV)], [ND16 (4EV)],[ND32 (5EV)], [ND64 (6EV)]

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Live ND Shooting setting screen andreturn to shooting screen.
• If you selected [On] for [Live ND Shooting], live ND filter photography will now start.
• An icon appears in the display when the live ND filter is Live ND Shooting
enabled.
F
60p L-81023 [1:02:03]
ND8-LV• To end live ND filter photography, select [Off] in the [LiveS-AF
ND Shooting] display shown in Step 2.
100% r O

1

1 L

1

1 4K

3
$

S

2

Adjust shutter speed while previewing the results inthe display.

100%

1/ 15

r O

ND8-LV

F 5.6

-

0

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

+

0.0

1 LF

ISO
Auto

200

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF• Adjust shutter speed using the rear dial.
• The fastest shutter speed available varies with the ND
filter selected.
[ND2 (1EV)]: 1/60 s[ND16 (4EV)]: 1/8 s[ND4 (2EV)]: 1/30 s[ND32 (5EV)]: 1/4 s[ND8 (3EV)]: 1/15 s[ND64 (6EV)]: 1/2 s

3
$

S

1/ 15

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Shutter speed• If [On] is selected for [LV Simulation], the effects of changes to shutter speed can bepreviewed in the display.
• The camera requires a length of time equivalent to the selected shutter speed to
produce [LV Simulation] results similar to the final image.
• When the time equivalent to the selected shutter speed passes, the “LV” part of theicon on the screen turns green. When the icon is green, the display is similar to thefinal image.

EN 1593

4

Take pictures.

# [Frame Rate] will be [Normal] during live ND photography.
# The upper limit for [K ISO] during live ND photography is ISO 800. This also applies
when [Auto] is selected for [K ISO].
# The following cannot be used:
HDR, High Res Shot, multiple exposure, keystone compensation, bracketing, focus
stacking, interval-timer photography, K flicker scan, flickerless photography, andfisheye correction.
# When Live ND Shooting is enabled, [Drive j/Y] is set to [♥o]. [♥Y12s] (Silent selftimer 12s), [♥Y2s] (Silent self-timer 2s) and [♥YC] (Silent custom self-timer) can be set.
# Unlike physical ND filters, the live ND filter does not reduce the amount of light reaching
the image sensor, and consequently very bright subjects may be overexposed.

Shooting Settings

Increasing Depth of Field

(Focus Stacking)
PA S M B n

Combine multiple images for a depth of field greater than can be obtained with a single
shot. The camera takes a series of shots at focus distances both in front of and behindthe current focus position and creates a single image from the areas that are in focus
in each shot.
Choose this option if you want all areas of the subject in focus in photographs taken atshort ranges or wide apertures (low f-numbers). The pictures are taken in silent modeusing the electronic shutter.

# The composite image is recorded in JPEG format, regardless of the option selected forimage quality.
# The composite image is enlarged 7% horizontally and vertically.
# Shooting will end if focus or zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all
the way down to start focus stacking photography.
# If focus stacking fails, the camera will record the selected number of photos without
creating a composite image.
# This option is available only with lenses that support focus stacking. See our website for
information on compatible lenses.
# Pictures taken with an art filter selected for picture mode are recorded in [Natural] mode.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n1. Computational Modes n Focus Stacking

 Enabling Focus Stacking

1
2

Use FG to select [Focus Stacking] and press the
Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Focus Stacking
Focus Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

MENU

Off
8
5
0sec

OK

Focus Stacking setting
screen160 EN

Off

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with increased depth of field.

3

The display returns to the Focus Stacking setting screen.

 Configuring Focus Stacking

1Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Focus Stacking setting screen.

Focus Stacking
Focus Stacking

On
8
5
0sec

Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

MENU

OK

4

Choose the number of shots to be taken with varied focus positions.
[3] – [15]Set focus
differential

Choose the amount the camera varies focus with each shot.
[1] – [10]#Charge Time

Choose how long the camera waits for the flash to charge between
shots when using a flash unit not specifically designated for use withthe camera.
[0 sec] / [0.1 sec] / [0.2 sec] / [0.5 sec] / [1 sec] / [2 sec] / [4 sec] /[8 sec] / [15 sec] / [30 sec]

Shooting Settings

Set number ofshots Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Focus Stacking setting screen andreturn to shooting screen.
• W appears on the screen.
• Picture mode will be set to [Natural].
• A frame indicating the final crop will be shown in thedisplay. Compose the shot with your subject in theframe.

100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3
$

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

W

2

Take pictures.
• The camera will automatically take the selected number of shots when the shutter
button is pressed all the way down.

# When [Focus Stacking] is set to [On], [Flash Mode] in [Silents Settings] (P. 132)
becomes [Allow].
# The flash sync speed is set to 1/100 s. Selecting a value over ISO 16000 for [KISO] sets
the flash sync speed to 1/50 s.
%We recommend using a remote control (P. 279) to reduce blur caused by camera shake.
In [Silents Settings] (P. 132), you can choose how long the camera will wait to release
the shutter after the shutter button is pressed all the way down.

EN 161

Taking HDR (High Dynamic Range) images (HDR)

PA S M B n

The camera varies exposure over a series of shots, selects from each tone range
with the highest level of detail, and combines them to create a single picture with awide dynamic range. If the photo features a high-contrast subject, details that would
otherwise be lost in shadows or highlights will be preserved.

# Use a tripod or take similar measures to fix the camera in place.
Menu

4

Off

MENU n ‘ n1. Computational Modes n HDR
HDR is disabled.

Shooting Settings

HDR1

HDR2
3f 2.0EV
5f 2.0EV
7f 2.0EV
3f 3.0EV
5f 3.0EV

Each time you take a photo, the camera will take a series of shots while varying
exposure and combine them into a single picture. Choose [HDR1] for naturallooking results, [HDR2] for a more painterly effect.
• [K ISO] is fixed at ISO 200.
• Shutter speeds can be as slow as 4 s. Shooting will continue for up to 15 s.
• Picture mode is fixed at [Natural] and color space at [sRGB].
• The combined picture is saved in JPEG format. If [RAW] is selected for image
quality, it will instead be recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Each time you take a photo, the camera will vary
exposure over a series of shots. The shots are not
combined to create a single picture. The shots canhowever be combined using HDR software on acomputer or other device.

• ”HDR” appears on the screen.

3f 2.0EV
Number ofshots

Exposurerange

HDR
100% r O

HDR1

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3
$

P

162 EN

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO 200

1

Take pictures.
• Each time you press the shutter button, the camera will take the selected number ofshots.
• In [HDR1] and [HDR2] modes, the camera will automatically combine the shots into asingle picture.
• Exposure compensation is available in modes P, A, and S.

Recording multiple exposures in a single image(Multiple Exposure)
PA S M B n
Take two shots and combine them into a single picture. Alternatively, you can take ashot and combine it with an existing picture stored on the memory card.

4
Shooting Settings# The image displayed in the monitor or viewfinder during shooting differs from the final
HDR picture.
# Noise may appear in the final picture when a slower shutter speed is selected in [HDR1]
or [HDR2] mode.
# When [HDR1] or [HDR2] is enabled, [Drive j/Y] is set to [♥o]. [♥Y12s] (Silent selftimer 12s), [♥Y2s] (Silent self-timer 2s) and [♥YC] (Silent custom self-timer) can be set.
# The following cannot be used:flash photography, bracketing, focus stacking, multiple exposure, interval-timer
photography, keystone compensation, the live ND filer, fisheye correction, and High Res
Shot.

The combined image is recorded at current image quality settings. Only RAW pictures
can be selected for multiple exposures that include an existing image.
If you record a multiple exposure with RAW selected for [KK], you can then selectit for subsequent multiple exposures using [Overlay], allowing you to create multiple
exposures combining three or more photographs.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n1. Computational Modes n Multiple Exposure Enabling Multiple Exposure

1
2

Use FG to select [Multiple Exposure] and press
the Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Multiple Exposure
Multiple Exposure

Off

Auto Gain
Overlay

Off
Off

MENU

OK

Multiple Exposure setting
screenOff

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Create a multiple exposure from 2 pictures.

3

The display returns to the Multiple Exposure setting screen.

EN 163 Configuring Multiple Exposure1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Multiple Exposure setting screen.

Multiple Exposure
Multiple Exposure

On

Auto Gain
Overlay

Off
Off

MENU

4

OK

Shooting Settings

Auto Gain[Off]: Do not adjust brightness the brightness of the pictures in themultiple exposure.
[On]: Halve the brightness of each picture in the multiple exposure.

Overlay[Off]: Create a multiple exposure from the next 2 pictures taken.
[On]: Shoot a multiple exposure that includes an existing RAW
image stored on the memory card.
• [Overlay] is only available when [On] is selected for [Multiple
Exposure].

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Multiple Exposure setting screen andreturn to shooting screen.
• A X icon will be displayed.

X
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

2

164 EN

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

Take pictures.
• The first shot will be visible superimposed on the view through the lens as you
compose the next shot.
• The X icon turns green.
• Normally, a multiple exposure will be created after the second shot is taken.
• Pressing the D button allows you to retake the first shot.
• Press the MENU button or press the q button to end multiple exposure
photography.
• The X icon clears from the display when multiple exposure photography ends.

ISO
Auto

200

 When [Overlay] is set
When [On] is selected for [Overlay], a list of pictures is displayed.

1

Highlight a picture using FGHI and press the Q button.

2

Press the MENU button to close the menu.

3

Take pictures.

• Only RAW images can be selected.
• A X icon will be displayed.
• The selected picture is overlaid on the screen.

• You can take additional pictures that will be overlaid on the previously-chosenphotograph.

4
Shooting Settings# The camera will not enter sleep mode during multiple exposure photography.
# Pictures taken with other cameras cannot be used for multiple exposures.
# RAW pictures taken using High Res Shot cannot be used for multiple exposures.
# The RAW pictures listed in the image-selection display when [On] is selected for [Overlay]
are those processed using the settings in effect at the time the photograph was taken.
# Exit multiple exposure mode before adjusting shooting settings. Some settings cannot be
adjusted while multiple exposure mode is in effect.
# Performing any of the following operations after the first shot is taken ends multiple
exposure photography:
turning the camera off, pressing the q or MENU button, choosing a different shooting
mode, or connecting cables of any type. Multiple exposure is also canceled when thebattery is exhausted.
# The image-selection display for [Overlay] shows the JPEG copies of photographs takenwith RAW + JPEG selected for image quality.
# Live composite photography ([Live Comp]) is not available in mode B.
# The following are not available in multiple exposure mode:
HDR, bracketing, focus stacking, interval-timer photography, keystone compensation,
the live ND filer, fisheye correction, and High Res Shot.
%Pictures taken with RAW selected for [KK] can also be overlaid during playback.
g “Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)” (P. 203)

EN 165

Digital Zoom (KDigital Tele-converter / nDigital Tele-converter)
PA S M B n

This option takes a crop at the center of the frame the same dimensions as the size
option currently selected for image quality and zooms it in to fill the display. This allows
you to zoom in past the lens’ maximum focal length, making it a good choice when you
are unable to switch lenses or find it difficult to get any closer to your subject.

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

MENU n ‘ n2. Other Shooting Functions n KDigital Teleconverter
MENU n n n1. Basic Settings/Image Quality n nDigital Teleconverter

Off

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Images are recorded enlarged (Still pictures: 2x, Movies: 1.4x).
• When [On] is selected, an icon is displayed and, whenlive view is enabled, it is enlarged.
• The size of the AF targets (“Choosing an AF Target
Mode (AF Target Mode)” (P. 77)) increases and their
number decreases.
• JPEG images are recorded at the selected zoom ratio.
In the case of RAW images, a frame shows the zoom
crop. A frame showing the zoom crop is displayed on
the image during playback.

Digital teleconverter
100% r O

2x

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

# In still photography mode, the following cannot be used:
multiple exposure, keystone compensation, and fish-eye correction.
# In movie mode, this function cannot be used during high-speed movie recording.
# This function cannot be used when outputting HDMI signals in RAW mode (P. 182).
# You cannot zoom in on the display (P. 41, P. 80, P. 102) when [nDigital Teleconverter] is enabled.

166 EN

1 4K 60p L-8

ISO
Auto

200

Shooting automatically with a fixed interval (Interval Shooting)
PA S M B n

You can set the camera to shoot automatically with a set time lapse. The shot frames
can also be recorded as into a single movie.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n2. Other Shooting Functions n Interval Shooting Enabling Interval Shooting

1

Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Interval Shooting
Interval Shooting

Off

Number of Frames
Start Waiting Time100
00:00:01

Interval Length

00:00:01

Estimated Start Time
TL Movie Length

Start '22.06.04 10:56
End '22.06.04 10:57
--:--

MENU

OK

Interval Shooting setting
screenOff

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken at specified interval.

3

The display returns to the Interval Shooting setting screen.

4
Shooting Settings

2

Use FG to select [Interval Shooting] and press
the Q button.

 Configuring Interval Shooting

1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Interval Shooting setting screen.

Interval Shooting
Interval Shooting
Number of Frames
Start Waiting TimeInterval Length
Estimated Start Time
TL Movie LengthOn
100
00:00:01
00:00:01
Start '22.06.04 10:56
End '22.06.04 10:57

MENU

--:--

OK

Number of Frames

Choose the number of frames shot.
[002] – [9999]

Start Waiting Time

Choose how long the camera waits before starting interval timer
photography and taking the first shot.
[00:00:00] – [24:00:00]

Interval Length

Choose how long the camera waits between shots once shooting
has begun.[00:00:01] – [24:00:00]

Interval Mode

Choose whether to put priority on the interval time or the number offrames.
[Time Priority] / [Frames Priority]
If [Time Priority] is selected, the previous shooting may be still inprogress even when it is time to shoot the next shot.
When the selected [Interval Length] is short or when using longexposure, the number of recorded frames may be smaller than thenumber selected for [Number of Frames].

EN 167

4
Shooting Settings

Exposure
Smoothing

Choose whether to smooth the exposure settings for all frames. Thechange of exposure will be smooth in the time lapse movie.
[Off] / [On]Time Lapse Movie

Choose whether to record a time-lapse movie.
[Off]: The camera saves the individual shots but does not use themto create a time-lapse movie.
[On]: The camera records the individual shots and also uses themto create a time-lapse movie.

Movie Settings

Choose the frame size ([Movie Resolution]) and frame rate ([FrameRate]) for movies created using [Time Lapse Movie].
Choose the frame size from the following options.
[4K] / [FullHD] / [HD]Choose the frame rate from the following options.
[30fps] / [15fps] / [10fps] / [5fps]# [Start Waiting Time], [Interval Length] and [Estimated Time] may change depending on
shooting settings. Use these as guidelines only.

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Interval Shooting setting screen andreturn to shooting screen.
• An i icon and the selected number of frames appear
on the shooting screen.

Interval-timer photography
100% r O
100

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

2

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Take pictures.

• The specified number of frames will be shot automatically.
• The i icon will turn green and the number of shots remaining will be displayed.
• Time lapse shooting will be canceled if any of the following is operated:
Mode dial, MENU button, q button, lens release button, or connection to a computer
using a USB cable.
• Turning the camera off ends interval-timer photography.
# Frames are shot even if the image is not in focus after AF. If you wish to fix the focus
position, shoot in MF.
# [Image Review] (P. 42) is fixed at 0.5 seconds.
# If the time until shooting or the shooting interval is 1 minute 31 seconds or longer, themonitor will go dark and the camera will enter sleep mode if no operations are performedfor 1 minute. The camera and monitor will reactivate automatically 10 seconds before a
picture is taken, and can be reactivated manually by pressing the shutter button.
# The camera automatically selects [S‑AF] for AF mode (P. 72) in place of [C‑AF] and[C‑AF+TR], and [S‑AFb] in place of [C‑AFb] and [C‑AF+TRb].
# When [FAF] is selected as the AF mode (P. 72), focus to initiate shooting, then lock
focus and start recording.
# Touch operations are disabled during time lapse shooting.
# Time-lapse shooting cannot be combined with HDR, bracketing, focus stacking, multiple
exposure, or the live ND filer.

168 EN

# The flash will not work if the flash charging time is longer than the interval between shots.
# When 1000 or a larger number is selected for [Number of Frames], [Time Lapse Movie]
will be set to [Off].
# When [High Res Shot] is set to [Onm] (tripod), [Time Lapse Movie] becomes [Off].
# If any of still pictures are not recorded correctly, the time lapse movie will not be
generated.
# If there is insufficient space on the card, the time lapse movie will not be recorded.
# If there is not enough charge left on the battery, the shooting may end partway through.
Use a sufficiently charged battery or connect the supplied USB-AC adapter (P. 17) or amobile battery conforming to the USB-PD standard to the camera when shooting.

4
Shooting Settings
EN 169Keystone correction and perspective control (Keystone Comp.)
PA S M B n

Keystone distortion due to the influence of lens focal length and proximity to the subject
can be corrected, or enhanced to exaggerate the effects of perspective. Keystonecompensation can be previewed in the monitor during shooting. The corrected image iscreated from a smaller crop, slightly increasing the effective zoom ratio.

4

Menu

MENU n ‘ n2. Other Shooting Functions n Keystone Comp.

Off

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with keystone compensation applied.

Shooting Settings• When you select [On], a D icon is displayed andsliders appear on the monitor.

Keystone compensation
100% r O

P

1

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1/ 250

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

F 5.6

ISO
Auto

200

Frame the shot and adjust keystone compensation while viewing your subject
in the display.
• Rotate the front dial to make horizontal adjustments and the rear dial to make verticaladjustments.
• Use FGHI to position the crop. The direction in which the crop can be moved isshown by an arrow ( ).
• To cancel changes, press and hold the Q button.

2

To adjust aperture, shutter speed, and other shooting settings, press the
INFO button.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed.
• A D icon is displayed while keystone compensation is enabled. The icon isdisplayed in green if adjustments have been made to keystone compensation
settings.
• To return to the keystone compensation display shown in Step 1, press the INFO
button repeatedly.

3

Take pictures.

# Pictures may seem “grainy” depending on the amount of compensation performed. The
amount of compensation also determines the amount the picture will be enlarged whencropped and whether the crop can be moved.
# Depending on the amount of compensation, you may be unable to reposition the crop.
# Depending on the amount of compensation performed, the selected AF target may not be
visible in the display. If the AF target is outside the frame, its direction is indicated by a g,h, i, or j icon in the display.

170 EN

# Pictures taken with [RAW] for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
# The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, focus stacking, HDR,
multiple exposure, the live ND filer, fish-eye correction, the digital teleconverter, movie
recording, [C‑AF], [C‑AFb], [C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRb] AF modes, art filter
picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.
# Lens converters may not produced the desired results.
# Be sure to provide [KImage Stabilizer] data for lenses that are not part of the Four Thirds
or Micro Four Thirds family (P. 136).
Where applicable, keystone compensation will be performed using the focal length
supplied for [KImage Stabilizer] (P. 136) or [Lens Info Settings] (P. 246).

Correcting Fisheye Distortion 

Correct distortion caused by fisheye lenses to give photos the appearance of pictures
taken with a wide-angle lens. The amount of correction can be selected from threedifferent levels. You can also opt simultaneously to correct distortion in photos taken
under water.

• This option is only available with compatible fisheye lenses.
As of February 2022, it could be used with the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL ED 8mm F1.8 FisheyePRO.

 Enabling Fisheye Compensation
Menu

1
2

4
Shooting Settings(Fisheye Compensation)
PA S M B n

MENU n ‘ n2. Other Shooting Functions n Fisheye
Compensation

Use FG to select [Fisheye Compensation] andpress the Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Fisheye Compensation
Fisheye Compensation

Off

Angle
j/iCorrection

1
Off

MENU

OK

Fisheye Compensation setting
screenOff

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with fisheye compensation applied.

3

The display returns to the Fisheye Compensation setting screen.

EN 171

 Configuring Fisheye Compensation

1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Fisheye Compensation setting screen.

Fisheye Compensation
Fisheye Compensation

On

Angle
j/iCorrection

1
Off

MENU

4

OK

Shooting Settings

Angle

When fisheye correction is performed, the picture is cropped toeliminate blacked-out areas. Choose from three different crops.
[1] / [2] / [3]j/iCorrection

Choose whether to correct distortion in photos taken under water in
addition to the correction performed using [Angle].
[Off] / [On]

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Fisheye Compensation setting screen
and return to shooting screen.
• When fisheye compensation is enabled, a Z icon will
be displayed together with the selected crop.

Fisheye compensation
100% r O

1

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

2

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

Take pictures.

# Pictures taken with [RAW] selected for image quality are recorded in RAW + JPEG format.
Fisheye compensation is not applied to the RAW image.
# Focus peaking is not available in the fisheye compensation display.
# AF target selection is restricted to ISingle and ySmall target modes.
# The following cannot be used:
live composite photography, burst photography, bracketing, focus stacking, HDR,
multiple exposure, the live ND filer, keystone compensation, the digital teleconverter,
movie recording, [C‑AF], [C‑AFb], [C‑AF+TR], and [C‑AF+TRb] AF modes, art filter
picture modes, the custom self-timer, and High Res Shot.

172 ENConfiguring BULB/TIME/COMP Settings
(BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)
PA S M B n
Set items related to bulb/time/composite photography.
Menu

1

MENU n ‘ n2. Other Shooting Functions n BULB/TIME/COMP
Settings

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.

My

BULB/TIME/COMP Settings

On

Bulb/Time Focusing

8min

Bulb/Time Timer

3hLive Composite Timer-7

Live Bulb

Off

Live Time

0.5secComposite Settings

1/2secMENU

OK

Bulb/Time
Focusing

Allows manual focusing in B (bulb) mode. You can take picturesusing techniques such as putting the subject out of focus duringexposure or focusing at the end of exposure.
[Off]: Disables manual focusing during exposure.
[On]: Enables manual focusing during exposure.

Bulb/Time Timer

Specify the maximum length of bulb/time photography.
[30min] / [25min] / [20min] / [15min] / [8min] / [4min] / [2min] /[1min]

Live Composite
TimerSpecify the maximum length of live composite photography.
[6h] / [5h] / [4h] / [3h] / [2h] / [1h] / [30min] / [25min] / [20min] /[15min] / [8min] / [4min]

Bulb/Time Monitor

Specify the display brightness in B (bulb) mode.
[-7] – [±0] – [+7]Live Bulb

Choose the display interval during bulb photography. The number of
update times is limited. Choose [Off] to disable the display.
[60sec] / [30sec] / [15sec] /[8sec] / [4sec] / [2sec] / [1sec] / [0.5sec] / [Off]Live Time

Choose the display interval during time photography. The number of
update times is limited. Choose [Off] to disable the display.
[60sec] / [30sec] / [15sec] /[8sec] / [4sec] / [2sec] / [1sec] / [0.5sec] / [Off]Composite
Settings

Set an exposure time to be the reference in composite photography.
[60sec] / [50sec] / [40sec] / [30sec] / [25sec] / [20sec] / [15sec] /[13sec] / [10sec] /[8sec] / [6sec] / [5sec] / [4sec] / [3.2sec] / [2.5sec] / [2sec] /[1.6sec] / [1.3sec] / [1sec] / [1/1.3sec] / [1/1.6sec] / [1/2sec]

4
Shooting Settings

Bulb/Time Monitor

EN 173

Recording a series of shots with varied exposure(AE BKT)PA S M B n

Vary exposure over a series of shots. You choose the amount of variation and thenumber of shots. The camera takes a series of shots with different exposure settings.
The camera will take pictures while the shutter button is pressed all the way down,
ending when the selected number of shots has been taken.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n AE BKTOffPictures are taken without using this function.

4

3f 0.3EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.3 EV.

3f 0.5EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.5 EV.

Shooting Settings

3f 0.7EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.7 EV.

3f 1.0EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 1.0 EV.

5f 0.3EV

5 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.3 EV.

5f 0.5EV

5 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.5 EV.

5f 0.7EV

5 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.7 EV.

5f 1.0EV

5 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 1.0 EV.

7f 0.3EV

7 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.3 EV.

7f 0.5EV

7 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.5 EV.

7f 0.7EV

7 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.7 EV.

“BKT” is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have beentaken. The first shot is taken at current exposure settings, followed first by the shotswith reduced exposure and then by the shots with increased exposure.
The settings used to alter exposure vary with the shooting mode.

P (program AE)
A (aperture-priority AE)
S (shutter-priority AE)

Shutter speed

M (manual)• Shutter speed (when [KISO] is not set to [Auto])• ISO sensitivity (when [KISO] is set to [Auto])

Both aperture and shutter speed
Aperture• If exposure compensation is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary
exposure around the selected value.
• Changing the option selected for [EV Step] (P. 107) changes the options available forbracketing amount.
# Exposure bracketing cannot be combined with flash bracketing (P. 175) or focus
bracketing (P. 178).

174 EN

Recording pictures with varied white balance

(WB BKT)PA S M B n

The camera varies white balance to record a series of pictures. You choose the color
axis and the bracketing amount.
Shooting ends after a single shot. The camera takes one picture when the shutter
button is pressed all the way down and automatically processes it to record thepictures.
MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n WB BKT

A-B

Select the bracketing amount for the A-B (amber–blue) axis.
[Off] / [3f 2Step] / [3f 4Step] / [3f 6Step]

G-M

Select the bracketing amount for the G-M (green–magenta) axis.
[Off] / [3f 2Step] / [3f 4Step] / [3f 6Step]

Three pictures are created for each color axis.
The first copy is recorded at current white balance settings, the second using anegative value for compensation, and the third using a positive value.

• If white balance fine-tuning is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary whitebalance around the selected value.
# White balance bracketing cannot be combined with art filter bracketing (P. 177) or focus
bracketing (P. 178).

Recording pictures with varied flash level

4
Shooting Settings

Menu(FL BKT)PA S M B n

The camera varies flash level (output) over a series of shots. You choose the amountof variation. The camera takes a shot at a new flash level each time the shutter button
is pressed all the way down. Bracketing ends after the required number of shots has
been taken. In burst shooting modes, the camera will take pictures while the shutter
button is pressed all the way down, ending when the required number of shots has
been taken.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n FL BKT

OffPictures are taken without using this function.

3f 0.3EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.3 EV.

3f 0.5EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.5 EV.

3f 0.7EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.7 EV.

3f 1.0EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 1.0 EV.

“BKT” is displayed in green until all the shots in the bracketing sequence have beentaken. The first shot is taken at current flash settings, followed first by the shot with
reduced flash output and then by the shot with increased flash output.

%If you change the [EV Step] setting (P. 107), the bracketing amount of flash alsochanges.
• If flash compensation is enabled before shooting begins, the camera will vary flash output
around the selected value.
# Flash bracketing cannot be combined with exposure bracketing (P. 174) or focus
bracketing (P. 178).

EN 175

Recording pictures with varied ISO sensitivity

(ISO BKT)PA S M B n

The camera varies ISO sensitivity to record a series of pictures. You choose thebracketing amount. Shooting ends after a single shot. The camera takes one picture
when the shutter button is pressed all the way down and automatically processes it torecord the required number of shots.
Menu

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n ISO BKTOffPictures are taken without using this function.

4

3f 0.3EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.3 EV.

3f 0.7EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 0.7 EV.

Shooting Settings

3f 1.0EV

3 pictures are taken with the bracketing amount of 1.0 EV.

176 ENThe first copy is recorded at the current ISO sensitivity setting, the second withsensitivity reduced by the selected amount, and the third with ISO sensitivity increasedby the selected amount.

• If shutter speed or aperture have been changed to modify exposure from the value
selected by the camera, the camera will vary ISO sensitivity around the current exposure
value.
# The maximum sensitivity selected for [KISO-A Upper/Default] does not apply.
# During silent photography, the flash sync speed is set to 1/50 s.
# Changing the option selected for [ISO Step] (P. 114) does not change the options
available for bracketing amount.
# ISO sensitivity bracketing cannot be combined with art filter bracketing (P. 177) or focus
bracketing (P. 178).

Recording copies of one picture with different art filters applied
(ART BKT)PA S M B n
Create multiple pictures of each picture, each with a different art filter applied.
 Enabling art filter bracketing
Menu

1

Use FG to select [ART BKT] and press the Q
button.

ART BKT
ART BKT

OffART BKT Setting

Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.
MENU

OK

ART BKT setting screen

Off

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with multiple art filters applied.

3

The display returns to the ART BKT setting screen.

4
Shooting Settings

2

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n ART BKT Configuring art filter bracketing1

Select [ART BKT Setting] on the ART BKT setting
screen and press the Q button.

2

Select an art filter that you want to apply, and put acheck (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

ART BKT Setting

ART BKT Setting

Pop Art[Pop Art\Soft Focus
Pale&Light Color[
Pale&Light Color\Light Tone
Grainy Film[
MENU

OK

Select the art filters that you want to apply. Picture modes such as[Vivid], [Natural] and [Flat] can also be selected.

# When there is a large number of art filters to be applied, it may take a long time to record thepictures after shooting.
# With the exceptions of exposure bracketing (P. 174) and flash bracketing (P. 175), art filter
bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the ART BKT setting screen and return toshooting screen.

2

The camera takes one picture when the shutter button is pressed all the way
down and automatically creates multiple copies, each with a different art filter
applied.

EN 177

Recording pictures with different focus positions(Focus BKT)PA S M B n

The camera varies focus over a series of pictures. You choose the amount and thenumber of shots. The entire series is shot with a single press of the shutter button.
Each time the shutter button is pressed all the way down, the camera takes theselected number of shots, varying focus with each shot. The pictures are taken in silent
mode using the electronic shutter.
 Enabling focus bracketing

4

Menu

Shooting Settings

1
2

MENU n ‘ n3. Bracketing n Focus BKTUse FG to select [Focus BKT] and press the Q
button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Focus BKT
Off

Focus BKT
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

MENU

99
5
0sec

OK

Focus BKT setting screen

Off

Pictures are taken without using this function.

On

Pictures are taken with varied focus positions.

3

The display returns to the Focus BKT setting screen.

 Configuring focus bracketing1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Focus BKT setting screen.

Focus BKT

Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

MENU

178 ENOn

Focus BKT

99
5
0sec

OK

Set number ofshots

Choose the number of shots to be taken with varied focus positions.
[003] – [999]

Set focus
differential

Choose the amount the camera varies focus with each shot.
[1] – [10]#Charge Time

Choose how long the camera waits for the flash to charge between
shots when using a flash unit not specifically designated for use withthe camera.
[0 sec] / [0.1 sec] / [0.2 sec] / [0.5 sec] / [1 sec] / [2 sec] / [4 sec] /[8 sec] / [15 sec] / [30 sec]

 Shooting

1

Press the MENU button to close the Focus BKT setting screen and return toshooting screen.

2

Press the shutter button is all the way down.

4
Shooting Settings• Shooting will continue until the selected number of shots has been taken.
• To interrupt bracketing, press the shutter button all the way down a second time.
• The camera varies the focus distance by the amount selected for Set focus
differential with each shot. Shooting will end if the focus distance reaches infinity.
# Shooting will end if focus or zoom is adjusted after the shutter button has been pressed all
the way down to start bracketing.
# When [Focus BKT] is set to [On], [Flash Mode] in [Silents Settings] (P. 132) becomes[Allow].
# Focus bracketing is not available with Four Thirds system lenses.
# Focus bracketing cannot be combined with other forms of bracketing.
# The flash sync speed is set to 1/100 s. Selecting a value over ISO 16000 for [KISO] sets
the flash sync speed to 1/50 s.

EN 179

Functions that are only available in movie mode
Sound Recording Options (Sound Recording Settings)
PA S M B n

Adjust settings for recording sound during filming. You can also access settings for use
when an external microphone or recorder is connected.
Menu

MENU n n n5. Sound Recording/Connection n Sound
Recording Settings

Recording Volume

Adjust microphone sensitivity. Choose separate values for the builtin stereo microphone and external microphones.
[Built-In R]: Adjust the sensitivity of the camera’s built-in stereo
microphone.
[-10] - [0] - [+10][MIC R]: Adjust the sensitivity of external microphones connected tothe microphone jack.
[-10] - [0] - [+10]RVolume Limiter

The camera puts a limit on the volume of sounds recorded by the
microphone. Use this option to automatically reduce the level ofsounds above a certain volume.
[Off]: Does not put a limit on the volume of sounds recorded by the
microphone.
[On]: Puts a limit on the volume of sounds recorded by the
microphone.

Wind Noise
Reduction

Reduce wind noise during audio recording.
[Off]: Does not reduce wind noise during audio recording.
[Low] / [Standard] / [High]: Set the level of wind noise reduction.

Recording Rate

Choose an audio recording format.
[96kHz/24bit]: High-quality audio.
[48kHz/16bit]: Standard-quality audio.

RPlug-in Power

Adjust settings for use with condenser microphones and otherdevices that draw power from the camera.
[Off]: For devices that do not require power from the camera(general-purpose dynamic microphones).
[On]: For devices that require power from the camera (condenser
microphones).

4
Shooting Settings# Sound is not recorded:with high-speed or slow- or fast-motion movies or when ART 7[/ART 7\ (diorama) isselected for picture mode.
# Audio can only be played on devices that support the option selected for [RecordingRate].
%Operation sounds of the lens and camera may be recorded in a movie. To prevent it fromrecording, reduce the operation sounds by setting [nAF Mode] (P. 72) to [S‑AF], [MF],or [Preb], or by minimizing the button operations of the camera.

180 ENAdjusting the headphone volume
Menu(Headphone Volume)
PA S M B n

MENU n n n5. Sound Recording/Connection n Headphone
VolumeHeadphone Volume Adjust the volume of audio output to the headphones.

Time Codes

(Time Code Settings)
PA S M B n

Menu

MENU n n n5. Sound Recording/Connection n Time Code
Settings

Time Code Mode

Choose a time code recording option. Use time codes where precise
timing is required.
[Drop Frame]: Drop-frame time codes. The time code is adjusted tocompensate for deviations from the recording time.
[Non-DF]: Non-drop-frame time codes. The time code is not
adjusted to compensate for deviations from the recordingtime.

Count Up

Choose how the time count is incremented.
[Rec Run]: The count is incremented only during recording.
[Free Run]: The count is incremented continuously, including whenrecording is not in progress or the camera is off.

Starting Time

Choose the starting time code.
[Reset]: Reset the time code to 00:00:00[Manual Input]: Enter the time code manually.
[Current Time]: Set the time code to the current time, frame 00.

4
Shooting Settings

Adjust time code settings. Time codes are used to synchronize picture and soundduring editing and the like. Choose from the following options.

# When setting [Starting Time] to [Current Time], be sure that the camera shows the correct
time. g “Setting the Camera Clock (X Settings)” (P. 257)
# Time codes are not recorded on high-speed movies (P. 142).

EN 181HDMI Output

(nHDMI Output)
PA S M B n

Adjust settings for output to HDMI devices. Options are available for controlling HDMI
recorders from the camera or adding time codes for use during movie editing.

4
Shooting Settings

Menu

MENU n n n5. Sound Recording/Connection n nHDMI Output

Output Mode

[Monitor]: The HDMI device functions as an external monitor. The
camera outputs both images and indicators to the display. Output
settings can be adjusted using the [HDMI Settings] option (P. 251).
[Record]: The HDMI device functions as an external recorder. Only
images are output to the device. Frame size and sound settings areadjusted using camera controls.
[RAW]: Images are output to the HDMI device in RAW format.
Images are not recorded on the card in the camera. Frame size andsound settings are adjusted using camera controls.
• The camera operates in [Monitor] when the mode dial is set to
P/A/S/M/B or when the menu is displayed, or when playing
back an image.

REC Bit

The camera and the external device start and stop recording at thesame time.
• This option is only available with compatible devices.
[Off]: Does not use this function.
[On]: Controls the external device.

Time Code

Output time codes to the external device. Time code settings can be
adjusted using [Time Code Settings] (P. 181).
[Off]: Does not output time codes to the external device.
[On]: Output time codes to the external device.

 About [RAW]When [RAW] is selected, the raw images, to which shooting settings such as exposurecompensation and white balance have not been applied, can be recorded.
Visit our website for information on HDMI devices compatible with [RAW].

• When [RAW] is selected, “HDMI” will appear on the camera monitor while outputting
signals to an HDMI device.
# The images output from the camera when [RAW] is selected are recorded in ProRes RAW
format.
# When [RAW] is selected and a compatible HDMI device is connected, [nPicture Mode]
will be set to [a2 OM-Log400].
# The following limitations apply when [RAW] is selected.
- [nK]: Only [C4K] and [4K] can be selected. Slow- or fast-motion movies are notavailable.
- [nImage Stabilizer]: Only [M-IS Off] and [M-IS2] can be selected.
- [nDigital Tele-converter] will be set to [Off].
- [nAF Mode] when using a Four Thirds system lens: Only [MF] and [Preb] can beselected.

182 ENDisplaying a + mark in the center of the screen while recording
movies(Center Marker)
PA S M B n
During movie recording, you can display a “+” mark whichenables you to understand where the center of the screenis.

1 [1:02:03]

145 min r O

1 4K 60p L-8

TC00:00:01 DF

C-AF
Off

M-IS2
3

±0 RL

WBAuto80mm

nP

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

+ markMENU n n n6. Shooting Assist n Center Marker

OffThe + mark is not displayed.

On

The + mark is displayed in the center of the screen during movie
recording and when in movie recording ready mode.

200

4Shooting Settings

Menu

ISO
Auto

EN 183

Displaying zebra patterns over high luminance areas while
recording movies
(Zebra Pattern Settings)
PA S M B n
During movie recording, you can display zebra patterns(stripes) over the areas where the luminance levels
exceed the predetermined thresholds. You can specify two
thresholds and zebra patterns with different angles will be
displayed.

C-AF
Off

M-IS2
3

±0 RL

WBAuto1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

 Displaying zebra patterns

Shooting Settings

Menu

1
2

MENU n n n6. Shooting Assist n Zebra Pattern Settings

Use FG to select [Zebra Pattern Settings] andpress the Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Zebra Pattern Settings
Zebra Pattern Settings

Offb Level 1c Level 2

80
Off

MENU

OK

Zebra Pattern Settingssetting screen

Off

Zebra patterns will not be displayed.

On

During movie recording, zebra patterns (stripes) will be
displayed over the areas where the luminance levels exceed thepredetermined thresholds.
A b pattern will be displayed where the luminance level exceeds[b Level 1].
A c pattern will be displayed where the luminance level exceeds[c Level 2].
The c pattern will be displayed where they overlap.

3

184 EN

1 4K 60p L-8

TC00:00:01 DF

nP

4

1 [1:02:03]

145 min r O

The display returns to the Zebra Pattern Settings setting screen.

 Configuring Zebra Pattern Settings

1

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Interval Shooting setting screen.

Zebra Pattern Settings
Zebra Pattern SettingsOnb Level 1c Level 2

80
Off

MENU

OK

A b pattern will be displayed where the luminance level exceeds
the specified value.

c Level 2

A c pattern will be displayed where the luminance level exceeds
the specified value.
Set this to [Off] if you want to display only one type of zebra pattern.

4

Displaying a red frame while recording movies
(Red Frame during RREC)
PA S M B n
You can display a red outer frame on the screen to make iteasier to see whether the camera is recording a movie.

145 min(REC00:01
TC00:00:01 DF

1 [1:42:21]

1 4K 60p L-8

C-AF
Off

Shooting Settingsb Level 1

W T

M-IS1

P8

3

±0 RL

WBAuto40mm

nP

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

Menu

MENU n n n6. Shooting Assist n Red Frame during RREC

Off

The camera will not display a red frame.

On

The camera will display a red frame during movie recording.

ISO
Auto

200

EN 1855 Playback
Information display during playback
Playback image information
Basic display

1 2 3 456
100% s<5

7 KTest89 0 a b
1 hJPEG 48 kHz 0cx

PC PPPuPlayback

t
s
r
q
p

1/ 250ND8
4:3
100-0015

F5.6 ±0.0 ISO800
2022/02/01 16:30:43

o nmlk j i

LF
1 15/30

d
e

h g f

HDR1 ND8Comp x20

Overall displayv
100% s<1 hJPEG 48 kHz 0x

PC PPP

w

I

H
G
F

P

1/ 2503

40mm
5184x3888
2022/02/01 16:30:43

E D
J

5.6
1/8

C B A

TC00:01:02:03 DF
2022/02/01 16:40:01 [00:20]

K
186 EN

0.3
-18

0.0
ISO 800
A4 G4
SRGB

+

±

F

CWB 5400K

ND8
4:3
100-0015

LF
1 15/30z
1.40GB
100-0016

4K 60p L-8
1 16/30Lxy5
Playbacko Composite shooting
Number of combined shots..............P. 54
p Date and time................................P. 257
q Shutter speed............................P. 43, 47
r Aperture value...........................P. 43, 45
s Exposure compensation................P. 106
t ISO sensitivity................................P. 113
u Airplane Mode...............................P. 260
v AF target display..............................P. 77
w Histogram........................................P. 38
x Flash intensity control....................P. 123
y Focus adjustment............................P. 95
z Color space...................................P. 155
A White balance compensation.....P. 151, 153
B Compression rate..............................140
C White balance................................P. 150
D Pixel count.....................................P. 140
E Picture mode.................................P. 145
F Focal length
G Metering mode...............................P. 109
H Shooting mode................................P. 43
I Aspect border................................P. 144
J Time Code.....................................P. 181
K Movie recording time.....................P. 328
L Movie file size................................P. 328* J to L are only displayed when playing
back movies.

1 Battery level.....................................P. 30
2 Active Bluetooth® connection...............................................P. 260, 280
3 Remote control..............................P. 280
4 Wireless LAN connection......P. 261, 267
5 Active connection to computer (Wi‑Fi).......................................................P. 267
6 Rating............................................P. 196
7 Test Picture....................................P. 210
8 GPS data indicator........................P. 266
9 Print order
Number of prints............................P. 198
0 Share order....................................P. 195
a Sound record.................................P. 199
b Protect...........................................P. 193
c Image selected..............................P. 197
d Image quality.........................P. 140, 141e Frame number/total number of framesf Playback slot.................................P. 242
g Aspect ratio....................................P. 144
h File number....................................P. 244
i Live ND filter..................................P. 158
j HDR image....................................P. 162
k Focus stacking...............................P. 160
l Multiple Exposure..........................P. 163
m Fisheye Compensation..................P. 171
n Keystone Compensation...............P. 170

Switching the information display
ButtonINFO button

You can switch the information displayed during playback by pressing
the INFO button.
100% r O

INFO

1 hJPEG 48 kHz 0

x

PPP

1/ 250F5.6 ±0.0 ISO800
2022/02/01 16:30:43

ND8
4:3
100-0015

INFO

LF
1 15/30

INFO button

Basic display
100% r O

100%

INFO
Image onlyP

1 hJPEG 48 kHz 0

x

PPP

1/ 2503

5.6

0.0
ISO 800
A4 G4
SRGB

±

F

CWB 5400K

40mm
5184x3888
2022/02/01 16:30:43

1/8

ND8
4:3
100-0015

0.3
-18

+

LF
1 15/30

Overall display%You can choose whether or not to display each of three display types. g “Choosing theinformation displayed during playback (qInfo Settings)” (P. 206)

EN 187

Viewing photographs and movies
Viewing photographs

1

Press the q button.
• Your most recent photograph or movie will be displayed.
• Select the desired photograph or movie using the front dial or arrow pad.
• Press the shutter button halfway to return to shooting mode.
Displaysthe previous frame

5

Displays
the next frame

100% r O

Front dial
1/ 100Playback

F3.5 ±0.0 ISO200
2022/02/01 16:30:43

4:3
101-0001

L N+RAW
1 19/32

Still image
48 kHz

100% r O

Arrow pad

TC00:02:19:04 DF
2022/02/01 16:40:01 [00:20]

q button

Movie

Rear dial (j)Zoom in (i)/Index (h)Front dial (k)Previous (I)/Next (J)Operation also available during magnified playback.

1.40GB
100-0016

4K 60p L-8
1 16/30

Single-frame playback: Next (I)/previous (H)/playback volume(FG)
Playback zoom: Press S to display a zoom frame. Press it
Arrow pad (FGHI)/ again to zoom in on the frame. You can scroll the image bymulti selector (S/T) pressing FGHI during playback zoom.
Index/calendar playback: Highlight image• The operations performed using FGHI can also be
performed by pressing the multi selector up, down, left, or right.
INFO button

View image info

H button

Select picture (P. 197)

f button

Assign rating stars to picture (P. 196)

0 button

Protect picture (P. 193)

D button

Delete picture (P. 194)

Q button

View menus (in calendar playback, press this button to exit tosingle-frame playback) Switching cards while viewing photographs

188 EN• The q button can be used to switch between cards while playback is in progress. To
choose a card, hold the q button and rotate the front or rear dial. This does not change
option selected for [KCard Slot Settings] > [qSlot] (P. 242).

Watching movies

1

Press the q button.

2

Select a movie and press the Q button.

3

1

Movie

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

Play from Beginning
Play Movie
Movie Edit
Share Order• The playback menu will be displayed.

0
Copy

Select [Play Movie] and press the Q button.

MENU

OK

• Movie playback begins.

Fast-forward and rewind using H/I. Press the Q button
again to pause playback. While playback is paused, use F
to view the first frame and G to view the last frame. Use
HI or the front dial to view previous or next frame. Press
the MENU button to end playback.

1

Press the q button.

2

Display a long movie you want to view and press the Q button.

• The most recent picture will be displayed.

5
Playback

Playing back separated movies
Long movies are automatically recorded over multiple files when the file size exceeds 4 GBor the recording time exceeds 3 hours (P. 59). The files can be played back as a single
movie.

• The following options will be displayed.
[Play from Beginning]: Plays back a split movie all the way through[Play Movie]:
Plays back files separately
Deletes all parts of a split movie[Delete entire n]:[Erase]:Deletes files separately# We recommend using the latest version of OM Workspace to play back movies on acomputer (P. 267). Before launching the software for the first time, connect the camera
to the computer.
# Movies recorded with [nVideo Codec] (P. 144) set to [H.265] cannot be played backusing OM Workspace.

Finding Pictures Quickly (Index and Calendar Playback)• In single-frame playback, rotate the rear dial to G for index playback. Rotate further for
calendar playback.
• Turn the rear dial to a to return to single-frame playback.

h100% r O

1/ 100F3.5 ±0.0 ISO200
2022/02/01 16:30:43

4:3
101-0001

Single-frame
playback

L N+RAW
1 19/32

i

h

100%

2022/02/01 16:30:43

Index display

1 15/25

i

100%

Sun

Mon

Tue

2022 / 1
Wed

Thu

Fri

Sat

26

27

28

29

30

31

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

10

11

12

13

14

15

1

16

17

18

19

20

21

22

23

24

25

26

27

28

29

30

31

1

2

3

1

Calendar display

Q• You can change the number of frames for index display. g “Configuring the index
display (G Settings)” (P. 207)

EN 189

Zooming In 

(Playback Zoom)
S�ora

100% r O

1/ 100F3.5 ±0.0 ISO200
2022/02/01 16:30:43

4:3
101-0001

Playback display

S�
or
a

100%

100%

L N+RAW
1 19/32

10x

1 15/30

Zoom frame

10x

1 15/30

Playback zoom
scroll display
S�
or
a

5
Playback
190 EN

When you press S or a button to which [a] (magnify) has been assigned (P. 208),a zoom frame will be displayed over the part of the picture that was in focus or the part
where the subject was detected. Press the button again to zoom in on the zoom frame.
Press T or FGHI to scroll the image during playback zoom.
• You can change the settings of the zoom frame and image scroll. g “Choosing theinformation displayed during magnified playback (qaInfo Settings)” (P. 206)
• You can change the zoom ratio using the rear dial.
• Playback zoom ends when you press the Q button.
• If [Face & Eye Detection] is enabled, pressing the INFO button while the zoom frame
is displayed moves the zoom frame to the detected face. During close-up playback, thedetected face will be enlarged.

Playback Using Touch Controls
Use touch controls to zoom pictures in and out, scroll pictures, or choose the picture
displayed.
# Do not tap the display with your fingernails or other sharp objects.
# Gloves or monitor covers may interfere with touch screen operation.

Full-frame playback Displaying the previous or next image

100% r O• Slide your finger to the left to view the next image, andright to view the previous image.

+Off

100% r O• Lightly tap the screen to display the slider and P.
Lightly tap the screen twice to magnify the image at theratio specified in [qaDefault Setting] (P. 205).
• Slide the bar up or down to zoom in or out.
• Slide your finger to scroll the display when the picture iszoomed in.
• Tap P to display index playback.
Tap
for calendar playback.

 Movie playback• Tap
to begin playback.
• Tap the lower part of the screen to display the control
bar which allows you to end playback and change theplayback volume.
• Tap the center of the screen to pause playback. Tap again
to resume playback.
• By sliding the bar at the bottom of the screen during
playback pause, you can change the position from which
the movie will be played when playback is resumed.
• Tap I to end playback.

5

0

+

Playback Magnify

h

Off

h

0

P

48 kHz

100% r O

TC00:02:19:04 DF
2022/02/01 16:40:01 [00:20]

1.40GB
100-0016

4K 60p L-8
1 16/30

Index/Calendar playback Displaying the previous or next page
• Slide your finger up to view the next page, and down toview the previous page.
• The touch control menu will be displayed when you tap
during index playback. Taporto switch
the number of images displayed. g “Configuring theindex display (G Settings)” (P. 207)
several times to return to single-frame playback.
• Tap

100%

Off

h

0

-

+

 Viewing images• Tap an image to view it full frame.

EN 191Other functions
Lightly tap the screen during single-frame playback or tap
during index
playback to display the touch menu. You can then perform the desired operation bytapping the icons in the touch menu.

5Playback
192 ENH

Select an image. You can select multiple images and delete them collectively.
g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order Selected, Rating Selected, 0,
Copy Select, Erase Selected)” (P. 197)h

Images you want to share with a smartphone can be set. g “Selecting Pictures
for Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 195)

f

Assign rating stars to an image. g “Rating Pictures (Rating)” (P. 196)

0

Protects an image. g “Protecting Pictures (0)” (P. 193)

Setting playback functions
Rotating Pictures (Rotate)Choose whether to rotate photographs.

1
2
3Play the photograph back and press the Q button.
Select [Rotate] and press the Q button.
Press F to rotate the image counterclockwise, G to rotate it clockwise; theimage rotates each time the button is pressed.
• Press the Q button to save settings and exit.
• Movies and protected images cannot be rotated.

Protecting Pictures (0)Protect images from accidental deletion.

1

Display the image you want to protect and press the
0 button.

0 (protect) icon

5
Playback%The camera can be configured to automatically rotate portrait-orientation pictures during
playback. g “Automatically rotating portrait-orientation pictures for playback (R)”(P. 205)[Rotate] is not available when [Off] is selected for [R].

0100% r O• 0 (protection icon) appears on the image. Press the
0 button again to cancel protection.
• When an unprotected image is displayed, you can holdthe 0 button and rotate the front or rear dial to protect 1/100 3.5 0.0 200
4:3
N+RAW
2022/02/01 16:30:43
101-0001
19/32
all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-protected images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaffected.
• When a protected image is displayed, you can hold the 0 button and rotate the frontor rear dial to remove protection from all images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unprotected images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
• The same operations can be performed during playback zoom or when a picture isselected in the index display.
%You can also protect multiple selected images. g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share
Order Selected, Rating Selected, 0, Copy Select, Erase Selected)” (P. 197).)
F

±

L

ISO

1

# Formatting the card erases all data including protected images.

Copying an image (Copy)

When there are cards with available space in both slots 1 and 2, you can copy an
image to the other card.

1
2
3

Display an image you want to copy and press the Q button.
Highlight [Copy] and press the Q button.
Choose whether to specify the destination folder.
• If you select [Assign], choose a destination folder.
• If a folder has already been specified, the name of the folder is displayed. To select a
different folder, press I.

EN 193

4Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
• The picture will be copied to the other card.

%You can also copy all images on a card to the other card at a time. g [Copy All ](P. 194)

Copying all images on a card

(Copy All)

All images can be copied between the cards inserted in the camera (card slot 1 and 2).

5

Menu

MENU n q n 1. File n Copy All

7

All images are copied from the card in card slot 1 to the card in card slot
2.

8

All images are copied from the card in card slot 2 to the card in card slot
1.

Playback# Copying ends when the destination card is full.
# If the destination card is an SD card or an SDHC card, movie files exceeding 4 GB will not
be copied.

Deleting Pictures 

1

Display an image you want to delete
and press the  button.

2

Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

(Erase)1

Erase• The image will be deleted.

Yes
No

MENU
OK
# You can erase images without theconfirmation step by changing the
D buttonbutton settings. g “Disabling Deletion
Confirmation (Quick Erase)” (P. 195)
%You can choose whether deleting pictures recorded in RAW+JPEG image quality modes
deletes both copies, only the JPEG copy, or only the RAW copy. g “RAW+JPEG
Deletion Options (RAW+JPEG Erase)” (P. 195)

Deleting All Pictures

(Erase All)

Delete all pictures. Protected pictures will not be deleted. You can also exclude thepictures which have been assigned rating stars (P. 196) and delete all other pictures.
Menu

MENU n q n 1. File n Erase All

Erase

Delete all pictures including those with rating stars assigned.

Save

Keep the pictures with rating stars assigned, and delete all otherpictures.

• If memory cards are inserted in both slots, you will be prompted to choose a slot. Choose
a slot and press the Q button.
# If you choose [Save] and execute [Erase All], it may take some time depending on the
speed class of the card and the number of pictures on the card.

194 ENDisabling Deletion Confirmation

(Quick Erase)

If this option is enabled when the  button is pressed to delete photos or movies,
the camera will not display a confirmation dialog but will instead delete the images
immediately.
Menu

MENU n q n 2. Operations n Quick Erase

OffA confirmation dialog is displayed when the  button is pressed.

On

No confirmation dialog will be displayed when the  button is pressed.

RAW+JPEG Deletion Options(RAW+JPEG Erase)

Choose operation performed when [RAW+JPEG] images are deleted one at time.
MENU n q n 2. Operations n RAW+JPEG Erase

JPEG

Only the JPEG copy is deleted.

RAW

Only the RAW copy is deleted.

RAW+JPEG

Both the RAW and JPEG copies are deleted.

5
Playback

Menu%When [RAW+JPEG] pictures are erased using [Erase All] (P. 194) or [Erase Selected](P. 197), both the RAW and the JPEG copies will be deleted.

Selecting Pictures for Sharing (Share Order)

You can select images you want to transfer to a smartphone in advance.

1

Display an image you want to transfer and press the Q button.

2

Select [Share Order] and press the Q button. Then, press F or G.

• The playback menu will be displayed.
• The image is marked for sharing. A h icon and the file type will be displayed.
• Up to 200 pictures on each slot can be marked for sharing at a time.
• To cancel a share order, press F or G.

# A movie file whose file size exceeds 4GB cannot be marked for sharing.
%You can select images you want to transfer in advance and set a share order all at once.
g “Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order Selected, Rating Selected, 0, Copy
Select, Erase Selected)” (P. 197), “Transferring images to a smartphone” (P. 264)
%You can also mark images for sharing by assigning [h] to a button in [qRFunction](P. 205).
Press the [h] button when an unmarked image is displayed during single frame display/index display/playback zoom. When you hold the [h] button and rotate the front orrear dial, all images displayed while the dial is rotated will be marked for sharing. Any
previously-marked images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.
When you hold the [h] button and rotate the front or rear dial while a marked image isdisplayed, all images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unmarked. Any unmarked
images displayed while the dial is rotated will be unaffected.

EN 195

Selecting RAW+JPEG Pictures for Sharing(RAW+JPEG h)

In the case of pictures recorded with [RAW+JPEG] for image quality, you can choose
to share only the JPEG copies, only the RAW copies, or both the JPEG and RAW
copies.

5

Menu

MENU n q n 2. Operations n RAW+JPEG h

JPEGOnly the JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW

Only the RAW copies will be marked for sharing.

RAW+JPEG

Both RAW and JPEG copies will be marked for sharing.

# Changing the option selected for [RAW+JPEG h] does not affect pictures already marked
for sharing.
# Regardless of the option selected, removing share marking removes the marking fromboth copies.

Playback

Rating Pictures(Rating)
Assign one to five rating stars to a picture.
This can be helpful when arranging and searching for pictures using OM Workspace orother utilities.
Buttonf button

If you press the f button when the selected picture has no rating stars assigned,
rating stars will be assigned to the picture. The number of stars will be the same as thepreviously set number.
If you press the f button when the selected picture has rating stars assigned, ratingstars will be cleared.
You can change the number of stars by rotating the front or rear dial while holding thef button.

# Rating stars can only be assigned to still images.
# If the picture was recorded with [RAW+JPEG], the same rating will be applied to both the
RAW and JPEG files.
# Rating stars cannot be assigned to protected images.
# Rating stars cannot be assigned to pictures that were taken with a different camera.

196 EN

Selecting the numbers of stars to be used for rating(Rating Settings)
You can select the numbers of stars that will be displayed as options for rating.
Menu

1

MENU n q n 3. Displays n Rating Settings

Select the number of stars that you want to display as an option when rating
pictures, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

# When there is no item with a check (v) next to it, you cannot assign rating stars to
pictures.
# Changing the settings of [Rating Settings] does not affect the ratings of pictures that havealready been assigned.

You can select multiple images for [Share Order Selected], [Rating Selected], [0],[Copy Select] or [Erase Selected].

1

Display an image you want to select and press the H button.

2

Press the Q button to display the menu and select[Share Order Selected], [Rating Selected], [0],[Copy Select] or [Erase Selected].

5
Playback

Selecting Multiple Pictures (Share Order Selected, Rating Selected,
0, Copy Select, Erase Selected)• The image will be selected and v will be displayed.
To cancel selection, press the button again.
• You can select an image during single-frame playback and index playback.

• When an unmarked image is displayed, you can holdthe H button and rotate the front or rear dial to selectall images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-marked images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaffected.
• When a marked image is displayed, you can hold the
H button and rotate the front or rear dial to deselectall images displayed while the dial is rotated. Any
previously-unmarked images displayed while the dial isrotated will be unaffected.

1

Selected
Share Order Selected
Rating Selected0
Copy SelectErase Selected
MENU

OK

EN 197

Print order (DPOF)

You can save digital “print orders” to the memory card listing the pictures to be printed
and the number of copies of each print. You can then have the pictures printed at a
print shop that supports DPOF. A memory card is required when creating a print order.
 Configuring print orders
Menu

MENU n q n 1. File n <<Press HI to select the frame that you want to set as print reservation,then press FG to set the number of prints. To set print reservation
for several pictures, repeat this step. Press the Q button when all thedesired pictures have been selected, and then select the date and time
format.
[No]: The pictures are printed without the date and time.
[Date]: The pictures are printed with the shooting date.
[Time]: The pictures are printed with the shooting time.

<ALL

Select this when you want to set print orders to all of the pictures. Selectthe date and time format.
[No]: The pictures are printed without the date and time.
[Date]: The pictures are printed with the shooting date.
[Time]: The pictures are printed with the shooting time.

5
Playback# When printing images, the setting cannot be changed between the images.

 Setting print orders
Set

Print orders will be set. Settings will be reflected on the pictures savedon the currently selected card.

CancelPrint orders will not be set.

# The camera cannot be used to modify print orders created with other devices. Creating a
new print order deletes any existing print orders created with other devices.
# Print orders cannot include RAW images or movies.

Resetting all protection/share orders/print orders/ratings(Reset All Images)
You can reset all protection/share orders/print orders/ratings from pictures on a card in
one slot at once.
Menu

MENU n q n 1. File n Reset All Images

Reset Print Orders

Resets all print orders.

Reset Protect

Resets all protection.

Reset share Order

Resets all share orders.

Reset Ratings

Resets all ratings.

• If memory cards are inserted in both slots, you will be prompted to choose a slot. Choose
a slot and press the Q button. Then the confirmation screen will be displayed.
# When there are a lot of rated pictures, [Reset Ratings] will take a long time.

198 EN

Adding Audio to Pictures (R)

You can record audio using the built-in stereo microphone or an optional external
microphone and add it to pictures. The recorded audio provides a simple replacement
for written notes about the pictures. Audio recordings can be up to 30 s long.

1

Display the image to which you want to add audio and press the Q button.

2

Select [R] and press the Q button.

• Audio recording is not available with protected images.
1

JPEG• To exit without adding audio, select [No].

JPEG Edit
Share Order
Rating0R
RotateMENU

Select [R Start] and press the Q button to begin
recording.

4

Press the Q button to end recording.

1

R

No

• Pictures with audio are indicated by H icons andindicators showing the recording rate.
• To delete recorded audio, select [Erase] in Step 3.

R Start
Erase
MENU

5
Playback

3

OK

OK

%Audio is recorded at the rate selected for movies. The rate can be selected using [Sound
Recording Settings] (P. 180).

 Audio Playback
Playback begins automatically when a picture with audio is displayed. To adjust thevolume:1

Display the picture whose audio you want to play
back.

2

Press F or G.
• F button: Raise volume.
• G button: Lower volume.

100%

4

EN 199Retouching Pictures

(Edit)Create retouched copies of pictures. In the case of RAW pictures, you can adjust thesettings in effect at the time the picture was taken, such as white balance and picturemode (art filters included). With JPEG pictures, you can make simple edits such as
cropping and resizing.

RAW Data Edit

Retouch pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG format(P. 200). The following options are available:[Current]: Save the picture at the settings currently selectedwith the camera.
[Custom1]/[Custom2]: Adjust settings while previewing theresults in the display. The settings are saved as [Custom1] or[Custom2].
[ART BKT]: The camera creates multiple JPEG copies of each
image, one for each art filter selected. Select one or more filters
and apply them to one or more images.

JPEG Edit

Retouch JPEG pictures and save the resulting copies in JPEG
format (P. 201).

5
Playback

Retouching RAW Pictures (RAW Data Edit)[RAW Data Edit] can be used to adjust the following settings. These are also thesettings applied when you select [Current].
Image quality
Picture mode
Color/saturation (Color Creator)
Color (Partial Color)
White balance
Color temperature
Exposure compensation
Shadows

Mid-tones
Highlights
Aspect ratio
High ISO noise reduction
Color space
Keystone compensation# [Color Space] is fixed at [sRGB] when an art filter is selected for picture mode.
# RAW pictures cannot be retouched if:
there is not enough space on the memory card or if the picture was created with adifferent camera

1

Display an image you want to edit and press the Q
button.

100% r O

1/ 250

4:3

F5.6 ±0.0 ISO800
2022/02/01 16:30:43

2

Use FG to select [RAW Data Edit] and press the
Q button.

100-0015

1 15/30

RAW/JPEG

1

RAW Data Edit
JPEG Edit• The editing menu will be displayed.

Share Order
Rating
0R
MENU

200 ENL F+RAWOK

3

Highlight items using FG.
• To apply current camera settings, highlight [Current] and press the Q button. Current
settings will be applied.
- Use FG to select [Yes] and press the Q button to record the developed image.
Preview Update• For [Custom1] or [Custom2], highlight the desired option
LF
and press I, then edit settings as follows:3- Retouch options will be displayed. Highlight items
using FG and use HI to choose settings. Repeat
F
until all the desired settings have been chosen. Press
5184x3888
the R button to preview the results.
100%

WB
Auto

Hi

L SF

LF

LN

M1 N

4

To create additional copies from the same original, highlight [Reset] andpress the Q button. To exit without creating more copies, highlight [No] andpress the Q button.

5
Playback- Press the Q button to confirm the settings. The processing will be applied to theimage.
- Use FG to select [Yes] and press the Q button to record the developed image.
• Highlighting [ART BKT] and pressing I displays a list of art filters. Highlight art filtersand press the Q button to select or deselect; selected filters are marked with a v.
Press the MENU button to return to the previous display once all the desired filters
have been selected.
- Press the Q button to record the image after processing with the selected art filter.

• Selecting [Reset] displays editing options. Repeat the process from Step 3.
Retouching JPEG Pictures (JPEG Edit)

The [JPEG Edit] menu contains the following options.
Shadow Adj

Brighten back-lit subjects.

Red-eye Fix

Reduce “red-eye” in pictures taken with a flash.

P

Crop pictures. Size the crop with the front or rear dial andposition it with FGHI.

AspectChange the aspect ratio from the standard 4:3 to [3:2],[16:9], [1:1], or [3:4]. After choosing an aspect ratio, use thearrow pad to position the crop.

Black & WhiteCreate a black-and-white copy of the current picture.

Sepia

Create a sepia copy of the current picture.

Saturation

Adjust the vividness of colors. The results can bepreviewed in the display.

Q

Create a resized copy 1280 × 960, 640 × 480, or 320 × 240
pixels in size.
Pictures with an aspect ratio other than the standard 4:3
are resized to dimensions as close as possible to theselected option.

# Red-eye correction may not work depending on the image.
# Editing of a JPEG image is not possible in the following cases:
When an image is processed on a PC, when there is not enough space in the card
memory, or when an image is recorded on another camera.
# The image cannot be resized (Q) to the larger size than the original size.
# Some images can not be resized.

EN 201

# [P] (trimming) and [Aspect] can only be used to edit images with an aspect ratio of 4:3(standard).

1

Display an image you want to edit and press the Q
button.

100% r O

1/ 250

4:3

F5.6 ±0.0 ISO800
2022/02/01 16:30:43

2

Use FG to select [JPEG Edit] and press the Q
button.

100-0015

L F+RAW
1 15/30JPEG

1JPEG Edit
Share Order• The editing menu will be displayed.

Rating0R
Rotate5

MENU

Playback

3

Highlight items using FG and press the Q button.
• The effect can be previewed in the display. If multiple
options are listed for the selected item, use FG tochoose the desired option.
• When [P] is selected, you can size the crop using thedials and position it using FGHI.

OK
JPEG Edit

1

Shadow Adj
Red-eye Fix
P
AspectBlack & White
Sepia
MENU

OK

• When [Aspect] is selected, you can select an option using FG, and then set theposition using FGHI.

4202 EN

Highlight [Yes] using FG and press the Q button.
• The new copy will be saved at the selected settings and the camera will return to theplayback display.

Combining Pictures (Image Overlay)

Overlay existing RAW photos and to create a new picture. Up to 3 pictures can be
included in the overlay.
The results can be modified by adjusting brightness (gain) separately for each picture.

• The overlay is saved in the format currently selected for image quality. Overlays createdwith [RAW] selected for image quality are saved in RAW format and in JPEG format using
the image quality option selected for [K2] (P. 140).
• Overlays saved in RAW format can in turn be combined with other RAW images to create
overlays containing 4 or more pictures.

1
2
3
4

Display an image you want to edit and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Image Overlay] and press the Q button.
Select the number of images to be overlaid and press the Q button.

• Selected pictures are marked with a v. To deselect,press the Q button again.
• The overlaid image will be displayed if images of thenumber specified in step 3 are selected.

5

Adjust the gain for each image to be overlaid.

6

Press the Q button to display the confirmation
dialog.

1

Image Overlay
RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW

RAW
RAW

MENU

5
Playback

Use FGHI to select the RAW images to beoverlaid.

OK

1

Image Overlay• Use HI to select an image and FG to adjust gain.
• Gain can be adjusted in the range 0.1 – 2.0. Check theresults in the monitor.
x1.0

MENU

x1.0

x1.0

OK

• Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

EN 203

Trimming movies (Movie Trimming)

Cut selected footage from movies. Movies can be trimmed repeatedly to create files
containing only footage you want to preserve.

%This option is available only with movies recorded with the camera.

5
Playback

1
2
3

Display a movie you want to edit and press the Q button.

4

Highlight the desired option and press the Q button.

5

Trim the movie.

6Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [Movie Trimming] and press the Q button.
• You will be prompted to choose how you want to save the edited movie.
[New File]: Save the trimmed movie in a new file.
[Overwrite]: Overwrite the existing movie.
[No]: Exit without trimming the movie.
• If the movie is protected, you cannot select [Overwrite].
• You will be presented with an edit display.
• Use the F button to skip to the first frame and the G button to skip to the last frame.
• Using the front or rear dial or the H button, highlight the first frame of the footage youwant to delete and press the Q button.
• Using the front or rear dial or the I button, highlight the last frame of the footage youwant to delete and press the Q button.
• The edited movie will be saved.
• To select different footage, highlight [No] and press the Q button.
• If you selected [Overwrite], you will be prompted to choose whether to trim additional
footage from the movie. To trim additional footage, highlight [Continue] and press the
Q button.

Creating Movie Stills (In-Movie Image Capture)

Save a still copy of a selected frame.

%This option is available only with [4K] movies recorded with the camera.

1
2
3
4

Display a movie you want to edit and press the Q button.
Select [Movie Edit] and press the Q button.
Use FG to select [In-Movie Image Capture] and press the Q button.
Use HI to select a frame to be saved as a still image and press the Q
button.
• The camera will save a still copy of the selected frame.
• Use the F button to go back and the G button to skip ahead.
How much it goes back or skips ahead differ depending on the length of the movie.

204 ENChanging the role of the R (H) button during playback
(qRFunction)
Choose the role played by the R (H) button during playback.
Menu

qRFunction

MENU n q n 2. Operations n qRFunction[h]: Create or modify a “share order” by marking
pictures for upload to a smartphone.
[H]: Select multiple pictures.

Changing the roles of the front and rear dials during playback
(qDial Function)

5

Choose the roles played by the front and rear dials during playback.
MENU n q n 2. Operations n qDial Function

Ga

Zoom in or out or switch to the index display during playback.

Prev/Next

View the next or previous image during playback.

Choosing the Playback Zoom Ratio Playback

Menu(qaDefault Setting)Choose the starting zoom ratio for playback zoom (close-up playback).
Menu

MENU n q n 2. Operations n qaDefault Setting

Recently

Zoom in to the most recently selected zoom ratio.

Equally Value

Images are displayed at a zoom ratio of 1:1. A
appears in the monitor.

×2, ×3, ×5, ×7,
×10, ×14

Choose the starting zoom ratio.

icon

Automatically rotating portrait-orientation pictures for playback (R)
Choose whether pictures shot in portrait orientation are automatically rotated for
display on the camera.
Menu

MENU n q n 3. Displays n R

On

Pictures are automatically rotated for display during playback.

Off

Pictures are not automatically rotated for display during playback.

EN 205

Choosing the information displayed during playback
(qInfo Settings)
Choose the information displayed during playback. Pressing the INFO button during
playback will switch the display between the selected displays.
Menu

1

5

MENU n q n 3. Displays n qInfo Settings

Select the display type, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

Image Only

Only the image is shown.

Basic

Minimum information is shown.

Overall

Full information including the shooting conditions and histogram is shown(P. 186).

Playback

Choosing the information displayed during magnified playback
(qaInfo Settings)
Choose the display when you magnify the picture by pressing S or a button to which[a] (magnify) has been assigned (P. 208).
S�ora

100% r O

1/ 100F3.5 ±0.0 ISO200
2022/02/01 16:30:43

4:3
101-0001

Playback display

S�
or
a

100%

100%

L N+RAW
1 19/32

10x

1 15/30

Zoom frame

10x

1 15/30

Playback zoom
scroll displayS�ora# If you remove the checks from all options, you will not be able to magnify the image using
S or a button to which [a] (magnify) has been assigned.
Menu

1

206 ENMENU n q n 3. Displays n qaInfo Settings

Select the display type, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

Magnify Frame

Displays the zoom frame.

Magnify Scroll

Allows you to scroll the display during magnified playback.

Configuring the index display(G Settings)

You can change the number of frames to be displayed on the index display andwhether to use the calendar display.
Menu

1

MENU n q n 3. Displays n G Settings

Select the display type, and put a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.

[A4] / [B9] / [C25] /[C100]

Choose the number of frames to be displayed on the index
display.

Calendar

Pictures are displayed on a calendar.

5
Playback
EN 207

6 Customizing the Camera
Functions for Configuring Camera Controls
Changing the roles of buttons

(Button Settings)
PA S M B n

Other roles can be assigned to buttons in place of their existing functions.
The functions assigned using [KButton Function] take effect only during still
photography. The functions assigned using [nButton Function] take effect inn (movie) mode.

6

 Customizable Controls
Icon

Default role

ButtonCustomizing the Camera

n

K

F

F buttonF (exposure compensation)R

R buttonh (High Res Shot)

RREC (movie
recording)K

ISO button

ISO sensitivitye

AF-ON button

AF-ON

u

AEL buttonAELuu buttonu (display selection)d

Arrow pad

Off*1

D

Arrow pad I (right)*2

b (AF/MF toggle)

E

Arrow pad G (down)*2

WB (white balance)Y

One-touch white balance button

u (one-touch whitebalance)Peaking
MagnifyZ

Preview button

Preview

PBH
F

F button on the optional power
battery holder

F (exposure compensation)

PBH
K

ISO button on the optional power
battery holder

ISO sensitivity

PBH
e

AF-ON button on the optional
power battery holder

AF-ON

l

Fn button on the lens

AF Stop*1 No function is assigned to the arrow pad by default.
*2 To use I and G on the arrow pad in their assigned roles, select [Direct Function] for[d] (arrow pad).

208 EN

Super Control Panel

Q n KButton Function / nButton Function

Menu

MENU n G n1. Operations nButton Settings n KButton
Function
MENU n G n1. Operations nButton Settings n nButton
Function

1
2

Highlight the desired control using FG and press the Q button.
Highlight a function using FGHI and press the Q button to assign it to
the selected control.

 Available Roles“K only”: This role is only available in the [KButton Function] menu.
“n only”: This role is only available in the [nButton Function] menu.
%The options available vary from button to button.
Role

Function
The control functions as a movie-record button. Press to start or stop
recording.

Preview (z)(K only)

Stop aperture down to the selected value. This lets you preview
depth of field. Aperture stops down to the currently-selected value
while the button is pressed. Preview options can be selected using[zLock] (P. 224).

u (one-touch
white balance)

Measure a value for one-touch white balance (P. 152).
To measure white balance during still photography, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display, then press
and hold the control and press the shutter button. A list of one-touch
white balance options will be displayed, from which you can choose
the location to which the new value will be saved.
To measure white balance during movie recording, frame a reference
object (a piece of white paper or the like) in the display and press the
button. A list of one-touch white balance options will be displayed, fromwhich you can choose the location to which the new value will be saved.

AF Area Select(N)

You can choose the AF target mode (P. 77) and position (P. 76).
Press the control to view the AF target selection display.
Use the front or rear dial to choose AF target mode and the multiselector or arrow pad to position the AF target.
• You can choose the controls used for this operation. g “AF
Target Selection (NSelect Screen Settings)” (P. 99)

6
Customizing the Camera

RREC (movie
recording)

Recall previously-saved [AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point]“home position” settings. Home position settings are saved using
NHome[KN Set Home] (P. 98).
(NHP) (AF home
• You can save separate home positions for landscape and portrait
position) (K only)orientations. g “Matching AF Target Selection to Camera
Orientation (KOrientation Linked N)” (P. 97)
MF (b) (AF/MF
toggle)Switch between AF and MF. Press once to select MF and again to
return to the previous mode. The focus mode can also be selected byholding the button and rotating a dial.

EN 209Role

Function

RAW K(RAW quality)(K only)

If you press the button when [KK] is set to JPEG, it changes
to RAW+JPEG. When [KK] is set to RAW or RAW+JPEG, thesetting does not change. You can also choose an image quality
setting by holding the button and rotating a dial.

Test Picture(K Test)(K only)

Take a test shot. You can view the effects of selected settings in an
actual photograph. If you keep the control pressed while pressing the
shutter button, you will be able to view the results but the picture will
not be saved to the memory card.

Custom Mode
C1–C4
(K only)

Recall settings for the selected custom mode. Press the control
once to recall saved settings, a second time to restore the settings
previously in effect (P. 58). The control continues to perform thisfunction when a custom mode is selected with the mode dial.

Exposure Comp.
(F)

Adjust exposure settings. Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. The adjustments available vary with theshooting mode:[P]: Use the front or rear dial or HI for exposure compensation.
Use the FG buttons for program shift.
[A]: Use the front or rear dial or HI for exposure compensation.
Use the FG buttons for aperture.
[S]: Use the front or rear dial or HI for exposure compensation.
Use the FG buttons for shutter speed.
[M] *: Use the rear dial or FG for shutter speed. Use the front dial or
the HI buttons for aperture.
[B]: Use rear dial or FG to switch between bulb/time and live
composite photography. Use the front dial or HI buttons to choose
the aperture.
* For information on adjusting exposure settings when [Auto]is selected for [ISO] (P. 113), see “Adjusting Exposure
Compensation” (P. 107).

Digital Teleconverter(K: a2x / n:a1.4x)

Turn the digital teleconverter on or off (P. 166). Press once to zoom
in and again to zoom out. You can turn it on/off even when you arerecording a movie. During movie recording, a frame indicating thearea that will be magnified by the digital teleconverter is displayed.

Keystone Comp.
(D)(K only)

Press the control to view keystone compensation settings (P. 170).
After adjusting settings, press the control again to exit. To cancel
keystone compensation, press and hold the control.

6
Customizing the Camera

FisheyeEnable fisheye correction (P. 171). Press once to enable fisheye
Compensation (Z) correction. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the(K only)
front or rear dial to choose from [Angle] options 1, 2, and 3.
Magnify (a)210 EN

Press the control once to display the zoom frame and again to zoomin (P. 80). Press the control a third time to exit zoom; to hide thezoom frame, press and hold the control. Use the multi selector, touch
controls, or FGHI to position the zoom frame.

Role

FunctionISO

Adjust [ISO] settings (P. 113). Hold the control and rotate the frontor rear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI to adjust
settings.

WB (whitebalance)

Adjust [WB] settings (P. 150). Hold the control and rotate the front orrear dial. Alternatively, you can press the button to activate settings
and then rotate the dials. Use the front or rear dial or HI to adjust
settings.

Multi Function(Multi Fn)

Configure the control for use as a multi-function button (P. 215).
Hold the control and rotate the front or rear dial to choose thefunction performed. The selected function can be performed bypressing the control.

Peaking (Peak)

Toggle focus peaking on or off (P. 103). Press the control once toturn peaking on and again to turn it off. When peaking is on, peaking
options (color, amount) can be displayed by pressing the INFO
button.

VLevel Disp()

Display the digital level gauge. The exposure bar display in the
viewfinder functions as a level gauge. Press the control again to exit.
This option takes effect when [VStyle 1] or [VStyle 2] is selected
for [EVF Style] (P. 228).

Switch between viewfinder photography and live view. If [Off] isu View
selected for [EVF Auto Switch] (P. 250), the display will switch
Selection (u)between the viewfinder and the monitor. Press and hold the control to(display selection)
display [EVF Auto Switch] options.
LV Mode (S-OVF)(K only)

Switches [LV Mode] (P. 225)between [Standard] and [S-OVF].

AF Limiter(AFLimit)(K only)

Enable the AF limiter (P. 92). Press once to enable [AF Limiter].
Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear
dial to choose from three stored settings.

Preset MF(Preb)

Set [AF Mode] to [Preb] (P. 72). Press the control once toenable preset MF and again to restore the previous focus mode.
Alternatively, you can choose the [AF Mode] by holding the control
and rotating a dial.

Lens Info Settings(sLens)Recall previously-saved lens data (P. 246). Recall saved data for thecurrent lens after changing lenses or the like.

IS Mode (IS)Toggle [Image Stabilizer] on or off (P. 136). Press once to select[Off] and again to turn image stabilization on. Hold the control androtate the front or rear dial to access [Image Stabilizer] options.

Flicker Scan
(Flicker Scan)

Adjust settings for [Flicker Scan] (P. 108). Press the control to select[On]. You can adjust shutter speed for best results while viewing
banding in the display. Press the control again to display shooting
information and access other settings. Press and hold the control toselect [Off] for [Flicker Scan].

6
Customizing the Camera

HDR(K only)

Enable HDR (P. 162). Press once to enable HDR. Press again todisable. Hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial to adjust HDR
settings, including HDR bracketing.

EN 211

6
Customizing the Camera
212 EN

Role

FunctionLive ND Shooting(ND)(K only)

Enable the live ND filter (P. 158). Press once to enable [Live ND
Shooting]. Press again to disable. Hold the button and rotate the frontor rear dial to adjust [Live ND Shooting] settings.

OffThe control is not used.

Flash Mode (#)(K only)

Adjust flash settings (P. 120). Press once to display flash options
and again select the highlighted option and exit. Highlight settings
using the front or rear dial or HI.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

j/Y (sequential
shooting/selftimer)(K only)

Choose a drive (sequential shooting/self-timer) mode (P. 126).
Press the button to display drive mode options and then choose amode using the front or rear dial or the HI buttons.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

GLock (touch
control lock)

Lock touch controls. Press and hold the button once to lock touch
controls and again to unlock.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

Electronic Zoom
(X)

Zoom power zoom lenses in or out. After pressing the control, use
the arrow pad to zoom in or out. Use For I to zoom in and G or H
to zoom out.
• This function can be assigned to the I and G buttons only. You
must first set [d] to [Direct Function].

AF Stop

Suspend autofocus. Focus locks and autofocus is suspended while
the control is pressed. Applies only to lens l buttons.

IFace Selection(])

Select the face used for focus when the camera detects multiple
portrait subjects. Pressing the button selects the face closest to
the current AF target. If oAll (all targets) is selected for AF-target
mode, pressing the button will instead select the face closest to thecenter of the frame. To focus on a different face, hold the button
and rotate the front or rear dial. This option can also be used during
movie recording.

Face & Eye
Detection (I)Pressing the button when an option other than [Off] is selected for[Face & Eye Detection] (P. 88) selects [Off]; to restore the previous
setting, press the button again. To change the option displayed in the[Face & Eye Detection] menu, hold the button and rotate the front orrear dial.

Focus Ring Lock
(B)

Press the control once to disable, and again to enable, the lens focus
ring. This option is available when [S‑AFb], [C‑AFb], [b],[C‑AF+TRb], [Preb], or [FAFb] is selected for [AF Mode].
The b portion of the AF mode indicator is displayed gray while thering is disabled.
In the case of lenses equipped with an MF (manual focus) clutch,pressing the button has no effect when the focus ring is in the MF
position (closer to the camera body).
Focus ring lock ends when you perform an operation such as turning
the camera off or attaching a different lens.

Role

Function
Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [KNight Vision](P. 225) selects [On]. If [On] is selected, pressing the button selects[Off].

AEL (AE lock)Press the button to lock exposure. Press again to release it.

AF-ON

The camera focuses with autofocus while the button is pressed(P. 83). The camera stops focusing when the button is released.

AE BKT(K only)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [AE BKT] selects
the setting selected under [AE BKT]. If an option other than [Off] isselected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To choose an option for[AE BKT], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

WB BKT(K only)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [WB BKT] selects
the setting selected under [WB BKT]. If an option other than [Off] isselected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To choose an option for[WB BKT], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

FL BKT(K only)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [FL BKT] selects
the setting selected under [FL BKT]. If an option other than [Off] isselected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To choose an option for[FL BKT], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

ISO BKT(K only)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [ISO BKT] selects
the setting selected under [ISO BKT]. If an option other than [Off] isselected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To choose an option for[ISO BKT], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

ART BKT(K only)

Toggle [ART BKT] on or off. To choose an option for [ART BKT],
press and hold the button.

Focus BKT(K only)

Toggle [Focus BKT] on or off. To choose an option for [Focus BKT],
press and hold the button.

Focus Stacking(W)(K only)

Toggle [Focus Stacking] on or off. To choose an option for [Focus
Stacking], press and hold the button.

High Res Shot(h)
(K only)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [High Res Shot] selects
the setting selected under [High Res Shot]. If an option other than[Off] is selected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To choose an option
for [High Res Shot], hold the button and rotate the front or rear dial.

Subject Detection(^)

Pressing the button when [Off] is selected for [Subject Detection]
selects the setting selected under [Subject Detection]. If an option
other than [Off] is selected, pressing the button selects [Off]. To
choose an option for [Subject Detection], hold the button and rotate
the front or rear dial.

Direct Function(n)Assign roles to the buttons on the arrow pad (FGHI). The
following roles can be assigned:
H button: N (AF-target selection)
F button: F (exposure compensation)
I button: b (AF/MF toggle)
G button: WB (white balance)• The I and G buttons can be assigned other functions.

6
Customizing the Camera

Night Vision(Night LV)(K only)

When recording a movie with the white balance set to [AUTO],
WLock (LockW)pressing the button locks the white balance. Pressing it again(n only)
releases the lock.

EN 213Role

6
Customizing the Camera
214 EN

FunctionnView Assist(BT.709)(n only)

Toggle [nView Assist] on or off.
You can change the setting even when you are recording a movie.

Zebra Pattern
Settings (bZebra)(n only)

Toggle [Zebra Pattern Settings] on or off.
You can change the setting even when you are recording a movie.

 Using multi function options (Multi Function)
Assign multiple roles to a single button.

%To use the multi function feature, you must first assign [Multi Function] to a camera control
using [Button Settings] (P. 208).
Choosing a function

1

Hold the button to which [Multi Function] is assigned
and rotate the front or rear dial.
• Rotate the dial until the desired feature is highlighted.
Release the button to select the highlighted feature.

2

Press the button to which [Multi Function] is
assigned.

3

Adjust settings.

Highlight&Shadow Control

ISO WB

S-OVF

The multi-function button can be used to:Color Creator
KISO
nISO
KWB
nWB

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust saturation.
Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

Magnify

The zoom frame will be displayed.

Image Aspect

Choose a setting using the front or rear dial.

KLV Mode

Press the button to switch between [Standard] and [S-OVF].

Peaking

Press the button to turn the feature on or off.

6
Customizing the Camera

Highlight&Shadow Adjust brightness using the front or rear dial. Press the INFO button
Control
to choose the tone range (highlights, shadows, or mid-tones).

• You can choose the options displayed. g [Multi Function Settings] (P. 236)
%During shooting, [Highlight&Shadow Control] can also be set by pressing the F(Exposure compensation) and then pressing the INFO button.

EN 215 Recording a movie by pressing the shutter button (nShutter
Function)

PA S M B n

Configure the shutter button as a R (movie record) button. An optional remote control
can then be used to start or stop recording when the mode dial is rotated to n(movie).
Menu

MENU n G n1. Operations n nShutter Function

Off

The shutter button cannot be used to record movies.

RREC

Press the shutter button all the way down to start or stop movie
recording.

# The R button cannot be used for movie recording when [R REC] is selected.

6
Customizing the Camera

Assigning Roles to the Front and Rear Dials
(KDial Function / nDial Function)
PA S M B n
Choose the roles performed by the front and rear dials.
Menu

1

MENU n G n1. Operations n Dial Settings n KDial Function
MENU n G n1. Operations n Dial Settings n nDial Function

Choose an item to set, and press the Q button.
• Choose a dial using the HI buttons and use the FG buttons to choose a role.
• Press the INFO button to move between lever positions.
• Press the Q button when settings are complete.

# When [KFn Lever Function] / [nFn Lever Function] is set to a setting other than[mode1], the functions assigned to lever 1 is enabled even if the lever is in position 2.

The functions that can be assigned in [KDial Function] are listed below.
Role

Function

B

A

S

M

Ps

Program shift (P. 44).

a

—

—

—

—

Shutter

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—

a

a

a*

FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—

a

—

a

a

F

Adjust exposure compensation.

a

a

a

a

a

x

Adjust flash compensation.

a

a

a

a

a

ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.

a

a

a

a

a

WB

Adjust white balance.

a

a

a

a

a

CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when
CWB (custom) is selected for whitebalance.

a

a

a

a

a

Off

None.

a

a

a

a

a

* Switch between bulb, time, and live composite.

216 EN

Shooting mode
PThe functions that can be assigned in [nDial Function] are listed below.
n mode (movie
exposure mode)
Function

P

A

S

M

ShutterRole

Choose the shutter speed.

—

—

a

a

FNo.

Adjust aperture.

—

a

—

a

F

Adjust exposure compensation.

a

a

a

a

ISO

Adjust ISO sensitivity.

—

—

—

a

WB

Adjust white balance.

a

a

a

a

CWB KelvinChoose a color temperature when CWB(custom) is selected for white balance.

a

a

a

a

RVOL

Adjust the recording level.

a

a

a

a

PVOL

Adjust headphone volume.

a

a

a

a

Off

None.

a

a

a

a

6
Customizing the Camera
EN 217

Changing the Dial Direction

(Dial Direction)

PA S M B n

Choose the direction in which the dials are rotated to set exposure.

6
Customizing the Camera
218 EN

Menu

MENU n G n1. Operations n Dial Settings n Dial Direction

Exposure

Choose the direction the dials are rotated to set aperture and shutter
speed in A, S, M, and B modes.

Ps

Choose the direction the dials are rotated for program shift (modeP).

Changing the Functions of the Multi Selector
(Multi Selector Settings)
PA S M B n
Choose the direction in which the dials are rotated to set exposure.
Menu

MENU n G n1. Operations n Multi Selector Settings

SCenter Button

Choose the operation performed by pressing the multi selector. The
multi selector can then function as a button.
[Off]: No role assigned. Pressing the multi selector has no effect.
[N]: P ress the multi selector to adjust settings for AF target
selection or AF target mode. The arrow pad or front andrear dials can be used according to the setting selected for[NSelect Screen Settings] (P. 99).
[NHP]: The multi selector performs the function selected for[KButton Function] > [NHome] (P. 98).
%This option applies in still photography modes only.

TDirection Key

Choose the operation performed by tilting the multi selector. The
multi selector is normally used to position the AF target, but thisfunction can be disabled to prevent unintended operation.
[Off]: No function is assigned.
[N]: The multi selector can be used to position the AF-target.

Customizing the Fn LeverMenu(Fn Lever Settings)
PA S M B n

MENU n G n1. Operations n Fn Lever Settings

 How to configure the Fn levernFn LeverFunction

Choose the role played by the Fn lever in n (movie) mode.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and reardials or to recall focus settings.
The role assigned to the Fn lever using this item takes effect in n(movie) mode.
In P, A, S, M, and B (still photography) modes, the Fn lever
performs the role selected in [KFn Lever Function].

Fn Lever/PowerLever

The Fn lever can be used as an on/off lever. Use this feature if you
would like to use your right hand to turn the camera on or off during
shooting.

6
Customizing the Camera

KFn LeverFunction

Choose the role played by the Fn lever in still photography modes.
The Fn lever can be used to choose the roles of the front and reardials or to recall focus settings. It can also be used to select movie
mode.
This setting takes effect in modes P, A, S, M, and B (still
photography modes). The option selected using [nFn Lever
Function] takes effect in n (movie) mode.

EN 219 Configuring [KFn Lever Function]1

Select [KFn Lever Function] on the [Fn Lever
Settings] screen and press the Q button.

KFn Lever Function
Off

mode1

mode2

mode3

Switches AF mode/AF target mode/
AF target point according
to Fn lever position.
Target can be selected.
H INFO

MENU

OK

KFn Lever Function screen

6
Customizing the Camera

Off

Changing the position of the Fn lever has no effect.

mode1

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions
for Positions 1 and 2 conform to the setting selected for [KDial
Function] (P. 216).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AFMode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].
Press the INFO button and put a check (v) next to a setting thatyou want to recall with the Fn lever.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.
[AF Mode]: S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: MSingle, oAll, etc.
[AF Target Point]: The position of AF target.

mode3

Toggle the shooting mode. You can switch to n (movie) mode
without rotating the mode dial.

# When [mode3] is selected, [nFn Lever Function] cannot be used (P. 221).
# This function cannot be used in the following cases.
- [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 222) is set to [ON/OFF] or [OFF/ON].

 Configuring [nFn Lever Function]1

Select [nFn Lever Function] on the [Fn Lever
Settings] screen and press the Q button.

nFn Lever Function
Off

mode1

mode2

Switches AF mode/AF target mode/
AF target point according
to Fn lever position.
Target can be selected.
MENU

H INFOOK

nFn Lever Function screen

220 EN

Off

Changing the position of the Fn lever has no effect.

mode1

Switch the functions of the front and rear dials. The functions
for Positions 1 and 2 conform to the setting selected for [nDial
Function] (P. 216).

mode2

Switch between two groups of settings previously selected for [AFMode], [AF Target Mode], and [AF Target Point].
Press the INFO button and put a check (v) next to a setting thatyou want to recall with the Fn lever.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.
[AF Mode]: S-AF, C-AF, etc.
[AF Target Mode]: ySmall, oAll, etc.
[AF Target Point]: AF-target position

# This function cannot be used in the following cases.
- [mode3] is selected for [KFn Lever Function] (P. 220).
- [Fn Lever/Power Lever] (P. 222) is set to [ON/OFF] or [OFF/ON].

 Using [mode2] of [KFn Lever Function] / [ nFn Lever Function]
When [mode2] is selected for [KFn Lever Function] / [nFn Lever Function], thecamera will store separate focus settings for Positions 1 and 2.

1

Rotate the Fn lever to Position 1 and set the AF
settings.

AF Target Mode
AF Target Point

MENU

2

Repeat the process for Position 2.

3

Rotate the lever to the desired position to recall the
saved settings.

6

mode2
AF ModeOK

Customizing the Camera• The camera can store the settings that have beenchecked (v) in:[AF Mode]:
S-AF, C-AF, etc.
MSmall, oAll, etc.
[AF Target Mode]:[AF Target Point]:
AF-target position

EN 221

 Configuring [Fn Lever/Power Lever]1

Select [Fn Lever/Power Lever] on the [Fn Lever
Settings] screen and press the Q button.

Fn Lever/Power Lever
Fn

ON/OFF

OFF/ONUse Fn Lever for designatedfunctions. Use power switch
to control power.
MENU

OK

Fn

The lever functions according to the options selected for [KFn
Lever Function] and [nFn Lever Function] (P. 221).

ON/OFFThe lever functions as an on/off lever. Position 1 is on and Position
2 is off.

OFF/ONThe lever functions as an on/off lever. Position 1 is off and Position
2 is on.

6# The ON/OFF lever cannot be used to turn the camera off when [ON/OFF] or [OFF/ON] is
selected. [KFn Lever Function] and [nFn Lever Function] are similarly unavailable.

Customizing the Camera

Power Zoom Lenses

(Electronic Zoom Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose the speed at which power zoom lenses zoom in or out when the zoom ring is
rotated. Adjust zoom speed if it is so quick that you find it hard to frame your subject.
Menu

MENU n G n1. Operations n Electronic Zoom Settings

KElec. Zoom
Speed

Sets the zoom speed for K (still photography) mode.
[Low]: Slow zoom. A good choice when precise adjustments areneeded.
[Normal]: Normal zoom speed.
[High]: Fast zoom.

nElec. Zoom
Speed

Sets the zoom speed for n (movie) mode.
[Low]: Slow zoom. A good choice when precise adjustments areneeded.
[Normal]: Normal zoom speed.
[High]: Fast zoom.

# Although the same options are displayed for K (still photography) mode and n (movie)
mode, the actual zoom speeds are different.

222 EN

Locking the v Button(vLock)
PA S M B n
You can disable the v button.
v button

MENU n G n1. Operations n vLockOffThe v button can be used.

On

The v button cannot be used.

Choosing What Happens When the Shutter Button Is Pressed
During Live View Zoom
(LV Close Up Mode)
PA S M B n
Choose display options for use with focus zoom.
Menu

MENU n G n2. Operations n LV Close Up Mode

• For information on live view zoom options, see the explanation on P. 80.

LV Close Up Mode

6
Customizing the Camera

Menu

Choose what happens if the shutter button is pressed halfway during
focus zoom.
[mode1]: Focus zoom ends. You can check the composition after
focusing using focus zoom.
[mode2]: Focus zoom remains in effect while the camera focuses.
Compose the shot before focusing, then zoom in for
precise focus and take a picture without ever ending zoom.

EN 223

Choosing the Behavior of the Control Used for Depth-of-Field
Preview(zLock)
PA S M B n
Choose the behavior of the control used for depth-of-field preview.
Menu

MENU n G n2. Operations n zLock

zLock

Choose the behavior of the control used for depth-of-field preview.
[Off]: Aperture stops down while the control is pressed.
[On]: Aperture stops down when the control is pressed; to end depthof-field preview, press the control a second time.

Button Hold Options

6(Press-and-hold Time)
PA S M B n

Customizing the Camera

Choose how long buttons must be pressed to perform resets and other similarfunctions for various features. For ease of use, button hold times can be set separately
for different features.
Menu

MENU n G n2. Operations n Press-and-hold Time

End LVa
Reset LVa Frame
Reset F
Reset xReset xReset sReset 7
Reset cReset N
Call EVF Auto Switch
Reset D
End D
Switch G Lock
End Flicker Scan
Call WB BKT Setting
Call ART BKT Setting
Call Focus BKT Setting
Call W Setting

224 ENSet the button hold time for each function.
[0.5sec] - [3.0sec]

Functions for adjusting the live view display
Changing the look of the display

(KLV Mode)
PA S M B n

Increase dynamic range of the viewfinder display, increasing the amount of detailvisible in highlights and shadows in a manner similar to optical viewfinders. This setting
takes effect on the viewfinder, the monitor and HDMI output.
Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n KLV Mode

Standard

The effects of exposure, color and other shooting settings are visible
in the viewfinder display.

S-OVF

The effects of exposure, white balance, art filters and other shooting
settings are not visible in the display.

• “S-OVF” appears on the display when [S-OVF] is selected.

(KNight Vision)
PA S M B n

Increase brightness of the display to make it easier to see in dark places.
Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n KNight Vision

Off

Normal display.

On

Brightness is adjusted for ease of viewing. The brightness andcolors of the preview differs from the final photograph.

• “Night LV” appears on the display when [On] is selected.
# [Frame Rate] will be set to [Normal] when [On] is selected.

Viewfinder Display Rate

Customizing the Camera

Making the display easier to see in dark places

6(Frame Rate)
PA S M B n

Choose the viewfinder display refresh rate.
Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n Frame Rate

NormalThe standard frame rate. This is the preferred choice in mostsituations.

High

Smooth the motion of fast-moving subjects. Fast-moving subjects
are easier to track. This setting reverts to [Normal] automatically if
the internal temperature of the camera rises during shooting.

EN 225

Art Filter Preview(Art LV Mode)

PA S M B n

You can preview the effects of art filters in the monitor or viewfinder during shooting.
Some filters may cause subject movement to appear jerky, but this can be minimized
so as to not influence photography.
Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n Art LV Mode

mode1

The effects of art filters can be previewed during shooting.

mode2

While the shutter button is pressed halfway, the camera gives
priority to maintaining the display rate and reduces the effects of art
filters on the preview display. Motion is smooth.

Reducing Flicker in Live View

6
Customizing the Camera
226 EN(Anti-Flicker LV)
PA S M B n

Reduce flicker under fluorescent lighting and the like. Choose this option if flicker
makes the display difficult to view.
Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n Anti-Flicker LVAuto

The camera detects and reduces flicker.

50Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered byalternating current with a frequency of 50 Hz.

60Hz

Reduce flicker under workplace or outdoor lighting powered byalternating current with a frequency of 60 Hz.

Off

Flicker reduction off.
• This option is not available when [On] is selected for [Anti-Flicker
Shooting] (P. 135).

Selfie Assist (Selfie Assist)

PA S M B n

Choose the display used when the monitor is reversed for
self-portraits.

Menu

MENU n H n3. Live View n Selfie Assist

Off

The display does not change when the monitor is reversed.

On

When reversed for self-portraits, the monitor shows a mirror image of the view
through the lens.

6
Customizing the Camera
EN 227

Functions for Configuring Information Display
Selecting the display style of the viewfinder 
Menu

VStyle 1 /VStyle 2(EVF Style)

PA S M B n

MENU n G n 4. Information n EVF Style

Similar to film camera viewfinder displays.

100 %

6
Customizing the Camera
228 EN100%

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

200

WB

1 LF

1 [1:02:03]

Auto

1

1023

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

qStyle 3

The same as the monitor display.
3P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

 Viewfinder display when shooting using the viewfinder (Style 1/Style 2)

3
4
12
s<

100 %

6
7

#

5
PC

P

89
C1

AEL

1/ 250m rs
k 100%
l USB

F
Set

s<

100 %

PC

AEL

P C1 1/ 250 F5.6-

BKT S-OVF
0

+

0.0

BKT

ISO
Auto

200

BKT
WB Auto1 [1:02:03]
1

1023

Call

n
o
p
q

c

BKT S-OVF
0

+

t

0.0

BKT

ISO
Auto

200

wx y
-

0

+

u
v

[1:02:03](REC 00:59

h
i
j

fg
WB

z

BKT

Auto
A

1 [1:02:03]
1

1023

1023 B[1:02:03] C
FlickerScan

D

PC E
HDMI F
KTest Gk Battery level.....................................P. 30
l Powered via USB PD....................P. 287
m Shooting mode................................P. 43
n AF confirmation mark......................P. 40
o ♥jSH2 Aperture warning............P. 126
p SET and CALL functions...............P. 293
q Dust reduction...............................P. 305
r Custom mode..................................P. 56
s Shutter speed............................P. 43, 47t Aperture value...........................P. 43, 45
u Exposure compensation................P. 106v Level gauge *1................................P. 233
w Exposure compensation value......P. 106
x Highlight & shadow control............P. 215
y ISO sensitivity................................P. 113
z White balance................................P. 150
A K Save settings...........................P. 243
B Number of storable still pictures....P. 327
C Available recording time................P. 327
D Flicker scan...................................P. 108
E Active connection to computer (USB) *2.......................................................P. 284
F nHDMI Output.............................P. 182
G Test Picture....................................P. 210

6
Customizing the Camera

1 Active Bluetooth® connection...............................................P. 260, 280
2 Remote control..............................P. 280
3 Wireless LAN connection .....P. 261, 267
4 Airplane Mode...............................P. 260
5 Active connection to computer (Wi‑Fi).......................................................P. 267
6 Flash..............................................P. 118(blinks: charging in progress, lights up:
charging completed)
7 Pro Capture active.........................P. 133
8 AE lock..........................................P. 109
9 Preview..........................................P. 224
0 AE BKT..........................................P. 174
a KLV Mode...................................P. 225
b KNight Vision..............................P. 225
c ISO BKT.........................................P. 176
d WB BKT.........................................P. 175
e WLock.........................................P. 153
f Card write indicator....................P. 21, 25
g n Save slot..................................P. 243
h Maximum number of continuous shots.......................................................P. 128
i Available recording time................P. 327
j Recording time (displayed during
recording)........................................P. 59

F 5.6

0
-

[99]

d BKT
e Lockab

S-OVF
Night LV

*1 Displayed when the shutter button is pressed halfway. g [Va Level Gauge] (P. 233)
*2 Displayed only when connected to OM Capture and the computer is currently selected inthe [0RAW/Control] menu as the sole destination for new pictures (P. 276).

EN 229

Shooting Indicators

(KInfo Settings / nInfo Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose the indicators listed in the live view display.
You can display or hide shooting setting indicators. Use this option to choose the icons
that appear in the display.
You can configure three sets of display settings for still photography mode and two sets
for movie recording mode.
Menu

MENU n G n 4. Information n KInfo Settings
MENU n G n 4. Information n nInfo Settings

 Configuring KInfo Settings

1

6

Select an indicator you wish to display when the
INFO button is pressed, and put a check (v) next
to it.

Customizing the Camera• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.

KInfo Settings
Image Only
Information 1
Information 2
Information 3

MENU

OK

KInfo Settings setting
screenImage Only
Information 1
Information 2
Information 3

No information will be displayed.
Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v)next to it.
To remove the check, press the Q button again.
To set the details of an item to be displayed, press I. The following
items can be set.
[&] / [Highlight&Shadow] / [Level Gauge] / [All Battery
Information] / [Silent GOperation]%The set that is currently in use cannot be disabled, but the items to be displayed can be
configured.

230 EN Configuring nInfo Settings

1

Select an indicator you wish to display when the
INFO button is pressed, and put a check (v) next
to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.

nInfo Settings
Image Only
Information 1
Information 2

MENU

OK

nInfo Settings setting
screenImage Only
Information 1

Information 2

No information will be displayed.

%The set that is currently in use cannot be disabled, but the items to be displayed can be
configured.

 Choosing a Display
Press the INFO button during shooting to cycle through the selected displays.
g “Switching the information display” (P. 38)

Configuring the display for when the shutter button is pressedhalfway
(Info by half-pressing a)
PA S M B n

6
Customizing the Camera

Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v)next to it. To remove the check, press the Q button again.
To set the details of an item to be displayed, press I. The following
items can be set.
[&] / [Level Gauge] / [All Battery Information] / [Image Stabilizer] /[Picture Mode ] / [WB] / [AF Mode] / [Face & Eye Detection] / [Sound
Recording Level Meter] / [Headphone Volume] / [Time Code] / [Silent
GOperation] / [Grid]

You can configure the display for when the shutter button is pressed halfway.
Menu

MENU n G n 4. Information n Info by half-pressing a

OffNo information is displayed while the shutter button is pressed halfway.

On1

Only the following exposure-related items are displayed while the shutter
button is pressed halfway.
• Shutter speed• Aperture value• Exposure compensation value• Difference from optimal exposure• ISO sensitivity

On2

The display does not change even when the shutter button is pressedhalfway.

EN 231

Viewfinder Info Display Options(VKInfo Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose the information that can be viewed by pressing the INFO button in the
viewfinder display. Just as you can with the monitor, you can display a histogram orlevel gauge in the viewfinder by pressing the INFO button. This item is used to choose
the types of display available. It takes effect when the camera is in still photographymode and [VStyle 1] or [VStyle 2] is selected for [EVF Style] (P. 228). The option
selected for [nInfo Settings] takes effect in n mode (P. 231).
Menu

1

6

MENU n G n 4. Information n VKInfo Settings

Select an indicator you wish to display when the
INFO button is pressed, and put a check (v) next
to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to
put a check (v) next to it. To remove the check, press
the Q button again.

VKInfo Settings
Image Only
Information 1
Information 2
Information 3

MENU

OK

Customizing the Camera

VKInfo Settings setting
screenImage Only

No information will be displayed.

Information 1

Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v)next to it. To remove the check, press the Q button again.
To set the details of an item to be displayed, press I. The following
items can be set.
[&]: A histogram superimposed on the display in the viewfinder.
[Highlight&Shadow]: Tints applied to over- and under-exposed areas.
[Level Gauge]: The level gauge.
[All Battery Information]: Information on all batteries.

Information 2

Information 3%The set that is currently in use cannot be disabled, but the items to be displayed can be
configured.

232 ENDisplaying the Level Gauge when the shutter button is pressedhalfway(Va Level Gauge)
PA S M B n
Choose whether the level gauge can be displayed in the
viewfinder by pressing the shutter button halfway when
[VStyle 1] or [VStyle 2] is selected for [EVF Style](P. 228).

100 %

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

WB

Auto

[99]

1023

Display when shutter
button is pressed halfway
MENU n G n 4. Information n Va Level Gauge

On

The level gauge is displayed in the viewfinder while the shutter button ispressed halfway. The level gauge appears in place of the exposure bar.

OffThe level gauge is not displayed.

6
Customizing the Camera

Menu

EN 233

Framing Guide Options
Menu

MENU n G n 5. Grid/Other Displays n KGrid Settings
MENU n G n 5. Grid/Other Displays n nGrid Settings

Display Color

Choose the displayed color.
[Preset 1]: The settings of [Color of Preset 1] are used.
[Preset 2]: The settings of [Color of Preset 2] are used.

Exclusive for n(nGrid Settings only)

Choose whether to use a movie-exclusive setting whendisplaying guides in n (movie) mode.
[Off]: Use the same setting as when in still photography
mode.
[On]: Use the settings dedicated to movie recordingmode.

Displayed Grid

Select the type of guides displayed. Choose from:[Off] / [w] / [x] / [1] / [y] / [X] / [x] (KGrid
Settings only)• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted fora 16:9 movie frame when movies are shot in still
photography mode. Depending on the option selected
for [nK], the guides may be displayed with an
aspect ratio of 17:9.

6
Customizing the Camera
234 EN(KGrid Settings / nGrid Settings)
PA S M B n

Color of Preset 1
Color of Preset 2[R]: Increase the number to emphasize the red tint.
[G]: Increase the number to emphasize the green tint.
[B]: Increase the number to emphasize the blue tint.
[α]: Increase the number to make the color of theguides deeper.

# The guides configured here are not displayed during Focus Stacking (P. 160).
%The settings made here are also used when [qStyle 3] is selected for [EVF Style].

Viewfinder Framing Grid Options

(VKGrid Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose whether to display a framing grid in the viewfinder. You can also choose
guide color and type. It takes effect when the camera is in still photography mode and[VStyle 1] or [VStyle 2] is selected for [EVF Style] (P. 228). The option selected for[nInfo Settings] takes effect in n mode (P. 231).
Menu

MENU n G n 5. Grid/Other Displays n VKGrid Settings
Choose whether to use a viewfinder-exclusive setting
when displaying guides on the viewfinder.
[Off]: Use the same setting as when using the monitor.
[On]: Use the setting dedicated to the viewfinder.

Display Color

Choose the displayed color.
[Preset 1]: The settings of [Color of Preset 1] are used.
[Preset 2]: The settings of [Color of Preset 2] are used.

Displayed Grid

Select the type of guides displayed. Choose from:[Off] / [w] / [x] / [1] / [y] / [X] / [x]• When [x] is selected, the guides are adjusted fora 16:9 movie frame when movies are shot in still
photography mode. Depending on the option selected
for [nK], the guides may be displayed with an
aspect ratio of 17:9.

Color of Preset 1
Color of Preset 2[R]: Increase the number to emphasize the red tint.
[G]: Increase the number to emphasize the green tint.
[B]: Increase the number to emphasize the blue tint.
[α]: Increase the number to make the color of theguides deeper.

6
Customizing the Camera

Exclusive for V

EN 235

Choosing the Settings Available via Multi-Fn
(Multi Function Settings)
PA S M B n
Choose the settings that can be accessed via multi-function buttons.
Menu

1

MENU n G n 5. Grid/Other Displays n Multi Function Settings

Select an indicator you wish to display when the INFO button is pressed, andput a check (v) next to it.
• Select an option using FG and press the Q button to put a check (v) next to it. To
remove the check, press the Q button again.

6

Highlight&Shadow Control

Change the setting using the front and rear dials. Pressthe INFO button to change the area (highlight, midtone,
shadow) to be configured.

Color Creator

Use the front dial to adjust hue and the rear dial to adjust
saturation.

Customizing the Camera

KISO
nISO
KWB
nWB

Change the setting using the front and rear dials.

Magnify

A zoom frame will be displayed.

Image Aspect

Change the setting using the front and rear dials.

KLV Mode

The setting switches between [Standard] and [S-OVF]
with each press of the button.

Peaking

Turns on and off with each press of the button.

Histogram Exposure Warning

(Histogram Settings)
PA S M B n

Choose the brightness levels that the histogram shows as overexposed (highlights)
or underexposed (shadows). These levels are used for exposure warnings in thehistogram displays during shooting and photo playback.

• The areas shown in red or blue in the monitor and viewfinder [Highlight&Shadow] displays
are also selected according to the values chosen for this option.
Menu

236 ENMENU n G n 5. Grid/Other Displays n Histogram Settings

Highlight

Choose the minimum brightness for the highlight warning.
[245] – [255]

Shadow

Choose the maximum brightness for the shadow warning.
[0] – [10]Settings related to operation and display of menus
Configuring the cursor on the menu screen (Menu Cursor Settings)
PA S M B n
Choose where the cursor will be displayed when you open the menu or move to adifferent page.
Menu

MENU n G n 2. Operations n Menu Cursor Settings

Menu Start Position[Recently]: When you open the menu, the last usedtab, page, and cursor position are recalled.
[_]: When you open the menu, the first page of the[_] tab is displayed.
[My]: When you open the menu, the first page of the[My] tab is displayed.

Shortcut to B Mode Settings

The camera can be configured to open the modespecific menu when you press the MENU button in
B mode.
[Off]: The menu opens according to the setting of[Menu Start Position].
[On]: [Live Bulb] (P. 173), [Live Time] (P. 173), or[Composite Settings] (P. 173) opens, depending on
the selected mode.

6
Customizing the Camera

Page Cursor Position[Save]: When you move to a different page, thecursor appears where it was the last time the page
was opened.
[Reset]: Each time you move to a different page, thecursor appears at the top of the page.

EN 237

Choosing how to move between pages with the rear dial(g Loop in Menu Tab)
PA S M B n
Choose whether to switch the pages only within the same menu tab when the rear dialis turned.
Menu

MENU n G n 1. Operations n Dial Settings n g Loop in Menu Tab
When you move to the last page by turning the rear dial and turn it
further, the first page of the next tab is displayed.
When you move to the first page by turning the rear dial and turn it
further, the last page of the previous tab is displayed.

No

K1 K2 AF n
K
1
8. Image StabilizerqG

KImage Stabilizer

My

Handheld Assist

S-IS Auto
Fps Priority
On
Off

Lens I.S. Priority

Off

jImage Stabilizer

6eaImage Stabilizeri

Customizing the Camerah

K1 K
K2 AF n2
1. Computational Modes

q

G

e

My

High Res Shot

Off

Live ND Shooting

Off

Focus Stacking

Off

HDR

Off

Multiple Exposure

Off

When you move to the last page by turning the rear dial and turn it
further, the first page of the current tab is displayed.
When you move to the first page by turning the rear dial and turn it
further, the last page of the current tab is displayed.
Yes

K1 K2 AF n
K
1
8. Image Stabilizer

KImage Stabilizer

q

G

e

My

Handheld Assist

S-IS Auto
Fps Priority
On
Off

Lens I.S. Priority

Off

jImage Stabilizer
aImage Stabilizeri

K1 K2 AF n q G
K1
1. Basic Settings/Image QualityeMy

Custom ModeKKYF

KK Detailed Settings
Image AspecthImage Review

4:3
Off

Shading Comp.

Off%This settings is effective only when the rear dial is operated. When you use HI to switch
pages, it always works in the same way as when [No] is selected.

[Yes]/[No] Default

(Priority Set)
PA S M B n

Choose the option highlighted by default when a [Yes]/[No] confirmation is displayed.

238 EN

Menu

MENU n G n 2. Operations n Priority Set

No[No] is highlighted by default.

Yes[Yes] is highlighted by default.

“My Menu” Settings
Using “My Menu”
You can use “My Menu” to create a personalized menu tab containing only items you
select. “My Menu” can contain up to 5 pages of 7 items each. You can delete items orchange the page or item order.
At purchase, “My Menu” contains no items.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Highlight an item for inclusion in “My Menu”.
• Any item in the menus _ through e can be added
to “My Menu” if it appears on the screen with tabs
displayed.
• Some other menu items can also be added to “MyMenu”. If the menu item can be added, “My” isdisplayed at the top right corner of the display.

Item can be added to“My Menu”
On
8min

Bulb/Time Timer

3hLive Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor-7Live Bulb

Off

Live Time

0.5secComposite Settings

1/2secOK

Press the R button.

R button• You will prompted to choose a page. Use FG on thearrow pad to choose the “My Menu” page to which theitem will be added.

My

Select My Menu to add.

On

Bulb/Time Focusing
Bulb/Time Timer
Live Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings
MENU

8min

My1
My2

3h

My3
My4

Off

My5

6
Customizing the Camera

MENU

3

My

BULB/TIME/COMP Settings
Bulb/Time Focusing-7
0.5sec1/2secOK

EN 239

4

Press the Q button to add the item to the selected
page.
• The camera will display a message stating that the item
has been added to “My Menu”.

• Items that have been added to “My Menu” are indicatedby the number of the “My Menu” page.
• Items can be removed from “My Menu” by pressing the
R button. A confirmation dialog will be displayed; toproceed, highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

My1

On

Bulb/Time Focusing

8min

Bulb/Time Timer

3hLive Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Added to My Menu.

-7

Live Bulb

Off

Live Time

0.5secComposite Settings

1/2secMy1

BULB/TIME/COMP Settings

On

Bulb/Time Focusing

8min

Bulb/Time Timer

3hLive Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor-7Live Bulb

Off

Live Time

0.5sec1/2secComposite Settings
MENU• Items saved to “My Menu” are added to the My (“MyMenu”) tab.

6OK

My (“My Menu”) tab
K1 K2

1. My Menu

AF n

q

G

e My
On

Bulb/Time Focusing

Customizing the Camera

5

To access “My Menu”, select the “My” tab.

%You can make the camera display “My Menu” first when you press the MENU button.
g “Configuring the cursor on the menu screen (Menu Cursor Settings)” (P. 237)

 Managing “My Menu”
You can reorder items in “My Menu”, move them between pages, or remove them from“My Menu” altogether.

1
2

Press the MENU button to display the menus.
Display the “My Menu” page you want to edit andpress the R button.

R button• The options below will be displayed.
[Rearrange Order]: Change the order of items or pages.
Use the arrow pad (FGHI) to choose the newlocation.
[Remove this item]: Remove the highlighted item from“My Menu”. Highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.
[Remove this page]: Remove from “My Menu” all itemson the current page. Highlight [Yes] and press the Q
button.

240 EN

K1 K2

1. My Menu

AF n

q

G

e My
On

Bulb/Time Focusing
KK

Rearrange Order

KWB

Remove this item

Metering

Remove this page

Flash Mode Settings

7 Setting Up the Camera
Card/Folder/File Settings
Formatting the card (Card Formatting)
PA S M B n

Cards must be formatted with this camera before first use or after being used withother cameras or computers.
All data stored on the card, including protected images, is erased when the card isformatted.
When formatting a used card, confirm there are no images that you still want to keepon the card. g “Usable cards” (P. 25)
Menu

MENU n e n 1. Card/Folder/File n Card Formatting[Yes]: The card will be formatted.
[No]: Formatting will be cancelled.

No

Formatting will be cancelled.

• When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, card slot selection appears. Select a card slot
and press the Q button.

7
Setting Up the Camera

Format Card

EN 241

Setting the card to record to(KCard Slot Settings / nCard Slot Settings)
PA S M B n
When there are cards in both slots 1 and 2, you can select which card to record still
images and movies to.
Super Control Panel

Q n KSave Settings

Menu

MENU n e n1. Card/Folder/File n KCard Slot Settings
MENU n e n1. Card/Folder/File n nCard Slot Settings

 Configuring KCard Slot Settings
KSave Settings

Choose the recording method for still images (P. 243).
[y] / [z] / [1/y] / [3/y] / [1=y] / [3=y]KSave Slot

Choose the card used to record photographs. This option
takes effect when [y] or [z] is selected for [KSave
Settings].
[5]: Photographs are recorded on the card in slot 1.
[4]: Photographs are recorded on the card in slot 2.

qSlot

Choose the card used for still image playback when [KSave
Settings] is set to [1/y], [3/y], [1=y], or [3=y].
[5]: Photographs on the card in slot 1 are played back.
[4]: Photographs on the card in slot 2 are played back.

7
Setting Up the Camera
242 EN%You can also choose a card for playback using the q button. Hold the q button androtate the front or rear dial to switch cards while playback is in progress. This does notchange the option selected for [qSlot].

 Configuring KSave SettingsyzStandard

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected for[KSave Slot] (P. 242). Shooting ends when the card is full.

Auto Switch

Pictures are recorded to the memory card in the slot selected
for [KSave Slot] (P. 242). Pictures will be recorded to theremaining card when the card in the selected slot fills. Thissetting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.
Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 140). Shooting ends when either card is full. Image quality is
set separately for each slot; after changing the option selected,
check the current image quality setting.

2 DualIndependent3

Each picture is recorded twice, once in each of two different
image quality formats. Choose an image quality for each slot
(P. 140). Recording continues to the card in the remaining slot
when either card fills. Image quality is set separately for eachslot; after changing the option selected, check the current image
quality setting.

3 Dual Same1

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using theoption currently selected for image quality. Shooting ends wheneither card is full. This setting automatically reverts to [Standard]
when only one memory card is inserted.

4 Dual Same3

Each picture is recorded twice, once to each card, using theoption currently selected for image quality. Recording continues
to the card in the remaining slot when either card fills. Thissetting automatically reverts to [Standard] when only one
memory card is inserted.

# The image quality mode may change if you change the option selected for [KSave
Settings] or replace a memory card with one that can contain a different amount ofadditional photographs. Check the image quality mode before taking photographs.
%When [z] (Auto Switch) is selected for [KSave Settings], the camera will automaticallyswitch between the last picture on the first card and the first picture on the second card.

7
Setting Up the Camera

1 DualIndependent1

 Configuring nCard Slot Settings
5

Movies are recorded on the card in slot 1.

4

Movies are recorded on the card in slot 2.

EN 243

Specifying a folder to save images in(Assign Save Folder)
PA S M B n

Specify the folder on the card in which the images will be saved.
Menu

MENU n e n 1. Card/Folder/File n Assign Save Folder

Assign *[New Folder]: Specify a 3-digit folder number.
1st digit: [0] - [9]2nd digit: [0] - [9]3rd digit: [0] - [9][Existing Folder]: Select an existing folder using FG. The first two
frames and the last frame in the folder are displayed.

Do not assign

The folder in which the images will be saved is not specified. If a folder
has already been specified, selection will be cancelled.

* If a folder has already been specified, the name of the folder is displayed. To select a
different folder, press I.

7

File Naming Options

Setting Up the Camera

Choose how the camera names files when saving photos or movies to memory cards.
File names consist of a four-character prefix and a four-digit number. Use this option tochoose how file numbers are assigned.

244 EN

Menu(File Name)

PA S M B n

MENU n e n 1. Card/Folder/File n File Name

%When two cards are inserted, the camera may create new folders or fail to number files
consecutively depending on the file and folder numbers currently in use on each card.
Auto

When a new memory card is inserted, file numbering continues from thelast number used. If the card already contains a file with the same or ahigher number, numbering will continue from the highest number.

Reset

Folder numbering is reset to 100 and file numbering to 0001 when a
new card is inserted. If the card already contains images, numbering willcontinue from the highest number.

Naming Files

(Edit Filename)

PA S M B n

Change the file names the camera uses when saving photos and movies to memory
cards.
MENU n e n 1. Card/Folder/File n Edit Filename

sRGB[Date (mdd)]: The 2nd to 4th digits will be made up of the numbers
corresponding to the month and day of the recording date (A to C sill be
used for October to December).
You can set the 1st digit as you wish.
[Directory Number]: The 2nd to 4th digits will be made up of the numberof the destination folder (“100” – “999”).
You can set the 1st digit as you wish.
[Manual]: You can set the first four digits as you wish usingalphanumeric characters.

AdobeRGB[Date (mdd)]: The 2nd to 4th digits will be made up of the numbers
corresponding to the month and day of the recording date (A to C sill be
used for October to December).
The 1st digit cannot be changed from “_”.
[Directory Number]: The 2nd to 4th digits will be made up of the numberof the destination folder (“100” – “999”).
The 1st digit cannot be changed from “_”.
[Manual]: You can set the 2nd to 4th digits as you wish usingalphanumeric characters. The 1st digit cannot be changed from “_”.

7
Setting Up the Camera

Menu

EN 245

User information
Saving lens info (Lens Info Settings)
PA S M B n

The camera can store information for up to 10 lenses that do not conform to the Micro
Four Thirds or Four Thirds system standards. These data also supply the focal length
used for the image stabilization and keystone compensation features. The data are
saved as Exif tags.
Menu

MENU n e n 2. Information Record n Lens Info Settings

Create Lens Information

Register the lens information.
[Lens Name]: Input the name of the lens.
[Focal Length]: Input the focal length.
[0.1] – [1000.0] mm[Aperture Value]: Input the aperture value.
[00.00] – [99.99][Set]: Save the lens information you have inputted.

Lens01 (registeredname) – Lens10(registered name)

Edit the registered lens information.
[Edit]: Edit the registered lens information.
Edit [Lens Name], [Focal Length], and [Aperture Value].
[Delete]: Delete the registered lens information.

7
Setting Up the Camera

Entering characters
1) Press the INFO button to switch between uppercase,lowercase and symbols.
2) Select a character using FGHI and press the Q
button.
• The selected character appears in the character entry
area.
• To delete a character, press the  button.
3) To delete a character in the character entry area, move thecursor using the front and rear dials.
• Select a character and press the  button to delete it.
4) When you have finished entering, select [End] and press
the Q button.

Character entry area
Lens Name

0/31

f

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

a

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l

x

c

v

b

n

m

z

MENU

S

0
p
End

 A
 # INFOa

Character selection area

• The lens will be added to the lens info menu.
• When a lens that does not supply info automatically is attached, the info used is indicatedby checks (v). Highlight lenses to which you want to add checks (v) and press the Q
button.

246 ENOutput Resolution

(dpi Settings)

PA S M B n

Choose the output resolution information (in dots per inch, or dpi) stored with photo
image files. The selected resolution will be used when the images are printed. The dpi
setting is stored as an Exif tag.
Menu

MENU n e n 2. Information Record n dpi Settings

Adding Copyright Information

(Copyright Info.)
PA S M B n

Choose the copyright information stored with photos when they are saved.
Copyright information is stored as Exif tags.
Menu

MENU n e n 2. Information Record n Copyright Info.

# We will not be held liable for any disputes or damages arising from use of the [Copyright
Info.] feature. Use at your own risk.
%To delete the copyright information you have entered, delete the characters on the entry
screen of each item (P. 248).

1
2

Use FG to select [Copyright Info.] and press the
Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Copyright Info.
Copyright Info.

Off

Artist Name
Copyright Name

MENU

OK

Copyright Info. setting screen

Off

Do not add Exif tags naming the photographer and/or copyright holder.

On

Add Exif tags naming the photographer and/or copyright holder.

3

Setting Up the Camera Enabling Copyright Info.

7

The display returns to the Copyright Info. setting screen.

EN 247

 Configuring Copyright Info.

1

Copyright Info.

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Copyright Info. setting screen.

Copyright Info.

On

Artist Name
Copyright Name

MENU

7
Setting Up the Camera
248 ENOK

Artist NameEnter the name of the photographer.

Copyright NameEnter the name of the copyright holder.

Entering characters
1) Press the INFO button to switch between uppercase,lowercase and symbols.
2) Select a character using FGHI and press the Q
button.
• The selected character appears in the character entry
area.
• To delete a character, press the  button.
3) To delete a character in the character entry area, move thecursor using the front and rear dials.
• Select a character and press the  button to delete it.
4) When you have finished entering, select [End] and press
the Q button.

Character entry area
Copyright Name

0/63

f

1

2

3

4

5

6

7

8

9

q

w

e

r

t

y

u

i

o

a

s

d

f

g

h

j

k

l

x

c

v

b

n

m

z

MENU

S

0
p
End

 A
 # INFOa

Character selection area

Monitor/Sound/Connection Settings
Disabling Touch Controls(Touchscreen Settings)
PA S M B n

Enable or disable touch controls.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n Touchscreen Settings

Off

Disable touch controls.

On

Enable touch controls.

Monitor Brightness and Hue

(Monitor Adjust)
PA S M B n

Adjust monitor color temperature and brightness. This option applies in both still
photography and movie modes.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n Monitor Adjustk (Brightness)

Adjust brightness. Use FG to choose a setting.
[-7] – [±0] – [+7]• Press the INFO button to switch between color temperature and brightness and set each
item.
• You can reset the setting by pressing and holding the Q button.
• In B mode, the monitor uses the brightness selected in [Bulb/Time Monitor].
g “Configuring BULB/TIME/COMP Settings (BULB/TIME/COMP Settings)” (P. 173)

Setting Up the Cameraj (Color temperature)

Adjust color temperature.
Use the front dial or HI to adjust the “amber–blue” axis.
Moving the pointer (M) closer to A adds a red cast and moving
it closer to B adds a blue cast.
Use the rear dial or FG to adjust the “green–magenta” axis.
Moving the pointer (M) closer to G adds a green cast andmoving it closer to M adds a magenta cast.

7

EN 249Viewfinder Brightness and Hue

(EVF Adjust)

PA S M B n

Adjust viewfinder brightness and hue. The display switches to the viewfinder whilethese settings are being adjusted.
Menu

7
Setting Up the Camera
250 ENMENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n EVF Adjustj (Color temperature)

Adjust color temperature.
Use the front dial or HI to adjust the “amber–blue” axis.
Moving the pointer (M) closer to A adds a red cast and moving
it closer to B adds a blue cast.
Use the rear dial or FG to adjust the “green–magenta” axis.
Moving the pointer (M) closer to G adds a green cast andmoving it closer to M adds a magenta cast.

k (Brightness)[EVF Auto Luminance Off] / [EVF Auto Luminance On]:
Viewfinder brightness and indicator contrast adapt automaticallyto ambient lighting conditions. Change the setting using HI.
[k]:Adjust brightness. Use FG to choose a setting.
[-7] – [±0] – [+7]# Brightness cannot be changed when [EVF Auto LuminanceOn] is selected.

• Press the INFO button to switch between color temperature and brightness and set each
item.
• You can reset the setting by pressing and holding the Q button.

Configuring the eye sensor

(Eye Sensor Settings)
PA S M B n

You can specify how the camera operates when you put your eye to the viewfinder.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n Eye Sensor Settings

EVF Auto Switch[Off]: The display does not switch when you put youreye to the viewfinder. To switch the display, press theu button.
[On]: The viewfinder automatically turns on when you
put your eye to the viewfinder.

Behavior when switched

Choose what will be displayed when the display
automatically switches to the viewfinder.
[Maintain Screen]: The screen that was shown on themonitor will be shown in the viewfinder.
[Shooting Screen]: The viewfinder shows the live vieweven if the playback screen or a menu was shown on
the monitor.

When Monitor is Opened[Operative]: When [EVF Auto Switch] is [On] and you
put your eye to the viewfinder, the display switches tothe viewfinder even if the monitor is open.
[Inoperative]: When [EVF Auto Switch] is [On] andyou put your eye to the viewfinder, the display does notswitch to the viewfinder if the monitor is open.

%The [EVF Auto Switch] setting screen appears when you press and hold the u button.

Disabling the Focus Beep

(8)

PA S M B n

Disable the beep that sounds when the camera focuses.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n 8On

A beep sounds after successful autofocus operations. The beep sounds
only when the camera first focuses using [C-AF].

Off

A beep does not sound after successful autofocus operations.

%You may need to adjust settings in the [Silents Settings] menu in order to enable thefocus beep during silent shooting (P. 132).

(HDMI Settings)

PA S M B n

Choose the signal output to external monitors connected via HDMI. Adjust the frame
rate, movie frame size, and other settings according to monitor specifications.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n HDMI Settings

Output Size

Choose the type of signal output to the HDMI
connector.
[C4K]: The signal is output in 4K digital cinema (4096
× 2160) format.
[4K]: If possible, the signal is output in 4K (3840 ×2160).
[1080p]: If possible, the signal is output in Full HD(1080p).
[720p]: If possible, the signal is output in HD (720p).

Output Frame Rate

Choose the signal frame rate according to whether thedevice supports NTSC or PAL.
[60p Priority]: Frame rate for areas supporting NTSC.
[50p Priority]: Frame rate for areas supporting PAL.

Setting Up the Camera

External Monitor Display Options7# [Output Frame Rate] cannot be changed when the camera is connected to a device via
HDMI.
# Sound will not be played back unless the connected device is compatible with the soundformat.
%You can configure detailed options for when outputting signals to an HDMI device inmovie mode. g “HDMI Output (nHDMI Output)” (P. 182)

EN 251

Choosing a USB Connection Mode(USB Settings)

PA S M B n

Choose how the camera functions when connected to external devices via USB.
Menu

MENU n e n 3. Monitor/Sound/Connection n USB Settings

USB Mode[Select]: The menu for selecting the connection mode
appears each time a USB cable is connected..
[Storage]: The camera functions as an external storage
device. The data on the camera memory card can becopied to the computer.
[MTP]: The pictures on the memory card can be viewed
or copied to the computer using computer software(P. 286).
[0RAW/Control]: Employing computer controls
available via OM Workspace, process pictures using thecamera’s high-speed image processing engine. Also, byusing OM Capture, you can shoot and transfer images
to a computer and control the camera from a computer.
For details, see “Connecting to Computers via USB”
(P. 283).
[USB PD]: Select this when you do not want the camera
to be powered automatically when connected to a USB
PD-compliant device.

Power Supply from USB

Choose whether to power the camera when connecting
to a computer via USB.
[Yes]: The camera will be powered when the camera
and computer are connected via USB.
[No]: The camera will not be powered when the camera
and computer are connected via USB.

7
Setting Up the Camera
252 EN%When you connect the camera to a computer via USB while [Storage], [MTP], or[0RAW/Control] is selected, you can use the camera while powering it.

Battery/Sleep Settings
Displaying Battery Status

(NBattery Status)
PA S M B n

View the status of the batteries inserted in the camera. Status of the battery in thecamera and of the battery in the power battery holder are displayed individually.
Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n NBattery Status# Some items are not displayed when the camera is powered from the supplied USB-AC
adapter or a USB PD-compliant USB device.

Setting which Battery Is Used First

(NBattery Priority)
PA S M B n

Choose which battery to use first when there are batteries in both the camera and theoptional power battery holder (P. 295).
MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n NBattery Priority

Body Battery

The battery in the camera is used first.

PBH Battery

The battery in the optional power battery holder is used first.

Changing the battery level display during movie recording
(nNDisplay Pattern)
PA S M B n
Choose a format for the battery level display. Battery level can be displayed as apercentage or as the amount of shooting time remaining.
• The shooting time display is intended as a guide only.
Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n nNDisplay Pattern%

Battery level is shown as a percentage.

min

Battery level is shown as the shooting time remaining. In still
photography modes, the battery level is displayed only while recording
movies.

7
Setting Up the Camera

Menu

EN 253

Dimming the Backlight

(Backlit LCD)PA S M B n

Choose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims when no operations are
performed. Dimming the backlight reduces the drain on the battery.
Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n Backlit LCD

8sec / 30sec / 1min

The monitor backlight dims after the specified time.

Hold

The monitor backlight does not dim.

Setting Sleep (Power Saving) Options(Sleep)PA S M B n

Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode when no operations are
performed. In sleep mode, camera operations are suspended and the monitor turns off.

7

Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n Sleep

Setting Up the Camera

OffThe camera does not enter sleep mode.

1min / 3min / 5min

The camera enters sleep mode after the specified time.

• Normal operation can be restored by pressing the shutter button halfway.
# The camera will not enter sleep mode in the following situations.
while a multiple exposure is in progress, while connected to an HDMI device, whileconnected to a smartphone via Wi-Fi, while connected to a computer via Wi-Fi or USB,
while connected to a remote control wirelessly, or while being powered via USB.

Setting Auto Power Off Options(Auto Power Off)PA S M B n

The camera will turn off automatically if no operations are performed for a set time after
it has entered sleep mode. This option is used to choose the delay before the camera
turns off automatically.
Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n Auto Power Off

Off

The camera does not turn off automatically.

5min / 30min / 1h / 4h

The camera turns off after the specified time.

%To reactivate the camera after it has turned off automatically, turn the camera on using the
ON/OFF lever.

254 EN

Reducing Power Consumption

(Quick Sleep Mode)
PA S M B n

Further reduce power consumption during viewfinder photography. The delay before
the backlight turns off or the camera enters sleep mode can shortened.

# Power saving is not available:
during live view photography, while the viewfinder is on, while multiple exposure orinterval timer photography is in progress, while connected to an HDMI device, whileconnecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi, while connecting to a computer via Wi-Fi or USB,or while Bluetooth is enabled
Menu

MENU n e n 5. Battery/Sleep n Quick Sleep Mode Enabling Quick Sleep Mode1
2

Use FG to select [Quick Sleep Mode] and press
the Q button.
Use FG to select [On] and press the Q button.

Quick Sleep Mode
Quick Sleep Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep

Off
8sec
10sec

MENU

7

OK

Off

The camera does not enter power-saving mode.

On

The camera is quick to enter power-saving mode. When power-saving
is in effect and the super control panel is displayed (P. 37), “ECO” isdisplayed on the monitor.

3

Setting Up the Camera

Quick Sleep Mode setting
screenThe display returns to the Quick Sleep Mode setting screen.

 Configuring Quick Sleep Mode

1

Quick Sleep Mode

Configure options.
• Press FG to select an item and press the Q button todisplay the setting menu.
• After configuring options, press the Q button to returnto Quick Sleep Mode setting screen.

Quick Sleep Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep

MENU

On
8sec
10sec

OK

Backlit LCD

Choose the length of time before the monitor backlight dims
when no operations are performed.
3sec / 5sec / 8sec

Sleep

Choose the delay before the camera enters sleep mode whenno operations are performed.
3sec / 5sec / 8sec / 10sec / 15sec / 30sec / 1min

EN 255• When power-saving is in effect and the super control panel
is displayed (P. 37), “ECO” is displayed on the monitor.

ECO
ECO

100%

2022.02.01 16:30:43

P

Small

3
S-AF

1/

250

ISO

Auto

200

Off

#

x±

p

4:3

S-IS AutoYF

60p L-8
1:02:03+

WB AutoYF

Setting Up the Camera
256 EN

5.6

r

0

1023

7

F

± 0.0

-

9999

G
0.3

Reset/Clock/Language/Others Settings
Restoring Default Settings

(Reset/Initialize Settings)
PA S M B n

Reset the camera to factory default settings. You can opt to reset almost all settings or
only those directly related to photography.
Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n Reset/Initialize
Settings

Reset Shooting Settings

Reset photography-related settings only.

Initialize All Settings

Reset all settings with a few exceptions, such as theclock and language.

%See “Default Settings” (P. 311) for information on the settings that are reset.
%Settings can be saved using OM Workspace or OM Image Share. For more information,
visit our website.

Setting the Camera Clock
Set the camera clock.
Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n X Settings

X

Set the date, time, and date format. Use the HI buttons to highlightitems and use the FG buttons to change the highlighted item.

Time Zone

Set the time zone and daylight saving time. Use the FG buttons tochange the time zone.
Pressing the INFO button allows you to set the daylight saving time. It
switches on and off each time the INFO button is pressed.

Choosing a Language

7
Setting Up the Camera(X Settings)
PA S M B n(W)

PA S M B n

Choose a language for camera menus and tool tips.
Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n W

EN 257

Calibrating the Level Gauge

(Level Adjust)

PA S M B n

Correct deviation in the level gauge. Calibrate the gauge if you find it is no longer truly
plumb or level.
Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n Level Adjust

Reset

Reset the gauge to factory default settings.

AdjustChoose the reference (zero) point. Calibrate the level gauge after
positioning the camera appropriately.

Image Processing Check7(Pixel Mapping)

PA S M B n

Check the image sensor and image processing functions simultaneously. For best
results, end shooting and playback and wait at least a minute before performing
proceeding.

# Be sure to perform the check again if you accidentally turn the camera off while the checkis in progress.

Setting Up the Camera

Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n Pixel Mapping

Viewing the Firmware Version

(Firmware Version)
PA S M B n

View the versions of the firmware for the camera and any lenses or other peripherals
currently connected. You may need this information when contacting customer support
or performing firmware updates.
Menu

MENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n Firmware Version

Viewing Certificates

(Certification)

PA S M B n

Display the compliance certificates for some of the standards with which the camera
complies. The remaining certificates can be found on the camera itself or in the camera
manual.
Menu

258 ENMENU n e n 6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others n Certification

8

Connecting the Camera to External
Devices

A number of tasks can be accomplished by connecting the camera to an external
device such as a computer or smartphone. Choose a connection type and software
according to your goals.

Precautions for Using Wi‑Fi and Bluetooth®
Disable wireless LAN and Bluetooth® in countries, regions, or locations in which theiruse is prohibited.
The camera is equipped with wireless LAN and Bluetooth®. Use of these features incountries outside the region of purchase may violate local wireless regulations.
Some countries and regions may prohibit the acquisition of location data without priorgovernmental permission. In some sales areas, the camera may consequently shipwith location data displays disabled.
Each country and region has its own laws and regulations. Check them before travelingand observe them while abroad. Our company assumes no liability for any failure on
the part of the user to observe local laws and regulations.
Disable Wi‑Fi on airplanes and in other locations where their use is prohibited.
g “Disabling the camera’s wireless communication (Airplane Mode)” (P. 260)

Connecting the Camera to External Devices# Wireless transmissions are vulnerable to interception by third parties. Use wirelessfeatures with this in mind.
# The wireless transceiver is located in the camera grip. Keep it as far away as practicablefrom metal objects.
# When transporting the camera in a bag or other container, be aware that the contentsof the container or the materials of which it is constructed may interfere with wirelesstransmissions, which can prevent the camera connecting to a smartphone.
# Wi‑Fi connections increase the drain on the batteries. The connection may be lost during
use if the batteries are low.
# Devices such as microwave ovens and cordless phones that generate radio-frequency
emissions, magnetic fields, or static electricity may slow or otherwise interfere withwireless data transmission.
# Some wireless LAN features are unavailable when the memory card write-protect switch
is in the “LOCK” position.

8

EN 259

Disabling the camera’s wireless communication

(Airplane Mode)

PA S M B n

You can disable the wireless communication (Wi-Fi/Bluetooth®) of the camera.
Menu

MENU n e n4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Airplane Mode

Off

Wireless communication is enabled.

On

Wireless communication is disabled. You cannot use it until you
change the setting to [Off]. z appears when you select [On].

%Communication with the Wireless Radiowave Commander FC-WR is possible even if you
select [On].

Connecting the camera to a smartphone
Use the camera’s wireless LAN (Wi-Fi) and Bluetooth® features to connect to asmartphone, where you can use the dedicated app to enhancement your enjoyment of
the camera both before and after shooting. Once a connection has been established,
you can download and take pictures remotely and add position information to images.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
260 EN• Operation is not guaranteed on all smartphones.

Things you can do with the specified app, OM Image Share• Download images from the camera to the smartphone
You can load images in the camera that have been marked for sharing (P. 195) to asmartphone.
You can also use the smartphone to select images for download from the camera.
• Remote shooting from a smartphone
You can remotely operate the camera and shoot using a smartphone.
• Beautiful image processing
Use intuitive controls to apply impressive effects to images downloaded to your smartphone.
• Addition of GPS tags to camera images
Using the smartphone’s GPS function, you can add position information when taking
pictures with the camera.

For details, visit our website.

Pairing the Camera and Smartphone(Wi-Fi Connection)

Follow the steps below when connecting the devices for the first time.

• Adjust pairing settings using OM Image Share, not the settings app that is part of thesmartphone operating system.
Super Control Panel

rO

Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wi-Fi Connection• You can also connect by tapping rO in the live view display.

1

Launch the copy of the dedicated OM Image Share app previously installed
on your smartphone.

2
3

Select [Device Connection] and press the Q button.
Follow the on-screen guide to adjust Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® settings.
• The Bluetooth local name and passcode, the Wi-Fi SSID and password, and a QR
code are displayed in the monitor.
r O

Connection Setup

3/3

Scan the QR code, using
the OI.Share app.

QR code8

Bluetooth Name : xxxxxxxxxxx
Bluetooth Passkey : 000000
Wi-Fi SSID
: xxx-x-x-xxxxxxxx
Wi-Fi Password : 0000000000000000

MENU

4

Tap the camera icon at the bottom of the OM Image Share display.

5

Follow the on-screen instructions in OM Image Share to scan the QR code
and adjust connection settings.

• An [Easy Setup] tab will be displayed.

• If you are unable to scan the QR code, follow the on-screen instructions in OM Image
Share to adjust settings manually.
- Bluetooth®: To connect, select the local name and enter the passcode displayedin the camera monitor into the Bluetooth settings dialog in OM Image
Share.
- Wi-Fi:
To connect, enter the SSID and password displayed on the camera
monitor into the Wi-Fi settings dialog in OM Image Share.
• O on the screen will turn green when pairing is complete.
• The Bluetooth® icon indicates the status as follows:
r: The camera is emitting wireless signal.
s: Wireless connection has been established.

6

To end the Wi-Fi connection, press MENU on the camera or tap
the monitor screen.

on• You can also turn the camera off and end the connection from OM Image Share.
• At default settings, Bluetooth® connection is kept active even after Wi-Fi connection
is terminated, allowing you to shoot remotely with a smartphone. To set the camera
to also terminate Bluetooth® connection when terminating Wi-Fi connection, set[Bluetooth] to [Off].

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Bluetooth local nameBluetooth Passcode
Wi-Fi SSID
Wi-Fi Password

EN 261

Wireless Connection Standby Setting for When the Camera Is On
(Bluetooth)
You can choose whether the camera will be on standby for wireless connection withthe smartphone or the optional remote control when the power is on.
%Complete the pairing of camera and smartphone or the optional remote control
beforehand. [Bluetooth] cannot be selected unless the pairing has been completed.

8Connecting the Camera to External Devices
262 EN

Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n BluetoothOff

The camera will not be on standby for wireless connection andwireless signal will not be emitted even when the power is on.

Onr

When the camera is on, it will emit wireless signal and be onstandby for wireless connection.
You can connect the camera and the smartphone through operationof OM Image Share and shoot remotely or transfer images.

Onr<

When the camera is on, it will emit wireless signal and be onstandby for wireless connection with the optional remote control(P. 279) if it has already been paired with the camera.

%When [Onr] is selected and the OM Image Share app is recording GPS logs, the camera
receives position information and adds it to the picture taken.

Wireless Settings for When the Camera Is Off (Power-off Standby)
You can choose whether the camera will maintain a wireless connection to thesmartphone when off.
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n d Settings n Power-off
StandbySelectWhen you turn the camera off, you will be prompted to choose
whether to maintain the wireless connection to the smartphone.

Off

Turning the camera off terminates the wireless connection to thesmartphone.

On

When the camera is turned off, the connection to the smartphone
remains active and the smartphone can still be used to download orview the pictures on the camera.

 “Select”
When [Select] is chosen for [Power-off Standby], aconfirmation dialog will be displayed before the camera
turns off if all the following conditions are met:

Yes
No
OK

Yes

Turn the camera off but leave the wireless smartphone connection active.

No

Turn the camera off and terminate the wireless smartphone connection.

# If no operations are performed about a minute after the confirmation dialog is displayed,
the camera will end the wireless connection to the smartphone and turn off automatically.
# If left active, the wireless connection will automatically terminate if:- the connection remains inactive for 12 hours- the memory card is removed- the battery is replaced- a charging error occurs during on-board battery charging
The connection can be restored by turning the camera on.
%Note that if [On] is selected for [Power-off Standby], camera may not turn on immediately
when the ON/OFF lever is rotated to ON.

8Connecting the Camera to External Devices• [Off] is selected for [Airplane Mode]• The camera is currently connected with a smartphone(P. 261)• The memory card is correctly inserted

Power-off Standby
Activate Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Power-off
Standby so images can be imported
while power is off?

EN 263

Transferring images to a smartphone
You can select images in the camera and load them to a smartphone. You can also use
the camera to select images you want to share in advance. g “Selecting Pictures for

Sharing (Share Order)” (P. 195)

• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], set it to [Onr].
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr], the camera will be on standby for wirelessconnection.

1
2

Tap [Import Photos] in OM Image Share on the smartphone.
# Depending on the smartphone, a confirmation screen for Wi-Fi connection may
appear. Follow the on-screen guidance to connect the smartphone and the camera.
• The images in the camera are displayed in a list.

Select the pictures you want to transfer and tap the Save button.
• When saving is completed, you can turn off the camera from the smartphone.
• Even if [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], [Import Photos] can be used bystarting [Wi-Fi Connection] n [Device Connection] on the camera.

Automatically uploading images while the camera is off

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
264 EN

To configure the camera to automatically upload images to a smartphone while off:

• Mark images for sharing (P. 195)
• Enable power-off standby (P. 263)
• If you are using an iOS device, launch OM Image Share• When you mark an image for sharing on the camera and turn the camera off, a notification
appears in OM Image Share. When you tap the notification, images are automaticallytransferred to the smartphone.

Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Live View)
You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone while checking thelive view on the smartphone screen.
• The camera shows the connection screen and all operations are performed from thesmartphone.
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], set it to [Onr].
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr], the camera will be on standby for wirelessconnection.

1
2
3

Launch OM Image Share and tap [Remote Control].
Tap [Live View].
Tap the shutter button to shoot.
• The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

• Even if [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], [Live View] can be used by starting[Wi-Fi Connection] n [Device Connection] on the camera.
• Available shooting options are partially limited.

Shooting remotely with a smartphone (Remote Shutter)• All operations are available on the camera. In addition, you can shoot pictures and record
movies using the shutter button displayed on the smartphone screen.
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], set it to [Onr].
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr], the camera will be on standby for wirelessconnection.

1
2
3

Launch OM Image Share and tap [Remote Control].
Tap [Remote Shutter].
Tap the shutter button to shoot.
• The image taken is saved on the memory card in the camera.

• Even if [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], [Remote Shutter] can be used bystarting [Wi-Fi Connection] n [Device Connection] on the camera.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

You can shoot remotely by operating the camera with a smartphone (Remote Shutter).

EN 265

Adding position information to images
Using the smartphone’s GPS function, you can add position information when taking
pictures with the camera.
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Off] or [Onr<], set it to [Onr].
• If [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr], the camera will be on standby for wirelessconnection.

1

Before taking pictures with the camera, launch OM Image Share and switch
on the position information addition function.
• When you are prompted to synchronize the clocks of the smartphone and thecamera, follow the guides displayed in OM Image Share.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
266 EN

2

Take pictures with the camera.

3

When you have finished shooting, switch off the position information addition
function in OM Image Share.

• When it is possible to add position information, g will be lit on the shooting screen.
When the camera cannot acquire position information, g blinks.
• It may take some time before the camera is ready to add position information when it
has been turned on or it has resumed from sleep mode.
• Position information will be added to pictures taken while g is displayed on thescreen.
• g is displayed on the screen when you view a picture that has position information.
• Position information is not added to movies.

Resetting smartphone connection settings

(Reset d Settings)

You can restore smartphone connection settings to default values.
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n d Settings n Reset d Settings%The following menu items will be reset.
[d Connection Password] (P. 267) / [Power-off Standby] (P. 263)
%To connect to a smartphone, start [Device Connection] again (P. 261).

Changing the password(d Connection Password)

To change the Wi-Fi/Bluetooth® passwords:
Menu

1

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n d Settings n d Connection
Password

Follow the operation guide and press the R button.
• A new password will be set.

%Both the Wi-Fi connection password and Bluetooth® connection passcode can bechanged.
%Reconnect to the smartphone after changing passwords. g “Pairing the Camera andSmartphone (Wi-Fi Connection)” (P. 261)

Connecting to Computers via Wi‑Fi
Connect the camera and computer via Wi‑Fi. Using Wi‑Fi, the camera can connect via
a router to a computer on a household network or the like.

Installing Software
Use “OM Capture” to connect the camera and computer via Wi‑Fi.
Use “OM Capture” to automatically download and view pictures taken with a camera
connected via Wi‑Fi to the same network as the computer. To learn more or to
download the software, visit our website. When downloading the software, be prepared
to provide the camera serial number.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at our website.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

OM Capture

EN 267

Readying the Computer (Windows)
If Windows is unable to detect a camera connected via a router or access point, follow
the steps below to register the device manually.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
268 EN1
2

Click the [Start] button on the computer desktop to display the Start menu.

3

Click [Devices] to display options for [Bluetooth &other devices].

4
5

Click [Add Bluetooth or other devices].

6

Click [OM-1].

Click(Settings) to display [Windows Settings]
options.

Click [+ Everything else].
• An [Add a device] window will open and [OM-1] will be displayed after a short pause.
• When a message is displayed stating the preparation is complete, click [Done].

Pairing the Computer with the Camera

(New Link)

PA S M B n

The camera and computer must be paired in order to connect. Up to four computers
can be paired with the camera at a time. To pair a computer with the camera, connect it
via USB. Pairing need only be performed once per computer.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable protector and cable clip toprevent damage to the connectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 19)
USB connector

8
USB cable (supplied)2

3

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
%If the message is not displayed, select [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 252).
# If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

Highlight [0RAW/Control] using FG on thearrow pad and press the Q button.

USB
Storage
MTP
0RAW/Control
USB PD
Exit
OK

4

Launch the copy of “OM Capture” installed on thecomputer.
• After starting up, “OM Capture” will prompt you tochoose the connection type.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

USB port• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.
• If the USB port on the computer is Type A port, use the optional CB-USB11 cable.

EN 269

5

Click the [+] to the right of [Create new link].
• If nothing happens, reconnect the camera.

+• Enter the name that will be used on the camera to identify
the computer. The default is the computer’s “Computer
Name”.
• The name used on the camera can be up to 15
characters long.

68Connecting the Camera to External Devices
270 EN

Click [Settings] in “OM Capture”.
• When a message is displayed stating that pairing iscomplete, disconnect the camera as instructed.

[Settings]• Repeat the above steps to pair the camera with each additional computer.
• The pairing information stored on the camera can be viewed and deleted using “OM
Capture”.

Adjusting Wi‑Fi Settings

(Wi-Fi Connection)

Adjust settings for connection to the network to which the paired computer belongs.
Before the camera can connect to the computer via Wi‑Fi, it must be configured forconnection to the network via the Wi‑Fi router or access point. Multiple network profiles
can be stored on the camera and recalled as desired. [Wi-Fi Connection] settings canbe adjusted via the following methods:

Connect by WPS

Configure the camera for automatic connection (P. 272).
To connect using a WPS router or access point, simply press thedevice’s WPS button.
[PBC Method]: Connect using only the router WPS button. The
camera connects automatically when the button is pressed.
[PIN Method]: The camera connects in PIN mode. Enter the camera
PIN on the router to connect.

Choose the network from a list (P. 274).
Connect from T
The camera will search for available networks; to connect, select a
List
network from the list and enter the network password.
Connect manually

Adjust connection settings manually (P. 273).
To connect, enter the network name (SSID) and other settings.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices• WPS connections require a WPS-compatible router or access point.
• Connecting via WPS in PIN mode requires that the router itself be connected to aadministrator computer from which the PIN can be entered.
• Manual connection requires that you have information on the network to which you areconnecting.
• The camera can connect via routers or access points of the following types:- Standard: IEEE802.11a/b/g/n/ac- Band: 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz- Security: WPA2, WPA3
• The camera can store settings for up to eight networks. The camera will automaticallyconnect to networks to which it has previously connected.
• Each new connection after the eighth overwrites settings for the connection that has beenleft unused for the longest period of time.
• Adding a network profile for an access point with the same MAC address as existing
profile overwrites the settings for the existing profile.
• For information on using routers or access points, see the documentation provided withthe device.
• Network profiles are not reset when you select [Initialize All Settings] for [Reset/Initialize
Settings] (P. 257). To reset network settings, use [Wi-Fi PC Settings] (P. 276) > [Reset
Wi-Fi PC Settings].

EN 271

 Enabling Camera Wi‑Fi
Before connecting to a network via Wi-Fi, you will need to enable Wi-Fi on the camera.
If [Airplane Mode] (P. 260) is set to [On], set it to [Off].
 Connecting via WPS (Connect by WPS)
Connect using the WPS feature on the router or access point.
Menu

1

Highlight [PC Connection] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

2
3

Highlight [Connect by WPS] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

4

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.

• [PC Connection] options will be displayed.

Highlight an option using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• If you selected [PBC Method], press the WPS button on the router or access point.
• Press the camera Q button to start the connection.
• Some time may be required for connection after the button is pressed.
• If you selected [PIN Method], the camera will display a PIN; enter it on the router oraccess point. Press the camera Q button when the router is ready to connect.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices• If the camera has been paired with more than one
computer, you will be prompted to choose a computer
before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a different computer, you must firstterminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 3. Repeat Steps 3–4.

PC Connection
SSID_001
Connect manually

MENU

]

OK

H

100%

Connection failed

5

Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• The camera will return to the standard shooting display.
O on the screen will turn green.

O
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

272 ENtO

Connect by WPS

U

8MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wi-Fi Connection

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

 Connecting Manually (Connect manually)
Adjust network settings manually. You will need to provide:
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wi-Fi Connection

SSID

The network name (SSID).

Authentication

The type of security used on the network.

Password

The password for connection to a secured network.

IP Address Assign

Choose whether the camera IP address is assigned automatically by
the network DHCP server.

IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

These fields are required when the IP address is assigned manually.
The settings used vary with the network.

DNS

1

Highlight [PC Connection] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

2

Highlight [Connect manually] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.

3Highlight items using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

• [PC Connection] options will be displayed.

Enter the network SSID.

Authentication

Select the type of security used on the network. Choose from
[None], [WPA2/WPA3] and [WPA3].

Password

If you selected [WPA2/WPA3] or [WPA3] for [Authentication],enter the network password.

Choose from [Auto(DHCP)] and [Manual]. Automatic IP address
IP Address Assign assignment requires a network with a DHCP server configured tosupply IP addresses automatically.
IP Address
Subnet Mask
Default Gateway

These fields are required when [Manual] is selected for [IPAddress Assign].

DNS

4Highlight [Start Connection] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices• Options for the selected item will be displayed.
SSID

8

EN 273

If the camera is able to connect, the network will
be displayed with a check (v) next to the network
name.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer,
you will be prompted to choose a computer before the
network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer using
the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selectedcomputer. To select a different computer, you must firstterminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 4. Repeat Steps 4–5.

PC Connection
SSID_001

tO

Connect by WPS
Connect manually

U

5

MENU

]

OK

H

100%

Connection failed

6

Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. O on
the screen will turn green.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
274 EN

O
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

 Choosing a Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)
The camera will search for available networks and display them in a list from which you
can choose the network to which you wish to connect.
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wi-Fi Connection

1

Highlight [PC Connection] using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

2

Highlight [Connect from T List] using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.

3Highlight the desired network using the FG buttons and press the Q
button.

• [PC Connection] options will be displayed.

• A list of available networks will be displayed.

• If the network is password-protected, you will be prompted to enter a password. Enterthe password and press the Q button.
• Press the I button to display [Detail Settings] for the highlighted network. You canenter an IP address and adjust other settings manually.
• Press the R button to repeat the search and update the network list.

4

If the camera is able to connect, the network will be displayed with a check(v) next to the network name.
• Password-protected networks are indicated by a t icon.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer, you will be prompted tochoose a computer before the network is displayed. Highlight the desired computer
using the FG buttons and press the Q button.
• The camera can be used only with the selected computer. To select a different
computer, you must first terminate the current connection.
• If the connection fails, the camera will display amessage to that effect, followed by the options shown in
Step 3. Repeat Steps 3–4.
100%

Connection failed

5

Press the Q button to exit to the shooting display.
• Standard shooting indicators will be displayed. O on
the screen will turn green.

O
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

! Connecting to Previously-Selected Networks• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks when you select[PC Connection] via the rO icon. You will not be required to supply a password.
• If multiple networks are available, the camera will connect first to the most recently-usednetwork.
• Once the camera has connected, it will display a list of available networks with the current
network shown by a check mark v.
• To connect to a different network, highlight it in the list and press the Q button.
• If the camera has been paired with more than one computer on the network, you will beprompted to choose a computer before the network list is displayed. Highlight the desired
computer using the FG buttons and press the Q button.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

P

8

EN 275

 Displaying the MAC address / Resetting Wi-Fi settings for PC
connection (Wi-Fi PC Settings)
You can display the camera’s MAC address for Wi-Fi connection and reset the Wi-Fi
settings used for connection to a computer.
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wi-Fi PC Settings

Wi-Fi MAC Address Display the camera’s MAC address for Wi-Fi connection.
Reset Wi-Fi PC
Settings

Delete the information about computers the camera has paired withand access points the camera has connected to.

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken
Take pictures and upload them to a computer on the same network as the camera.
Before proceeding, connect the camera and computer as described in “Pairing theComputer with the Camera (New Link)” (P. 269).

18Connecting the Camera to External Devices
276 EN

Launch “OM Capture” on destination computer.
• If prompted to choose a connection type, click [Wi‑Fi
Connection].
• The computer will display the message, [Camera
connected] when the camera is detected.
[Wi‑Fi Connection]• The camera will display the message shown at rightwhen a connection is established.

PC

PC connection started

Camera is connected to PC.
Recorded images are automaticallytransferred to PC.

OK

2

Configure “OM Capture” to automatically download
pictures as they are taken.
• Select the source card slot (1 or 2) and the type of
pictures (JPEG photos, RAW photos, or movies) to be
downloaded.
• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.

The “OM Capture” control
window

3

Take pictures using camera controls.
• The pictures will be uploaded to the computer after they are saved to the camera
memory card.
Image upload• A p (“image upload”) icon will be displayed while
upload is in progress.
F1023 [1:02:03]• The camera will upload only photos and movies
recorded while the camera and computer areconnected. Any pictures taken before Wi‑Fi wasenabled on the camera will not be uploaded.
• The upload queue for each card can contain no morethan 3000 pictures.
1/ 250F 5.6
0.0P
100% r

PC

1

1 L

1

-

0

+

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

ISO
Auto

200

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices%While the camera is connected to a network:- Sleep mode is disabled- Interval-timer photography is not available- Some restrictions apply to the options available during playback%[PC connection ended] options will be displayed when the camera’s connection to the
network ends. Upload of any remaining data will resume when the connection is reestablished. Note, however, that remaining data will not be uploaded if:- The Wi‑Fi connection is ended using camera controls- The camera is turned off- The source memory card is removed%If “OM Capture” displays the message [This application is unable to find a camera in thecamera control mode.], check:- that the camera has been paired with the computer,- that you selected the correct computer when connecting to the network, and- that the camera is registered with the computer (Windows only). g “Readying theComputer (Windows)” (P. 268)

EN 277

Ending the Connection
End the Wi‑Fi connection. The use of Wi‑Fi may be prohibited in some countries orregions, in which case Wi‑Fi should be disabled.
 Ending the Current Connection

1

Tap O in the camera monitor.

r O
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

P

• You will be prompted to confirm whether you wish to
disconnect.
• The network SSID is shown in the display.

F 5.6

PC

PC Connection

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

SSID:SSID_001

Wi-Fi is active

Disconnect
Maintain

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
278 EN

1/ 250-MENU

2Highlight [Disconnect] using FG and press the Q button.

3

To reconnect, tap O or select [Wi-Fi Connection] > [PC Connection] andpress the Q button.

OK• The camera will terminate the connection and exit to the shooting display.
• A confirmation dialog will be displayed if data remain to be uploaded. To terminate theconnection, highlight [Yes] and press the Q button.

• The camera will automatically reconnect to previously-selected networks.
• To connect to a new network, highlight [Maintain] in Step 2 and press the Q button.
Choose from a list of available networks and adjust settings as described in “Choosing a
Network from a List (Connect from Access Point List)” (P. 274).
• If you turn the camera off while upload is in progress, you will be prompted to choose
whether to power the camera down and terminate the Wi‑Fi connection immediately or to
power the camera down only after upload is complete.

 Disabling Wi‑Fi/Bluetooth®
Set [Airplane Mode] (P. 260) to [On]. Wireless communication will be disabled.

Using the Remote Control
You can control the camera from the optional remote control (RM-WR1) and takepictures.

Names of parts
1 Shutter button
2 Data transfer indicator
3 Shutter button lock4 Mode dial (b/OFF / K / n / CONNECT)
5 Cable connector
6 Battery-compartment lid
7 Battery-compartment cover
8 Strap eyelet

1 2

3

4
6
7

8

Connection
 Wired connection

Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to b/OFF and connect the remote control tothe camera via the supplied cable.
Photographs can be taken by pressing the shutter button.
To record movies, set [nShutter Function] (P. 216) to [RREC] beforehand.

# Wireless remote control is not available while the cable is connected.
%Bulb photography or the like is available by sliding the shutter button lock up and pressing
the shutter button (1, 2).

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

5

8

EN 279 Wireless connection
For wireless connection, you must pair the camera and the remote control first.
Menu

MENU n e n 4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n Wireless Shutter Setting

Start Pairing

Follow the on-screen instructions. When pairing is complete,[Bluetooth] will be set to [Onr<].

Delete Pairing

If you select [Yes] and press the Q button, the paired device will bedeleted.

1

Select [Start Pairing] and press the Q button.

2

When a message indicating pairing is in progressis displayed, rotate the mode dial of the remotecontrol to CONNECT and keep it in the position.

s<

Wireless Shutter Setting
Pairing in progress.
Please perform pairing operationon the wireless shutter release.

• Pairing starts when it is kept 3 seconds. Keep it in the
CONNECT position until pairing is complete. If you
rotate the mode dial before it is complete, the datatransfer indicator flashes rapidly.
• The data transfer indicator lights when pairing starts.

MENU

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
280 EN

3

When a message indicating pairing is complete isdisplayed, press the Q button.
• The data transfer indicator goes out when pairing iscomplete.
• [Bluetooth] (P. 262) will be set to [Onr<] when pairing
is complete.
# If you rotate the mode dial of the remote control or press
the MENU button of the camera before the pairing
completion message is displayed, the pairing process
ends. Paired device information will be reset. Performpairing again.
# If you rotate the mode dial of a remote control thatis not currently paired to CONNECT and keep it 3
seconds, or when pairing fails, the pairing informationfrom previous connections will be reset. Perform pairing
again.

s<

Wireless Shutter Setting
Pairing is complete.
Bluetooth setting is changed to
Ons<.
AA:BB:CC:DD:EE:FF
OK

 Deleting pairing

1
2

Select [Delete Pairing] and press the Q button.
Select [Yes] and press the Q button.

# When you have paired the camera with a remote control, you have to perform [Delete
Pairing] to reset pairing information before you pair the camera with a new remote control.

Shooting from the remote control

PA S M B n

To connect the camera and remote control wirelessly, be sure that [Bluetooth] (P. 262)
is set to [Onr<]. When set to [Onr<], r< is displayed and the camera will be onstandby for wireless communication with the remote control as soon as it is turned on.

Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to K orn.

2

Press the shutter button on the remote control totake pictures.
• When the mode dial of the remote control is set to K
(still photography mode): When you lightly press the
shutter button of the remote control down to the first
position (press the shutter button halfway), the AF
confirmation mark (() will be displayed, and a green
frame (AF target) will be displayed in the focus location.
• When the mode dial of the remote control is set to n(movie recording mode): When you press the shutter
button of the remote control, movie recording starts.
Press the shutter button of the remote control again tostop movie recording.

8

Shutter button

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1

EN 281 Data transfer indicator of the remote control

8Connecting the Camera to External Devices
282 EN

Lights once

Remote control operation is sent to the camera correctly.

Flashes rapidly (1second)Remote control operation is not sent to the camera correctly.
Shorten the distance between the camera and the remote control. If
the problem is not solved, check the setting of the camera.

Flashes rapidly (3seconds)

There is a problem regarding the pairing of the camera and remotecontrol. Pair the devices again.

Does not light

This may occur in the following situations.
• The battery in the remote control is dead.
• The mode dial of the remote control is in the b/OFF position.
• The camera and remote control are connected with a cable# Even if [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr<], you can connect the camera to asmartphone by starting [Device Connection] on the camera.
However, you cannot control the camera from the remote control when it is connected toa smartphone.
# Pairing devices and remote shooting are not available when [Airplane Mode] (P. 260) is[On].
# The camera does not enter sleep mode when a remote control is connected wirelessly.
# If you rotate the mode dial of the remote control to the b/OFF position, the camera t enterssleep mode according to the setting of [Sleep] (P. 254).
When [Bluetooth] (P. 262) is set to [Onr<], the camera does not enter sleep mode unless
you rotate the mode dial of the remote control to the b/OFF position.
# If you operate the remote control while the camera is in sleep mode, it may take a longer
time for the camera to resume operation.
# The camera cannot be controlled from the remote control while it is waking from sleep.
Operate the remote control after the camera has resumed operation.
# Rotate the mode dial of the remote control to the b/OFF position when you have finishedusing the remote control.

MAC address of the remote control
The MAC address of the remote control is printed on the warranty card provided withthe remote control.

Precautions for using the remote control• Do not tug on the battery-compartment cover or use it to turn the battery-compartment lid.
• Do not pierce batteries with sharp objects.
• Do not drop or swing the remote control while holding the cable.
• Moisture on the cable or remote control connectors could interfere with wireless control
and render wired connections unreliable.
• Confirm that the battery-compartment lid is free of foreign matter before closing it.
• Rotate the mode dial to b/OFF before connecting or disconnecting cables.

Connecting to Computers via USB
Connect the camera to a computer using the USB cable.

Installing Software
Install the following software to access the camera while it is connected directly to thecomputer via USB.
OM Capture

Use “OM Capture” to automatically download and view pictures as they are taken
or control the camera remotely. To learn more or to download the software, visit our
website. When downloading the software, be prepared to provide the camera serial
number.
Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at our website.
OM Workspace

This computer application is used to download, view, and manage photos and movies
recorded with the camera. When editing RAW data in the OM Workspace, high-speed
processing using the camera engine has been enabled. It can also be used to update
the camera firmware. The software can be downloaded from our website. Be prepared
to provide the camera serial number when downloading the software.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

Follow the on-screen instructions to install the software. System requirements andinstallation instructions are available at our website.

EN 283

Uploading Pictures as They Are Taken

(0RAW/Control)
PA S M B n

Connect the camera to a computer via USB to upload pictures as they area taken.
You can take pictures using the controls on the camera body or while controlling thecamera remotely from the computer.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.
• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable protector and cable clip toprevent damage to the connectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 19)
USB connector

8Connecting the Camera to External Devices

USB port

USB cable• The locations of USB ports vary from computer to computer. See the documentation
provided with the computer for information on USB ports.
• If the USB port on the computer is Type A port, use the optional CB-USB11 cable.

2

3

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
%If the message is not displayed, select [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 252).
# If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

Highlight [0RAW/Control] using FG andpress the Q button.

USB
Storage
MTP
0RAW/Control
USB PD
Exit
OK

4

Launch the copy of “OM Capture” installed on the computer.
• When prompted to choose the connection type, click[USB Connection].

[USB Connection]

284 EN

5

Configure “OM Capture” for download.

6

Take pictures using camera or computer controls.

• Choose a destination for the downloaded pictures.
• The pictures will be downloaded to the computer according to the options chosen.
• See online help for more information on using the software.

• The computer cannot be used to change the camera shooting mode.
• The computer cannot be used to delete pictures from the memory cards inserted in thecamera.
• The camera display frame rate may drop if the view through the camera lens is displayed
simultaneously both on the computer and in the camera monitor.
• The connection to the computer will end if you:- exit “OM Capture”,- insert or remove memory cards, or- turn the camera off.

Connecting the Camera for High-Speed RAW Processing
(0RAW/Control)
When you edit RAW data with the camera and computer connected, processing will befaster than when done with the computer only.

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [0RAW/Control] using FG andpress the Q button.

• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 252).
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.
USB
Storage
MTP
0RAW/Control
USB PD
Exit
OK

4
5

Launch the copy of “OM Workspace” installed on the computer.
Choose the picture to be processed.
• Only the pictures that were taken using the connected camera can be chosen.
• You can not choose pictures on the SD card in the connected camera.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices

1

EN 285

6

Process RAW images.
• Adjustments can be made to the shooting settings available on the camera and RAW
pictures processed accordingly.
• The processed copies will be saved in JPEG format.
• Enabling USB RAW data editing cancels any changes previously made in the edit
window.
• USB RAW data editing is not available when two or more cameras are connected.
• See online help for more information on using the software.

Copying Pictures to the Computer

(Storage/MTP)

When connected to a computer, the camera can function as external storage in muchsame way as a hard drive or other external storage device. Data can be copied fromthe camera to the computer.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the computer using theUSB cable.

2

Turn the camera on.

3

Highlight [Storage] or [MTP] using FG and press
the Q button.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices
286 EN• The camera will display a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected.
• If the message is not displayed, select [Select] for [USB Mode] (P. 252).
• If the batteries are very low, the camera will not display a message when connecting
to a computer. Be sure the batteries are charged.

[Storage]: The camera functions as a card reader.
[MTP]: The camera functions as a portable device.

USB
Storage
MTP
0RAW/Control
USB PDExit
OK

4

The camera will connect to the computer as new storage device.
# Data transfer is not guaranteed in the following environments, even if your computeris equipped with a USB port.
Computers with a USB port added by means of an extension card, etc., computers
without a factory-installed OS, or home-built computers# Camera functions cannot be used while the camera is connected to the computer.
# If the computer fails to detect the camera, disconnect and reconnect the USB cable.
# When [MTP] is selected, movies exceeding 4 GB cannot be copied to the computer.

Powering the Camera via USB (USB Power Delivery)
Mobile batteries or USB AC adapters conforming to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD)
standard can be used to power the camera. The devices must:
Standard: Conform to the USB Power Delivery (USB PD) standard
Output: Be rated for an output of 27 W (9 V 3 A, 15 V 2 A, or 15 V 3 A) or more

1

After confirming that the camera is off, use the USB cable to connect it to thedevice.
USB connector

Mobile battery or other USB
deviceType C

USB port

Type CUSB cable

2

Turn the camera on.
• The camera will draw power from the connected USB device.
• If the camera displays a message prompting you to identify the device to which the
USB cable is connected, select [USB PD].
• If the batteries are very low, the display will remain blank when the camera isconnected to the USB device. Be sure the batteries are charged.
• “USBP” is displayed while the camera draws power from the USB device.

8
Connecting the Camera to External Devices• The method used for connection varies from device to device. See the documentation
provided with the device for details.
• You may be unable to use USB Power Delivery (USB PD) with some USB devices.
See the manual supplied with the USB device.

EN 287

Connecting to TVs or External Displays via HDMI
Pictures can be displayed on televisions connected to the camera via HDMI. Use thetelevision to display pictures to an audience.

You can also film movies while the camera is connected to an external monitor or video
recorder via HDMI.
• HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers. Use an HDMI-certified cable.
• When the movie resolution is [4K] and playback frame rate is [60p] in [nK], use an
HDMI cable compliant to HDMI 2.0 or later.

Viewing Pictures on a TV

(HDMI)

8

Photos and movies can be viewed on a high-definition TV connected directly to thecamera by means of an HDMI cable.

Connecting the Camera to External Devices

For information on output signal setting, see “External Monitor Display Options (HDMI
Settings)” (P. 251).

288 EN Connecting the Camera to a TV
Connect the camera using an HDMI cable.

1

After confirming that the camera is off, connect it to the TV using an HDMI cable.
• When attaching the USB cable, use the supplied cable protector and cable clip toprevent damage to the connectors. g “Attaching Cable Protectors” (P. 19)
HDMI cable(Connect to the HDMI connector on
the TV.)

Type D

HDMI connector

Type A

2

Switch the TV to HDMI input and turn the camera on.

• The TV will show the contents of the camera monitor. Press the q button to view pictures.
# For information on switching to HDMI input, see the manual provided with the TV.
# Depending on TV settings, the image may be cropped and some indicators may not be visible.
# HDMI cannot be used while the camera is connected to a computer via USB.
# If [Record] is selected for [nHDMI Output] (P. 182) > [Output Mode], the signal will be
output at the current movie frame size. No image will be displayed if the TV or cable does
not support the selected frame size.
# If [4K] or [C4K] is selected, 1080p priority format will be used during still photography.

9 Cautions
Information about Dust and Water Resistant Features• This camera has a water resistant specification of IPX3 (when used in combination withan IPX3 or higher water resistant lens supplied by our company).
• This camera has a dust resistant specification of IP5X (under our company’s test
conditions).

 Precautions• Dust and water resistant capabilities may be lost when the camera is subjected to shock.
• Check the following parts for foreign material including dirt, dust or sand: packing parts ofthe battery compartment cover, card compartment cover, connector covers, and the parts
that come in contact with them, and the parts that come in contact when attaching thelens and the power battery holder. Wipe off foreign material with a clean cloth that does
not produce textile waste.
• To ensure dust and water resistant capabilities, close the covers firmly and attach the lensbefore use.
• Do not operate the camera, open/close the covers, or attach/remove the lens when they
are wet.
• Water resistant feature is ensured only when compatible lenses/accessories are attached.
Check the compatibility.
For compatible accessories, visit our website.
• Wipe off water thoroughly with a dry cloth.
• Remove foreign materials such as dirt, dust or sand thoroughly.

9
Cautions

 MaintenanceEN 289

Battery and charger

9
Cautions
290 EN• This camera uses one of our lithium-ion batteries. Use the specified genuine battery.
• The camera’s power consumption varies widely with usage and other conditions.
• As the following consume a lot of power even without shooting, the battery will be drained
quickly.
• Performing auto focus repeatedly by pressing the shutter button halfway in shootingmode.
• Displaying images on the monitor for a prolonged period.
• When connected to a computer (except when powering the camera via USB).
• Leaving wireless LAN/Bluetooth® enabled.
• When using a drained battery, the camera may turn off without the low battery warning
being displayed.
• The battery will not be fully charged at the time of purchase. Charge the battery beforeuse.
• Remove the batteries before putting the camera into storage for periods of a month or
more. Leaving the batteries in the camera for extended periods shortens their lives,potentially rendering them unusable.
• The normal charging time using the supplied USB-AC adapter is approximately 2 hours 30
minutes (estimated).
• Do not attempt to use USB-AC adapters or chargers not specifically designated for use
with the supplied battery, or to use batteries not specifically designated for use with the
supplied USB-AC adapter.
• There is a risk of explosion if the battery is replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Dispose of the used battery following the instructions “CAUTION” (P. 335) in the
instruction manual.

Using your charger abroad• The USB-AC adapter can be used in most home electrical sources within the range of
100 V to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) around the world. However, depending on the country or
area you are in, the AC wall outlet may be shaped differently and the charger may requirea plug adapter to match the wall outlet.
• Do not use commercially available travel adapters as the USB-AC adapter may
malfunction.

10 Information
Interchangeable lenses
Choose a lens according to the scene and your creative intent. Use
lenses designed exclusively for the Micro Four Thirds system andbearing the M.ZUIKO DIGITAL label or the symbol shown at right.
With an adapter, you can also use Four Thirds System lenses. The
optional adapter is required.
• When you attach or remove the body cap and lens from the camera, keep the lens mounton the camera pointed downward. This helps prevent dust and other foreign matter fromgetting inside the camera.
• Do not remove the body cap or attach the lens in dusty places.
• Do not point the lens attached to the camera toward the sun. This may cause the camera
to malfunction or even ignite due to the magnifying effect of sunlight focusing through thelens.
• Be careful not to lose the body cap and rear cap.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached.

 Lens and camera combinations
Lens

CameraMicro Four Thirds systemlens
Micro Four Thirds
system camera
Four Thirds system lensAF

Metering

Yes

Yes

Yes

Attachment possible
with mount adapter

Yes*1

Yes

*1 Not available during enlarged display, movie recording or starry sky AF.

10
Information

Attachment

EN 291

MF Clutch Lenses
The “MF clutch” (manual focus clutch) mechanism on MF clutch lenses can be used toswitch between auto and manual focus simply by repositioning the focus ring.
• Check the position of the MF clutch before shooting.
• Sliding the focus ring to the AF/MF position at the end of the lens selects autofocus, whilesliding it to the MF position closer to the camera body selects manual focus, regardless ofthe focus mode chosen with the camera.

AF/MF

MF

AF/MF

16

5 3 ∞ mm
12
0.5

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11
16

1
2
0.5

16

11 8 5.6 5.6 8 11

5 3 ∞ mm

Focus distances visible

16

Focus ringMF

• Selecting [Inoperative] for [MF Clutch] (P. 104) disables manual focus even when the MF
clutch is in the MF position.

10
Information
292 EN

Camera Displays for Lens SET and CALL Functions
The camera displays “(Set” when the focus position is saved using the SET option
and “(Call” when a saved focus position is restored using the CALL option. For more
information on SET and CALL, see the lens manual.
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3

3

Set

P

100% r O

S-AF

Call
1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

P

1/ 250

F 5.6

-

0

+

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

10
Information
EN 293

Optional Accessories
Using the charger (BCX-1)
Two batteries can be inserted. It can also be used with only one battery inserted.

1

Charge the battery.
Direction indicating
mark (▲)

3
2
1

AC walloutletCharging
indicators

USB-AC adapter(F-7AC: supplied)

Lithium ion charger

Lithium
ion battery(BLX-1)

10
Information
294 ENUSB cable (CB-USB13: supplied)• Charging time is approximately 2 hours 30 minutes. See the table below for status of
the charging indicators and battery charge.
* Charging time does not change even when you charge two batteries at the sametime.
Charging indicator

Battery charge

Indicator 1: Blinks
Indicator 1: Lights up,
Indicator 2: Blinks
Indicators 1 and 2: Light up,
Indicator 3: Blinks

Less than 50%
Charging inprogress

All indicators: Unlit

Charging complete

All indicators: Blinking

Charging error

50% or more
Less than 80%
80% or more
Less than 100%

HLD-10 Power Battery Holder
An optional HLD-10 battery holder can be used to power the camera for extended
periods.
# Make sure to turn the camera off when attaching and removing the holder.

 Part names
Terminal coverAttachment wheel
Multi selector
Vertical shooting lockBattery charge lamp
Rear dial Attaching the holder
Remove the power battery holder(PBH) cover on the bottom of thecamera and the terminal cover of
HLD-10 before attaching the HLD-10.
Once attached, make sure the HLD-10
removal knob is tightly secured. When
not using the HLD-10, make sure toattach the power battery holder (PBH)
cover to the camera and the terminal
cover to the HLD-10.

AF-ON button
F (Exposure compensation) button
Shutter button
Front dial
ISO button

Power battery holder(PBH) cover

Power battery holder(PBH) cover10 Loading the battery
Use BLX-1 battery. Once you load the battery, make sure to lock the battery cover.

Information

Store the Power battery holder (PBH) cover in the
HLD-10.

1

Direction indicating mark2

%The monitor battery-level indicator (P. 30) shows “PBH” when thecamera is powered by the battery in the HLD-10.

PBH

100%

EN 295

 Charging the battery in the power battery holder
To charge the battery in the power battery holder, load a battery in the holder andattach the holder to the camera. Charge the battery in the same way as described on
P. 22. The charge lamp of the holder lights during charging.
 Using the buttons
Slide the vertical shooting lock of the HLD-10 in the
direction of the arrow. The roles performed by the F(Exposure compensation) button, ISO button and AF-ON
button on the HLD-10 can be selected using the [Button
Settings] item. g “Changing the roles of buttons (Button
Settings)” (P. 208)
# Buttons on the HLD-10 cannot be used when the verticalshooting lock is in the LOCK position.

Notes on using this product10
Information
296 EN• Use only the designated battery. Failure to do so could result in injury, damage to the
product, and fire.
• Do not use your nail to turn the attachment wheel. Doing so could result in injury.
• Only use the camera within the guaranteed operating temperature range.
• Do not use or store the product in dusty or humid areas.
• Do not touch the electrical contacts.
• Use a dry, soft cloth to clean the terminals. Do not clean the product with a damp cloth,thinner, benzine, or any other organic solvents.
• Remove the batteries from the camera and power battery holder before putting thecamera into storage for periods of a month or more. Leaving the batteries in the camera
for extended periods shortens their lives, potentially rendering them unusable.

Designated External Flash Units
When using an optional flash unit designed for use with the camera, you can choose
the flash mode using camera controls and take pictures with the flash. See thedocumentation provided with the flash unit for information on flash features and theiruse.
Choose a flash unit to suit your needs, taking into consideration such factors as
the output required and whether the unit supports macro photography. Flash units
designed to communicate with the camera support a variety of flash modes, including
TTL auto and super FP. Flash units can be mounted on the camera hot shoe orconnected using a cable (available separately) and flash bracket. The camera also
supports the following wireless flash control systems:
Radio-Controlled Flash Photography: CMD, #CMD, RCV, and X-RCV Modes

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of radio signals. The
range of locations in which flash units can be placed increases. Flash units can control
other compatible units or be fitted with radio commander/receivers to allow the use ofunits that do not otherwise support radio flash control.
Wireless Remote-Control Flash Photography: RC Mode

The camera controls one or more remote flash units by means of optical signals. The
flash mode can be selected using camera controls (P. 298).
 Features Available with Compatible Flash Units
Supported flash control
modes

GN (Guide Number,
ISO 100)

Supported wirelesssystems

FL-700WR

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL MANUAL

GN 42 (75/150 mm *1)
GN 21 (12/24 mm *1)

CMD, #CMD, RCV,X-RCV, RC

FL-900R

TTL-AUTO, AUTO,
MANUAL, FP TTL AUTO,
FP MANUAL, MULTI, RC,
SL AUTO, SL MANUALGN 58 (100/200 mm *1)
GN 27 (12/24 mm *1)

RC

STF-8

TTL-AUTO, MANUAL,
RC *2

GN 8.5

RC *2

FL-LM3

Varies with camera
settings.

GN 9.1 (12/24 mm *1)

RC *2

10
Information

Flash unit

*1 Maximum lens focal length at which unit can provide flash coverage (figures following
slashes are 35 mm format equivalent focal lengths).
*2 Functions as commander (transmitter) only.

EN 297

Wireless remote control flash photography

PA S M B n

Wireless flash photography is available with compatible flash units that support
wireless remote control (RC). The remote flash units are controlled via a unit mounted
on the camera hot shoe. Settings can be adjusted separately for the units in up to threeother groups.
RC mode must be enabled on both the master and remote flash units (P. 297).

1

Set the remote flash units to RC mode and place them as desired.

2

Select [On] for [# RC Mode] (P. 124).

• Turn the external flash units on, press the MODE button, and select RC mode.
• Select a channel and group for each external flash unit.
• The camera will exit to the shooting display.
• “RC” will be displayed.

RC
100% r O

1 1023 1 [1:02:03]

1 LF

1 4K 60p L-8

S-AF

3
RC #

P

3

10
Information
298 EN

Press the Q button.
• The RC mode super control panel will be displayed.
• The standard LV super control panel can be displayedby pressing the INFO button. The display will change
each time the INFO button is pressed.

1/ 250

F 5.6

A Mode

P

Small

3

-

+

0

0.0

ISO
Auto

200

RC

1/
-

250
0

WB Auto
±0.0

F
+

5.6

ISO

Auto

200

± 0.0

r

#

x±

A

TTL

B

Off

Low

C Off

#

G
0.0
Ch1

[1:02:03]1023

RC mode super control panel

4Adjust flash settings.
• Highlight items using the FGHI buttons and rotate the front dial to choose
settings.
A Mode

P

Small

3

Group, flash control mode

RC

1/
-

250
0

WB Auto
±0.0

F
+

5.6

ISO

Auto

200

± 0.0

r

#

x±

A

TTL

B

Off

Low

C Off

#

G
0.0
Ch1

[1:02:03]

1023

Flash compensation

Optical signal strength
Flash modeGroup

Choose a group. Changes to settings apply to all units in theselected group. The unit mounted on the camera works as amember of Group A.

Flash control mode

Choose a flash mode.

Flash compensation

Adjust flash output. When [Manual] is selected for flash mode,
you can a value for manual flash output.

Optical signal
strength

Choose the brightness of the optical control signals emitted by
the flash units. Choose [High] if you have placed flash units at
close to the maximum distance from the camera. This setting
applies to all groups.

Flash mode

Choose # (standard) or FP (super FP). Choose super FP for
shutter speeds faster than the flash sync speed. This setting
applies to all groups.

ChannelChoose the channel used for flash control. Change thechannel if you find that other light sources in the area areinterfering with remote flash control.

Set the unit mounted on the camera to [TTL AUTO].
• Flash control settings for the FL‑LM3 can only be adjusted using the camera.

10
Information

5

Channel# Position the wireless units with the remote sensors facing the camera.
# Take pictures after confirming that the flash units are charged.

EN 299 Wireless Flash Control Range
The illustration is intended as a guide only. The flash control range varies with the typeof flash mounted on the camera and the conditions in the surrounding area.
Flash Control Range for Camera-Mounted FL-LM3 Flash Units
30°
60°
50°
100°

30°

7m
50°

5m

• We recommend that each group contain no more than 3 flash units.
• Wireless flash photography is not available in anti-shock mode or in rear-curtain slow sync
mode when a shutter speed slower than 4 s is selected.
• Start wait times longer than 4 s cannot be selected in anti-shock and silent modes.
• Flash control signals may interfere with exposure if subject is too close to the camera.
This can be mitigated by reducing the brightness of the camera flash, for example byusing a diffuser.

Other external flash units

10
Information
300 EN

Third-party flash units can be mounted on the hot shoe or connected via a sync cable.
Be sure to replace the cap on the external flash connector when it is not in use. Notethe following when using a third-party flash unit mounted on the camera hot shoe:• Using obsolete flash units that apply currents of more than about 250 V to the X-contact
will damage the camera.
• Connecting flash units with signal contacts that do not conform to our specifications may
damage the camera.
• Select mode M, choose a shutter speed no faster than the flash sync speed, and set[KISO] to a setting other than [Auto].
• Flash control can only be performed by manually setting the flash to the ISO sensitivity
and aperture values selected with the camera. Flash brightness can be adjusted byadjusting either ISO sensitivity or aperture.
• Use a flash with an angle of illumination suited to the lens. Angle of illumination is usually
expressed using 35-mm format equivalent focal lengths.

Principal Accessories
 Converter lenses
Converter lenses attach to the camera lens for quick and easy fish-eye or macro
photography. See our website for information on the lenses that can be used.
 Eyecup (EP-18)
Removal2

1

1

Push both levers inward and lift the eyecup.

10
Information
EN 301

System chart

Viewfinder

Power Supply
or

BLX-1

Lithium-ion battery

BCX-1

Lithium-ion Charger

F-7AC

EP-18

USB-AC Adapter

Eyecup

HLD-10Power Battery
HolderRemoteOperation
RM-WR1

Remote Control

10
Information

Case / Strap

Shoulder Strap /Camera Case

Connection
Cable

USB Cable /HDMI Cable *1

Headphone

Microphone

SoftwareMemory Card

SD/SDHC/SDXC

OM Workspace

Photo management/editing software
for computers

OM Capture

Camera control software forcomputers

OM Image Share
Smartphone app: OM-1 compatible products: Commercially available products

For the latest information, please visit our website.
*1 HDMI cables are available from third-party suppliers.
*2 There are restrictions on the lenses that can be used with the adapter. Visit our website for details.
*3 Visit our website for information on compatible lenses.

302 EN

Converter
Lens*3

Lens

MC-20

Micro Four Thirds system lenses

Teleconverter

MC-14

Teleconverter

FCON-P01
Four Thirds systemlenses

MMF-2/MMF-3*2

Four Thirds Adapter

Fisheye

MCON-P02
Macro

Flash

10
FL-900R

FL-700WR

STF-8

FC-WR

FR-WR

Electronic Flash

Macro FlashElectronic Flash

Wireless Radiowave
Commander

Electronic Flash

Information

FL-LM3

Wireless Radiowave
ReceiverEN 303

Cleaning and storing the camera
Cleaning the camera
Turn off the camera and remove the battery before cleaning the camera.

• Do not use strong solvents such as benzene or alcohol, or a chemically treated cloth.

Exterior:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth. If the camera is very dirty, soak the cloth in mild soapy water
and wring well. Wipe the camera with the damp cloth and then dry it with a dry cloth. If you
have used the camera at the beach, use a cloth soaked in clean water and well wrung.

Monitor:• Wipe gently with a soft cloth.

Lens:• Blow dust off the lens with a commercially available blower. For the lens, wipe gently witha lens cleaning paper.

Storage

10
Information
304 EN• When not using the camera for a prolonged period, remove the battery and card. Storethe camera in a cool, dry place that is well ventilated.
• Insert the battery periodically and test the camera’s functions.
• Remove dust and other foreign matter from the body and rear caps before attaching them.
• Attach the body cap to the camera to prevent dust from getting inside when no lens is
attached. Be sure to replace the front and rear lens caps before putting the lens away.
• Clean the camera after use.
• Do not store with insect repellent.
• Avoid storing the camera in places where chemicals are treated, in order to protect thecamera from corrosion.
• Mold may form on the lens surface if the lens is left dirty.
• Check each part of the camera before use if it has not been used for a long time. Before
taking important pictures, be sure to take a test shot and check that the camera works
properly.

Cleaning and checking the image pickup device
This camera incorporates a dust reduction function to keep dust from getting on theimage pickup device and to remove any dust or dirt from the image pickup device
surface with ultrasonic vibrations. The dust reduction function operates when thecamera is turned on.
The dust reduction function operates at the same time as the pixel mapping, whichchecks the image pickup device and image processing circuitry. Since dust reductionis activated every time the camera’s power is turned on, the camera should be held
upright for the dust reduction function to be effective.

Pixel Mapping - Checking the image processing functions
The pixel mapping feature allows the camera to check and adjust the image pickup
device and image processing functions. For best results, wait at least a minute after
shooting and playback have ended before performing pixel mapping.

1
2

Select [Pixel Mapping] (P. 258).
Select [Yes], then press the Q button.
• The [Busy] bar is displayed when pixel mapping is in progress. When pixel mapping
is finished, the menu is restored.

• If you accidentally turn the camera off during pixel mapping, start again from Step 1.

10
Information
EN 305

Shooting tips and information
The camera does not turn on even when a battery is loaded
The battery is not fully charged• Charge the battery with the USB-AC adapter.

The battery is temporarily unable to function because of the cold
• Battery performance drops at low temperatures. Remove the battery and warm it byputting it in your pocket for a while.

A dialog prompting you to choose a language is displayed
The dialog is displayed in the following situations.
• The camera is turned on for the first time.
• You have not chosen a language.

Please select your language. OK
Veuillez choisir votre langue. OK

See “Initial setup” (P. 31) and choose a language.

Bitte wählen Sie Ihre Sprache. OK
Por favor, selecciona tu idioma. OK
OK
OK

No picture is taken when the shutter button is pressed
The camera has turned off automatically

10
Information• If [On] is selected for [Quick Sleep Mode] (P. 255), the camera will enter sleep mode if
no operations are performed for a set period. Press the shutter button halfway to exit thesleep mode.
• The camera automatically enters sleep mode to reduce the drain on the battery if nooperations are performed for a set period of time. g [Sleep] (P. 254)
If no operations are performed for a set time after the camera has entered sleep mode,the camera will turn off automatically. g [Auto Power Off] (P. 254)

The flash is charging• On the monitor, the # mark blinks when charging is in progress. Wait for the blinking tostop, then press the shutter button.

Unable to focus• The camera cannot focus on subjects that are too close to the camera or that are notsuited to autofocus (the AF confirmation mark will blink in the monitor). Increase thedistance to the subject or focus on a high contrast object at the same distance from thecamera as your main subject, compose the shot, and shoot.
Subjects that are difficult to focus on
It may be difficult to focus with auto focus in the following situations.
AF confirmation
mark is blinking.
These subjects
are not focused.
Subject with low
contrast

306 EN

Excessively bright
light in center of frameAF confirmation
mark lights up but
the subject is not
focused.
Subjects at different
distances

Fast-moving subject

Subject not inside
AF area

Noise reduction is activated• When shooting night scenes, shutter speeds are slower and noise tends to appear inimages. The camera activates the noise-reduction process after shooting at slow shutter
speeds. During which, shooting is not allowed. You can set [Noise Reduction] to [Off].
g [Noise Reduction] (P. 117)

The number of AF targets is reduced
The size and number of the AF target changes depending on the [Digital Tele-converter](P. 166), [Aspect] (P. 144), group target (P. 77), [Drive j/Y] and [nImage Stabilizer]
settings.

The date and time has not been set
The camera is used with the settings at the time of purchase• The date and time of the camera is not set when purchased. Set the date and time before
using the camera. g “Initial setup” (P. 31)

The battery has been removed from the camera

Set functions are restored to their factory default settings
Settings adjusted in custom modes (modes C1–C4) will be reset to saved values whenanother shooting mode is selected or the camera is turned off. If [Hold] is selected for [Save
Settings] when a custom mode is selected, changes to settings will automatically be saved
to the selected mode. g “Saving the Changes Made to Settings while in Custom Modes”(P. 57)

10
Information• The date and time settings will be returned to the factory default settings if the camera isleft without the battery for approximately 1 day (in-house measurements). The settings
will be canceled more quickly if the battery was only loaded in the camera for a short time
before being removed. Before taking important pictures, check that the date and time
settings are correct.

Image taken appears whitish
This may occur when the picture is taken in backlight or semi-backlight conditions. This isdue to a phenomenon called flare or ghosting. As far as possible, consider a composition
where strong light source is not taken in the picture. Flare may occur even when a lightsource is not present in the picture. Use a lens hood to shade the lens from the lightsource. If a lens hood does not have effect, use your hand to shade the lens from the light.
g “Interchangeable lenses” (P. 291)

Unknown bright dot(s) appear on the subject in the picture taken
This may be due to stuck pixel(s) on the image pickup device. Perform [Pixel Mapping].
If the problem persists, repeat pixel mapping a few times. g “Pixel Mapping - Checking theimage processing functions” (P. 305)

EN 307

Functions that cannot be selected from menus
When you open the menu, items that cannot be set are displayed in gray.
If you press the Q button while selecting a gray item, the reason it cannot be set will be
displayed.
Refer to the on-screen instructions and check the settings (P. 65).

Functions that cannot be set from the super control panel
Some functions may be unavailable depending on the current shooting settings. Check if thesame function is displayed in gray in the menus (P. 65).

The subject appears distorted
The following functions use an electronic shutter:movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 132), Pro Capture shooting (P. 133), HighRes Shot (P. 156), focus bracketing (P. 178), focus stacking (P. 160), the live ND filter(P. 158), HDR (P. 162)
This may cause distortion if the subject is moving rapidly or the camera is moved abruptly.
Avoid moving the camera abruptly during shooting or use standard sequential shooting.

Lines appear in photographs

10

The following functions use an electronic shutter, which may result in lines due to flicker andother phenomena associated with fluorescent and LED lighting, an effect that can sometimes
be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds:
movie recording (P. 59), silent mode (P. 132), Pro Capture shooting (P. 133), HighRes Shot (P. 156), focus bracketing (P. 178), focus stacking (P. 160), the live ND filter(P. 158), HDR (P. 162)
Flicker can be reduced by choosing slower shutter speeds. You can also reduce flicker using
flicker scan. g [KFlicker Scan], [nFlicker Scan] (P. 108)

Information

Only the subject is displayed and no information is shown
The display has been switched to [Image Only]. Press the INFO button and switch toanother display mode.

Focus mode cannot be changed from MF (manual focus)
The lens you are using may be equipped with the MF clutch mechanism. In this case, manual
focus is selected when the focus ring is slid to the camera body side. Check the lens.
g “MF Clutch Lenses” (P. 292)

Nothing is displayed on the monitor
When something, e.g. your face, hand or strap, comes close to the viewfinder, the monitor
turns off and the viewfinder turns on.
g “Switching between displays” (P. 37)

308 ENError codes
Monitor indication

No Card

5Card Error

4Card Error

5Write Protect

4Write Protect

4Card Full

5No Picture

4No Picture

The card is not inserted, or it
cannot be recognized.
There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 1.
There is a problem with thememory card in Slot 2.
The memory card in Slot 1 iswrite-protected (“locked”).
The memory card in Slot 2 iswrite-protected (“locked”).

Corrective action
Insert a card. Or reinsert thecard properly.

Remove and reinsert the
memory card. If this does not
solve the problem, format thecard. If formatting fails, the cardcannot be used.

The memory card write-protect
switch is in the “LOCK” position.
Return the switch to theunlocked position (P. 25).

• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 does
not have space for additional
pictures.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 1 is full.

Insert another memory ordelete pictures. Before deleting
pictures, be sure any pictures
you wish to keep have been
copied to a computer.
• Shooting disabled; theIf [1/y], [3/y], [1=y] or
memory card in Slot 2 does
[3=y] is selected for [KSave
not have space for additional Settings] (P. 242), choose apictures.
different setting.
• Shooting disabled; thememory card in Slot 2 is full.

10
Information

5Card Full

Possible cause

Playback unavailable; thememory card in Slot 1 contains
The selected memory cardno pictures.
contains no pictures. Take
pictures before choosing
Playback unavailable; theplayback mode.
memory card in Slot 2 contains
no pictures.

EN 309

Monitor indication

5Picture Error

Possible cause

Corrective action

The selected file is damaged
and cannot be played back.
Alternatively, the picture is in aformat that is not supported by
the camera.

View the picture using computer
imaging software or the like. If
the picture cannot be displayedon a computer, the file may becorrupt.

Camera retouch features
cannot be applied to pictures
recorded with other devices.

Retouch the picture on acomputer or other device.

The clock is not set.

Set the clock (P. 257).

4Picture Error

5The Image Cannot Be
Edited4The Image Cannot Be
EditedY/M/D

Turn off the camera and wait for
the internal temperature to cool.

Heat

10
Information
310 ENInternal camera
temperature is too high.
Please wait for coolingbefore camera use.

Battery Empty

No Connection

The internal temperature of
the camera has risen due tosequential shooting.

Wait a moment for the camera
to turn off automatically.
Allow the internal temperatureof the camera to cool before
resuming operations.

The battery is drained.

Charge the battery.

The camera is not correctly
connected to a computer,
HDMI display, or other device.

Reconnect the camera.

The lens is locked.
Please extend the lens.

The lens of the retractable lensExtend the lens.
stays retracted.

Please check the statusof a lens.

An abnormality has occurred
between the camera and thelens.

Turn off the camera, check theconnection with the lens, andturn the power on again.

Default Settings*1: Can be added to [Assign].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Initialize All Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Reset Shooting Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].

Super Control Panel
Shooting mode
Function
Shooting Mode
P/A/S/M/B
Shutter Speed
Aperture ValueKISO
KAF Target Mode
Exposure Comp.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
KPicture Mode
KWB
KKelvin

Drive j/Y
Metering
AspectKImage Stabilizer
KCard Slot
Settings
5KK
4KK
nK

*1
―


*2
—


*3
—


g
43
47





―






―






―


45
113
77
106
261
145








—

150
150









―

―

208
72
88

#
±0.0










120
123

#Full
(When [Flash Mode] is set to[#Manual])op
4:3
S-IS Auto
Standard







121

















―

126
109
144
136
242

YF (when High Res Shot is
set: AF+RAW)
YF (when High Res Shot is
set: AF+RAW)







140







140







141

3 Natural
WB Auto5400K (When [KWB] is set
to [CWB])
—
S-AF
IOff

60p L-8

10
Information

KButton Function
KAF Mode
Face & Eye
Detection
Flash Mode
Flash Exposure
Comp.
Manual Value

DefaultP
1/250 (When set to S/M),
Bulb (When set to B)
F5.6
ISO Auto
ySmall±0.0—

EN 311

Shooting mode
FunctionnModen (movie)
Shutter Speed
Aperture ValuenISOnAF Target Mode
Exposure Comp.
Wi-Fi/BluetoothnPicture ModenWBnKelvinRC mode10
Information
312 ENnButton FunctionnAF Mode
Face & Eye
DetectionnImage StabilizernKSound Recording
Level
Headphone Volume
Shooting Mode
Shutter Speed
Aperture ValueKISO
KAF Target Mode
Exposure Comp.
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
KPicture Mode

*1
―
―
—
—
—

—


*2






—


*3
―





—


g
59
47
45
113
77
106
261
149

—
—





—

150
150

—







—

—

208
72
88

M-IS1
60p L-8
±0

―

―




136
141





―

8
P
1/250 (When set to S/M),
Bulb (When set to B)
F5.6
ISO Auto
ySmall
±0.0
—

―
―



―


―
—


62
43
47





—






—






—


45
113
77
106
261
145








―

150
150





















―









208
298







P
1/250
F5.6
ISO Auto
AMiddle±0.0—

Default

3 Natural
WB Auto5400K (When [KWB] is set
to [CWB])
—
C-AF
IOff

3 Natural
WB Auto5400K (When [KWB] is set
to [CWB])
KButton Function —A modeTTL
B modeOff
C modeOff
Flash compensation Off
Flash output±0.0 (when set to TTL/Auto)
Flash Mode
1/1 (when in Manual mode)#/FP#(Normal)Lowa optical signal
strength
Channel
Ch1

KWB
KKelvin62

_ TabPage
Function
1. Basic Settings/Image Quality
CustomC1
RecallAssign
Mode

*1

*2

*3

g

―

―

―
―

―
―

56

―

―
―
―


―
―

―
―
―

―

―
―
―


―
―

―
―
―

―

―
―
―


―
―

―
―
―

Shooting―
Mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW

C2

Save Settings
RecallAssignReset

C3

Save Settings
RecallAssignReset

C4Save Settings
RecallAssignReset

Save Settings

Reset
YF
Pixel Count: Y
Compression: SF
Pixel Count: Y
Compression: F
Pixel Count: Y
Compression: N
Pixel Count: uCompression: N
4:3
Off
Off

―







―

―





―





―





―










―


144
42
144

3 Natural
All items: 
WB Auto
0
0
On
Off
sRGB




















―

―
―

―


145
149
150
153

K1
K2
K3
K4

Image Aspect
Image Review
Shading Comp.
2. Picture Mode/WB
KPicture Mode
KPicture Mode Settings
KWB
A-B
KAll xG-M
KW Keep Warm Color#+WB
Color Space

Shooting
Mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Shooting
Mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW
Shooting
Mode: P
Image quality:
YF+RAW

140
140

10Information

KK
KK
Detailed
Settings

Default

154
154
155

EN 313

10
Information
314 EN

Page
Function
3. ISO/Noise Reduction
Upper Limit
KISO-A
Default
Upper/
Default
KISO-A Lowest S/SKISO-Auto
ISO Step
KNoise Filter
Low ISO Processing
Noise Reduction
4. Exposure
KFlicker Scan
EV Step
Exposure
p
Shift
B
C
5. Metering
Metering
Metering during B
B Auto Reset
AEL by half-pressing aMetering during j
NSpot Metering
6. Flash# RC Mode# X-Sync.
# Slow Limit
x+F
Balanced Flash Metering
Flash Mode Reduce Red-eye
Settings
Synchro Settings

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

25600
200










114

Auto
P/A/S/M
1/3EV
Standard
Drive Priority
Auto
















―





115
115
114
116
116
117

Off
1/3EV
±0
±0
±0















―
―
―

108
107
107

p
Auto
No
S-AF Only
Yes
All items: 






















109
110
110
111
112
112

Off
1/250sec
1/60sec
Off
Off
No
First Curtain

























124
124
124
124
125
123

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

o
Off

10fps
Off

20fps
Off

120fps
Off

50fps
Off

20fps
10
50

128fps
28
50

50fps
12
50

 (without )



3f
1sec
0.5secOff (without )
3f
1sec
0.5sec
Off
Off
0sec
0sec
Off
Not Allow
Not Allow
Not Allow



































































































―


―


―


―


―



―



―



―
―
―
―
―




―




―
―
―
―
―
―
―

126
135
128

130

10
Information

Page
Function
7. Drive Mode
Drive j/Y
Anti-Flicker Shooting
SequentialjShooting
Max fps
Settings
Frame Count Limiter♥j
Max fpsFrame Count Limiter♥jSH1
Max fpsFrame Count Limiter♥jSH2
Max fpsFrame Count Limiter
ProCapMax fpsPre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter
ProCap SH1
Max fpsPre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter
ProCap SH2
Max fpsPre-shutter Frames
Frame Count Limiter
Self-timer
Y12
Settings
♥Y12
Y2
♥Y2
YC
Number of Frames
Y TimerInterval Length
Every Frame AF♥YC
Number of Frames
Y TimerInterval Length
Every Frame AF
Anti-Shockr Anti-Shockr
Waiting Time
Settings
Waiting Time
Silents
Noise Reduction
Settings
8
AF IlluminatorFlash Mode

131
132

EN 315Page
Function
8. Image Stabilizer
KImage Stabilizer
jImage Stabilizer
aImage Stabilizer
Handheld Assist
Lens I.S. Priority

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

S-IS Auto
Fps Priority
On
Off
Off



―















136
138
138
139
139

Default

*1

*2

*3

g



















―
―

―
―

―
―
―





156

0sec
0sec
Off
ND8(3EV)
On
Off
8
5
0sec
Off
Off
Off
Off













―
―
―

Off
Off
100
00:00:01
00:00:01
Time Priority
On
Off
FullHD
10fps
Off
Off
1
Off
On
8min
3h
-7
Off
0.5sec1/2sec


―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―














































―
―



―
―
―
―

166
167

‘ Tab

10
Information
316 EN

Page
Function
1. Computational Modes
High ResHigh Res Shot
Shot
hK
Waiting Time
#Charge TimeLive ND
Live ND Shooting
Shooting
ND Number
LV Simulation
Focus
Focus Stacking
Stacking
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time
HDR
Multiple
Multiple Exposure
Exposure
Auto Gain
Overlay
2. Other Shooting Functions
KDigital Tele-converter
IntervalInterval Shooting
Shooting
Number of Frames
Start Waiting TimeInterval LengthInterval Mode
Exposure Smoothing
Time Lapse Movie
Movie
Movie Resolution
Settings
Frame Rate
Keystone Comp.
FisheyeFisheye Compensation
Compensation Angle
j/iCorrection
BULB/TIME/ Bulb/Time Focusing
COMP
Bulb/Time Timer
Settings
Live Composite Timer
Bulb/Time Monitor
Live Bulb
Live Time
Composite Settings

Off

AF+RAW

158

160

162
163

170
171

173

Page
3. Bracketing
AE BKTWB BKTFL BKT
ISO BKT
ART BKT

Focus BKT

Function

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

























174
175

Focus BKT
Set number of shots
Set focus differential#Charge Time

Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
Off
ART only: (ART withmultipletypes: only
the [ type ischecked .)
Off
99
5
0sec
















178

Function

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

S-AF
Off
Speed
eStart/Stop
Off
Yes
Yes

























72
82
85

No
Off
On













84
84

On
On1
Off
I Priority
I Priority















―



96
96
88
89

Off
On







―
―

90
91

A-B
G-M

ART BKT
ART BKT Setting

175
176
177

AF TabPage
1. AF

AF Illuminator
AF Area PointerFace & Eye Detection
KFacea& Eye AFe
ButtonSubject Detection
Eye Detection Frame

83

10
Information

2. AF

KAF Mode
KAF+MF
Starry Sky AF AF Priority
Setting
AF Operation
Release Priority
S-AF
KAF byhalf-pressing C-AF/C-AF+TRae in MF mode
Release
S-AF
Priority
C-AF/C-AF+TR

EN 317

Page
3. AF

10
Information
318 EN

Function

KC-AF Sensitivity
KC-AF
zCrossCenterAMid
Priority
BLarge
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC4
KAF Limiter AF Limiter
Distance for On1
Distance for On2
Distance for On3
Release Priority
KAF Scanner
KAF Focus AF Focus Adjustment
Adjustment
Fine-tuning Value
4. Movie AF
nAF ModenC-AF Speed
nC-AF Sensitivity
5. AF Target Settings & Operations
KAF
oAll
Target Mode MSingle
Settings
zCrossAMid
BLarge
CC1
CC2
CC3
CC4
KOrientation AF Target Mode
AF Target Point
Linked N
AF Target Mode
KN SetAF Target PointHome
f dialNSelect
Screend button
Settings
N LoopN Loop Selection
Via oAll
Settings
AF Targeting Pad
6. MF
MF Assist
MagnifyPeaking
Focus Indicator
Peaking
Peaking Color
Settings
Highlight Intensity
Image Brightness Adj.
Preset MF distance
MF Clutch
Focus Ring
Reset Lens

Default

*1

*2

*3

g




 (without ) (without ) (without ) (without )Off
5.0 - 999.9m
10.0 - 999.9m
50.0 - 999.9m
On
On
Off
±0
















―
















―















―
―

87
86

C-AF
±0
±0













72
87
87






 (without ) (without ) (without ) (without ) (without ) (without ) (oAll)
N Mode
6Pos

































―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―





79

Off
No
Off













100

Off
Off
Off
Red
NormalOff
999.9mOperative
b
Off























―
―
―
―
―
―


―
―

±0

92

94
95

97
98
99

101
102

103

104
104
104
105

n TabPage
Function
1. Basic Settings/Image Quality
nVideo CodecnK
nModenFlicker ScannDigital Tele-converter
2. Picture Mode/WB
nPicture Mode

*1

*2

*3

g

P
Off
Off



―
―
―









―



144
141
59
108
166

Same as K
Off


―





―

145
155

WB Auto
0
0
On

―
―
―
―







―
―


150
153

12800
200

―
―







114

On
Standard

―
―




―


115
116

M-IS1
±0

―
―







136
137

±0
±0
On
Off
48kHz/16bit
Off
8Drop Frame
Rec Run















―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

180

Monitor
Off
On

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

Off
Off
80
Off
On

―
―
―
―
―







―
―
―
―
―

H.264
60p L-8

―

154

181
181

10
InformationnView Assist
nWB
A-B
nAll xG-M
nW Keep Warm Color
3. ISO/Noise Reduction
Upper LimitbISO-A
Default
Upper/
Default
bISO-AutonNoise Filter
4. Image Stabilizer
nImage Stabilizer
nIS Level
5. Sound Recording/Connection
Sound
Recording Built-In R
RecordingVolumeMIC R
Settings
RVolume Limiter
Wind Noise Reduction
Recording Rate
RPlug-in Power
Headphone Volume
Time CodeTime Code Mode
Settings
Count Up
Starting Time
Output ModenHDMI
REC BitOutputTime Code
6. Shooting Assist
Center Marker
Zebra Pattern Zebra Pattern Settings
Settings
b Level 1c Level 2
Red Frame during RREC

Default

182

183
184

185

EN 319q TabPage
1. FileFunction

Information
320 EN

*1

*2

*3

g


Reset All Images
Copy All
Erase All
2. Operations
qRFunction
qDial Function

―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―

―
―
―


―
―
―
―

198
198
194
194



―
―




―
―

205
205

qaDefault Setting
Quick Erase
RAW+JPEG Erase
RAW+JPEG h
3. Displays
R
qInfo Settings
qaInfo Settings
G Settings

RecentlyOff
RAW+JPEG
JPEG

―
―
―
―






―

―
―

205
195
195
196

On
All items: All items: [C25] and[Calendar]: All items: 

―
―
―
―








―
―

205
206
206
207

―



―

196

Rating Settings

10

Default

G TabPage
1. Operations
ButtonSettings

Function
KButton
FunctionnButton
Function

F
R
K
e
u
u
d
D
E
Y
Z
PBH
F
PBH
K
PBH
e
l
F

d
D
E
Y
Z
PBH
F
PBH
K
PBH
e
l
nShutter Function

*1

*2

*3

g

Exposure
Comp.
High Res Shot
ISO
AF-ON
AEL
u View
Selection
Off
Off
Off

Preview
Exposure
Comp.
ISO





―

208













―
―
―
―
―















―
―
―
―
―
―





―

AF-ON





―

AF Stop
Exposure
Comp.
RREC
ISO
AF-ON
AEL
u View
Selection
Off
Off
Off
Peaking
Magnify
Exposure
Comp.
ISO


―




―
―

―
―
―
―
―







―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―








―
―
―
―
―
―

―



―

AF-ON

―



―

AF Stop
Off

―
―




―
―

208

10
Information

R
K
e
u
u

Default

216

EN 321Page

Function
Dial Settings KDial
P
Function

Lever 1

Lever 2
A

Lever 1

Lever 2
S

Lever 1

Lever 2
M/B

Lever 1

Lever 210

nDial
FunctionP

Lever 1

Information

Lever 2
A

Lever 1

Lever 2
S

Lever 1

Lever 2
M

Lever 1

Lever 2
g Loop in Menu Tab
Dial
ExposureDirectionPs

322 EN

Default
k: Exposure
Comp.
i: Ps
k: ISO
i: WB
k: ExposureComp.
i: Aperture
Value
k: ISO
i: WB
k: ExposureComp.
i: Shutter
Speed
k: ISO
i: WB
k: Aperture
Value
i: Shutter
Speednnn
k: ExposureComp.
j: ISO
k: ExposureComp.
j: ExposureComp.
k: RVOL
j: RVOLk: ExposureComp.
j: Aperture
Value
k: RVOL
j: RVOLk: ExposureComp.
j: Shutter
Speed
k: RVOL
j: RVOL
k: Aperture
Value
j: Shutter
Speed
k: RVOL
j: ISO
No
Dial1
Dial1

*1


*2


*3
―

g
216

―



―

216

―







―
―
―

238
218

Page

*2








*3
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

g
218

N
mode2
mode2
Fn
NormalNormal

*1


―
―
―

―

Off





―

223

mode2
Off
No
Reset
RecentlyOn
0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec0.7sec



―
―
―













































―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

223
224
238
237

Standard
Off
Normal
mode1
Off
On






―








―
―
―
―
―
―

225
225
225
226
226
227

Off

Default

220
220
222
222

224

10
Information

Function
Multi Selector SCenter Button
Settings
TDirection Key
Fn LeverKFn Lever Function
Settings
nFn Lever Function
Fn Lever/Power Lever
Electronic
KElec. Zoom Speed
Zoom
nElec. Zoom Speed
Settings
vLock
2. Operations
LV Close Up Mode
zLock
Priority Set
Menu Cursor Page Cursor Position
Settings
Menu Start Position
Shortcut to B Mode Settings
Press-andEnd LVahold Time
Reset LVa Frame
Reset F
Reset xReset xReset sReset 7
Reset cReset N
Call EVF Auto Switch
Reset D
End D
Switch G Lock
End Flicker Scan
Call WB BKT Setting
Call ART BKT Setting
Call Focus BKT Setting
Call W Setting
3. Live View
KLV Mode
KNight Vision
Frame Rate
Art LV Mode
Anti-Flicker LV
Selfie Assist

EN 323Page
4. Information
EVF StyleKInfo Settings

Function

Info by half-pressing a
VKInfo Settings

Va Level Gauge
nInfo Settings

5. Grid/Other Displays
Display Color
KGrid
Displayed Grid
Settings
Color of Preset 1
Color of Preset 2

10

VKGridSettings

Information

Exclusive for V
Display Color
Displayed Grid
Color of Preset 1
Color of Preset 2

nGrid
Settings

Exclusive for n
Display Color
Displayed Grid
Color of Preset 1
Color of Preset 2

Multi Function Settings
Histogram
Settings

324 EN

Highlight
Shadow

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

VStyle 2[Image Only],[Information
1] and[Information
2]: 
On2
[Image Only],[Information
1] and[Information
2]: On[ImageOnly] and[Information
1]: 

―





―
―

228
230







―
―

231
232


―




―
―

233
231

Preset 1
Off
R/G/B: 38
α: 75%
R: 180
G/B: 0α: 75%
Off
Preset 1
Off
R/G/B: 38
α: 75%
R: 180
G/B: 0α: 75%
Off
Preset 1
Off
R/G/B: 38
α: 75%
R: 180
G/B: 0α: 75%All items
except ISO: 
255
0









―
―
―

234





―











―
―
―
―





―

―
―
―
―






―
―
―
―

―



―





―

236







―
―

236

235

234

e TabDefault

*1

*2

*3

g

―
Standard
55
5
Do not assign
Reset
MDD
MDD

―




―
―
―
―

―









―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

241
242

Off
350dpi
Off
―
―

―


―
―




―
―

―
―
―
―
―

246
247
247

On
±0
A0, G0Auto
A0, G0On
Maintain Screen
InoperativeOn
4K
60p Priority
Select
Yes

―




―
―
―

―
―
―
―











―



―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

249
249

Off
Off
―
―
Off
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―



―


―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

260
262
279
271
263
267
266
276

―
PBH Battery
min
Hold
1min
4h
Off
8sec
10sec

―
―
―







―









―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―
―

253
253
253
254
254
254
255

243
244
244
245

250
250

251
251
252

10
Information

Page
Function
1. Card/Folder/File
Card Formatting
KCard Slot KSave Settings
Settings
KSave SlotqSlot
nCard Slot Settings
Assign Save Folder
File Name
Edit Filename sRGB
Adobe RGB
2. Information Record
Lens Info Settings
dpi Settings
Copyright
Copyright Info.
Info.
Artist Name
Copyright Name
3. Monitor/Sound/Connection
Touchscreen Settings
Monitork (Brightness)
Adjustj (Color temperature)
EVF Adjustk (Brightness)j (Color temperature)
Eye Sensor EVF Auto Switch
Settings
Behavior when switched
When Monitor is Opened
8
HDMI
Output Size
Settings
Output Frame Rate
USB Settings USB Mode
Power Supply from USB
4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth
Airplane Mode
BluetoothWireless Shutter Setting
Wi-Fi Connection
Power-off Standby
d Settingsd Connection Password
Reset d Settings
Wi-Fi PC
Wi-Fi MAC Address
Reset Wi-Fi PC Settings
Settings
5. Battery/Sleep
NBattery Status
NBattery Priority
nNDisplay Pattern
Backlit LCD
Sleep
Auto Power Off
Quick Sleep Quick Sleep Mode
Mode
Backlit LCD
Sleep

EN 325Page
Function
6. Reset/Clock/Language/Others
Reset/
Reset Shooting Settings
Initialize All Settings
Initialize
Settings
X Settings
X
Time Zone
W
Level Adjust
Pixel Mapping
Firmware Version
Certification

10
Information
326 EN

Default

*1

*2

*3

g

―
―

―
―

―
―

―
―

257

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

―
―
―

―
―
―

―
―
―
―
―
―
―

257
257
258
258
258
258

Memory Card Capacity
Memory Card Capacity: Photos
Figures are for a 64 GB SDXC card used to record photos with an aspect ratio of 4:3.
Number ofstorable still
pictures(Tripod)
183.6(Tripod)323(Tripod)
170.4(Tripod)
350(Handheld)
122.9(Handheld)
483(Tripod)
159.7(Tripod)
376(Handheld)
112.2(Handheld)
534(Tripod)10368×7776

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

10368×7776

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

5184×3888

Loss-lesscompression

ORI

AF

10368×7776

1/4

JPEG

IF

8160×6120

1/4

JPEG

22

2503

JF

5760×4320

1/4

JPEG

11.2

4882

Loss-lesscompression

ORF

22.4

2727

(Tripod)10368×7776
IF+RAW(Handheld)
8160×6120(Tripod)10368×7776
JF+RAW(Handheld)
8160×6120

RAW
YSF

5184×3888

1/2.7
1/4

YF

JPEG

35.2

1564

13.4

4103

9.2

5954

YN

1/8

4.9

11355

uSF

1/2.7

5.4

10172

3.8

14360

uF

3200×2400

1/4

JPEG

uN

1/8

2.2

24413

vSF

1/2.7

2.3

24413

1.7

32551

vN

1/8

1.1

48827

wSF

1/2.7

1.3

40689

vF

wF

1920×1440

1280×960

JPEG

1/2.7

xSF
xN

1/4

JPEG

1/8

wN
xF

1/4

1024×768

1/4
1/8

JPEG

1.1

48827

0.4

122067

1.1

54252

0.5

1220670.3

162756

10
Information

Compression
ratio

AF+RAW

File
formatFile size (MB)(approx.)Image size
(Pixel Count)

Record mode

EN 327• The number of storable still pictures may change according to the subject, whether or notprint reservations have been made, and other factors. In certain instances, the numberof storable still pictures displayed on the monitor will not change even when you takepictures or erase stored images.
• The actual file size varies according to the subject.
• The maximum number of storable still pictures displayed on the monitor is 9999.
Memory Card Capacity: Movies
Figures are for a 64 GB SDXC memory card.
Settings Other Than High-Speed Movie Recording
Capacity (approx.)
Frame
MotionPlayback
size
compensation frame rate

C4K

10

4K

L-GOP

L-GOP

Information

A-I

FHD

L-GOP

328 EN[nVideo Codec]: Set to[H.264][nVideo Codec]: Set to[H.265][RecordingRate]: Set to[48kHz/16bit][RecordingRate]: Set to[96kHz/24bit][RecordingRate]: Set to[48kHz/16bit][RecordingRate]: Set to[96kHz/24bit]

59.94p

41 minutes

41 minutes

54 minutes

54 minutes

50.00p

41 minutes

41 minutes

54 minutes

54 minutes

29.97p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

25.00p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

24.00p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

23.98p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

59.94p

41 minutes

41 minutes

54 minutes

54 minutes

50.00p

41 minutes

41 minutes

54 minutes

54 minutes

29.97p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

25.00p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

23.98p81 minutes

80 minutes

108 minutes

105 minutes

59.94p——

51 minutes

51 minutes

50.00p——

51 minutes

51 minutes

29.97p

41 minutes

41 minutes

101 minutes

98 minutes

25.00p

41 minutes

41 minutes

101 minutes

98 minutes

23.98p

41 minutes

41 minutes

101 minutes

98 minutes

59.94p

160 minutes

152 minutes

199 minutes

187 minutes

50.00p

160 minutes

152 minutes

199 minutes

187 minutes

29.97p

312 minutes

281 minutes

384 minutes

338 minutes

25.00p

312 minutes

281 minutes

384 minutes

338 minutes

23.98p

312 minutes

281 minutes

384 minutes

338 minutes

High-Speed Movie Recording
Frame size

Capacity (approx.)
MotionPlayback
Sensorcompensation frame rate Frame Rate [nVideo Codec]: [nVideo Codec]:
Set to [H.264]
Set to [H.265]
59.94p50.00p

FHD

L-GOP

29.97p25.00p23.98p240fps /200fps /120fps /100fps

149 minutes

178 minutes

149 minutes

178 minutes

290 minutes

324 minutes

290 minutes

324 minutes

367 minutes

324 minutes• Figures are for footage recorded at the maximum frame rate. The actual bit rate varies
with the frame rate and scene recorded.
• In high-speed movie recording, the [Recording Rate] setting does not affect the
maximum recording time.
• When an SDXC card is used, movies over 3 hours are recorded over multiple files(depending on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file before
the 3-hour limit is reached).
• When an SD/SDHC card is used, movies over 4 GB in size are recorded over multiple
files (depending on shooting conditions, the camera may start recording to a new file
before the 4 GB limit is reached).

10
Information
EN 329

Specifications
 Camera
Product type
Product type

Digital camera with interchangeable Micro Four Thirds Standard lenssystemLens

M.ZUIKO DIGITAL, Micro Four Thirds System Lens

Lens mount

Micro Four Thirds mount

Equivalent focal length on
a 35 mm film camera

Approx. twice the focal length of the lens

Image pickup device
Product type4/3” Live MOS sensor

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 22.93 million pixels

No. of effective pixels

Approx. 20.37 million pixels

Screen size

17.4 mm (H) × 13.0 mm (V)Aspect ratio

1.33 (4:3)

Viewfinder
TypeElectronic viewfinder with eye sensor

No. of pixels

Approx. 5.76 million dots

Magnification

100%

Eye point

Approx. 21 mm (−1 m−1)

Live view
SensorUses Live MOS sensor

10Magnification

100%

Information

Product type3.0” TFT color LCD, Vari-angle, touch screen

Total no. of pixels

Approx. 1.62 million dots (aspect ratio 3:2)

Monitor

Shutter
Product typeComputerized focal-plane shutter

Shutter speed

1/8000 - 60 sec., bulb photography, time photography

Flash sync speed

Up to 1/250 sec.

Auto focus
Product typeHi-Speed Imager AF

Focusing points

1053 points

Selection of focusing point Auto, Optional

Exposure control

330 EN

Metering system

TTL metering system (imager metering)
Digital ESP metering/Center weighted averaging metering/Spot metering

Metered range−2 to 20 EV (f/2.8, ISO 100 equivalent)

Shooting modes

P: Program AE (program shift available); A: Aperture priority AE;
S: Shutter-priority AE; M: Manual; B: Bulb (bulb, time, and composite);
C1/C2/C3/C4: Custom Modes; n: Movie

ISO sensitivity

L80; L100; 200 - 25600 in steps of 1/3 or 1 EV

Exposure compensation±5.0 EV (1/3, 1/2, 1 EV step)White balance
Mode setting

Auto/Preset WB (7 settings)/Customized WB/One-touch WB (camera canstore up to 4 settings)

RecordingMemorySD, SDHC and SDXCUHS-II compatible

Recording system

Digital recording, JPEG (DCF2.0), RAW Data

Applicable standards

Exif 2.31, Digital Print Order Format (DPOF)

Sound with still pictures

Wave format

Movie

MOV (H.264/MPEG-4 AVC, H.265/HEVC)

Audio

Stereo linear PCM, 16 bit; sampling frequency 48 kHz (wave format)
Stereo linear PCM, 24 bit; sampling frequency 96 kHz (wave format)

Playback
Display format

Single-frame playback/Close-up playback/Index display/Calendar display

Drive
Drive mode

Single frame; sequential; anti-shock; silent; Pro Capture; self-timer

Sequential shooting

Up to 10 fps (j)Up to 20 fps (♥j/ProCap)
Up to 50 fps (♥j/ProCap SH2)
Up to 120 fps (♥j/ProCap SH1)

Self-timer

Operation time: 12 sec./2 sec./Customized

Energy saving function

Switch to sleep mode: 1 minute, Power OFF: 4 hours(This function can be customized.)

FlashFlash control mode
X-Sync.

TTL-AUTO (TTL pre-flash mode)/MANUAL
1/250 s or slower

Wireless LAN
IEEE 802.11a/b/g/n/ac *Bluetooth®
Compatible standard

Bluetooth Version 4.2 BLE

External connector
USB (Type C); HDMI micro connector (type D); external flash; remote cable (ø2.5 mm mini-jack);
microphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack); headphone jack (ø3.5 mm stereo mini-jack)Power supply
Battery

Dimensions/weight
Dimensions
Weight10
Information

Compatible standard

Lithium-ion Battery ×1
Approx. 134.8 mm (W) × 91.6 mm (H) × 72.7 mm (D) (5.4” × 3.7” × 2.9”)(excluding protrusions)
Approx. 599 g (1.3 Ib.) (including battery and memory card)

Operating environment
Temperature−10 °C - 40 °C (14 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/ −20 °C - 60 °C (−4 °F - 140 °F)(storage)

Humidity

30% - 90% (operation)/10% - 90% (storage)

Water resistance

Type: IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX3 (applies if camera is usedwith our IPX3 or higher water-resistant lens)* Note that cameras have been developed in line with the different standards of the countries.

EN 331 Flash
MODEL NO.

FL-LM3

Guide number

9.1 (ISO100•m)
12.7 (ISO200•m)

Firing angle

Covers the picture angle of a 12 mm lens (equivalent to 24 mm in 35 mm
format)Dimensions

Approx. 43.6 mm (W) × 49.4 mm (H) × 39 mm (D) (1.7” × 1.9” × 1.5”)

WeightApprox. 51 g (1.8 oz.)

Splash resistanceType Equivalent to IEC Standard publication 60529 IPX1

 Lithium-ion battery
MODEL NO.

BLX-1

Type

Rechargeable Lithium-ion battery

Nominal voltage

DC 7.2 V

Nominal capacity

2280 mAh

No. of charge anddischarge times

Approx. 500 times (varies with usage conditions)Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (charging)

Dimensions

Approx. 40 mm (W) × 22 mm (H) × 55 mm (D) (1.6” × 0.9” × 2.2”)

WeightApprox. 86 g (3.1 oz.) USB-AC adapter
MODEL NO.

10

F-7AC-1/F-7AC-2

Information

Rated input

AC 100 V - 240 V (50/60 Hz)

Rated output

DC 5V, 3 A
DC 9V, 3 A

Ambient temperature

0 °C - 40 °C (32 °F - 104 °F) (operation)/–20 °C - 60 °C (–4 °F - 140 °F) (storage)• The appearance and specifications of this product are subject to change without noticeor obligation on the part of the manufacturer.
• Visit our website for the latest specifications.
The terms HDMI and HDMI High-Definition
Multimedia Interface, and the HDMI Logo aretrademarks or registered trademarks of HDMI
Licensing Administrator, Inc. in the UnitedStates and other countries.

332 EN11 SAFETY PRECAUTIONSSAFETY PRECAUTIONSCAUTIONRISK OF ELECTRIC SHOCK
DO NOT OPEN
CAUTION: TO REDUCE THE RISK OF ELECTRICAL SHOCK, DO NOTREMOVE COVER (OR BACK). NO USER-SERVICEABLE PARTS INSIDE.
REFER SERVICING TO QUALIFIED SERVICE PERSONNEL.
An exclamation mark enclosed in a triangle alerts you to important operating
and maintenance instructions in the documentation provided with the
product.
WARNING

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, serious injury or death may result.

CAUTION

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, injury may result.

NOTICE

If the product is used without observing the information given under thissymbol, damage to the equipment may result.

WARNING!
TO AVOID THE RISK OF FIRE OR ELECTRICAL SHOCK, NEVER DISASSEMBLE, EXPOSE
THIS PRODUCT TO WATER OR OPERATE IN A HIGH HUMIDITY ENVIRONMENT.

11
Read All Instructions — Before you use theproduct, read all operating instructions. Save all
manuals and documentation for future reference.
Power Source — Connect this product only tothe power source described on the product label.
Foreign Objects — To avoid personal injury,
never insert a metal object into the product.
Cleaning — Always unplug this product fromthe wall outlet before cleaning. Use only a damp
cloth for cleaning. Never use any type of liquid oraerosol cleaner, or any type of organic solvent toclean this product.
Heat — Never use or store this product near
any heat source such as a radiator, heat register,
stove, or any type of equipment or appliance thatgenerates heat, including stereo amplifiers.
Lightning — If a lightning storm occurs while
using a USB-AC adapter, remove it from the walloutlet immediately.
Attachments — For your safety, and to avoid
damaging the product, use only accessories
recommended by our company.

Location — To avoid damage to the product,
mount the product securely on a stable tripod,
stand, or bracket.

WARNING• Do not use the camera near flammable or
explosive gases.
• Rest your eyes periodically when using
the viewfinder.
Failure to observe this precaution could resultin eyestrain, nausea, or sensations similar to
motion sickness. The length and frequencyof the required rest varies with the individual;
use your own judgement. If you feel tired
or unwell, avoid using the viewfinder and if
necessary consult a physician.
• Do not use the flash and LED (including
AF illuminator) on people (infants, smallchildren, etc.) at close range.
• You must be at least 1 m (3 ft.) awayfrom the faces of your subjects. Firing the
flash too close to the subject’s eyes could
cause a momentary loss of vision.

SAFETY PRECAUTIONSGeneral Precautions

EN 333

11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
334 EN• Do not look at the sun or strong lights
with the camera.
• Keep young children, infants away fromthe camera.
• Always use and store the camera out of
the reach of young children and infants toprevent the following dangerous situations
which could cause serious injury:• Becoming entangled in the camera
strap, causing strangulation.
• Accidentally swallowing the battery,cards or other small parts.
• Accidentally firing the flash into theirown eyes or those of another child.
• Accidentally being injured by themoving parts of the camera.
• If you find that the USB-AC adapter or
charger is extremely hot or notice any
unusual odors, noise, or smoke aroundit, unplug the power plug from wall outlet
immediately and stop using it. Then,contact an authorized distributor orservice center.
• Stop using the camera immediately if
you notice any unusual odors, noise, orsmoke around it.
• Never remove the batteries with barehands, which may cause a fire or burnyour hands.
• Never hold or operate the camera with wet
hands.
This may cause overheating, exploding,burning, electrical shocks, or malfunctions.
• Do not leave the camera in places where
it may be subject to extremely hightemperatures.
• Doing so may cause parts to deteriorate
and, in some circumstances, cause thecamera to catch fire. Do not use thecharger or USB-AC adapter if it is covered(such as a blanket). This could cause
overheating, resulting in fire.
• Handle the camera with care to avoid
getting a low temperature burn.
• When the camera contains metalparts, overheating can result in a lowtemperature burn. Pay attention to thefollowing:• When used for a long period, thecamera will get hot. If you hold on
to the camera in this state, a lowtemperature burn may be caused.
• In places subject to extremely cold
temperatures, the temperature of thecamera’s body may be lower than theenvironmental temperature. If possible,
wear gloves when handling the camera
in cold temperatures.

• To protect the high-precision technology
contained in this product, never leave thecamera in the places listed below, no matter if
in use or storage:• Places where temperatures and/or
humidity are high or go through extremechanges. Direct sunlight, beaches, locked
cars, or near other heat sources (stove,
radiator, etc.) or humidifiers.
• In sandy or dusty environments.
• Near flammable items or explosives.
• In wet places, such as bathrooms or in
the rain.
• In places prone to strong vibrations.
• The camera uses a lithium ion battery
specified by our company. Charge thebattery with the specified USB-AC adapter
or charger. Do not use any other USB-AC
adapters or chargers.
• Never incinerate or heat batteries in
microwaves, on hot plates, or in pressure
vessels, etc.
• Never leave the camera on or nearelectromagnetic devices.
This may cause overheating, burning, or
exploding.
• Do not connect terminals with any metallic
objects.
• Take precautions when carrying or storingbatteries to prevent them from coming into
contact with any metal objects such as
jewelry, pins, fasteners, keys, etc.
The short circuit may cause overheating,
exploding, or burning, which burn or damageyou.
• To prevent causing battery leaks or damaging
their terminals, carefully follow all instructions
regarding the use of batteries. Never attempt
to disassemble a battery or modify it in any
way, solder, etc.
• If battery fluid gets into your eyes, flush
your eyes immediately with clear, coldrunning water and seek medical attention
immediately.
• If you cannot remove the battery from thecamera, contact an authorized distributor
or service center. Do not try to remove thebattery by force.
Damage to the battery exterior (scratches,etc.) may produce heat or an explosion.
• Always store batteries out of the reach ofsmall children and pets. If they accidentallyswallow a battery, seek medical attention
immediately.
• To prevent batteries from leaking,overheating, or causing a fire or explosion,use only batteries recommended for use withthis product.

• If rechargeable batteries have not beenrecharged within the specified time, stop
charging them and do not use them.
• Do not use batteries with scratches or damage
to the casing, and do not scratch the battery.
• Never subject batteries to strong shocks orcontinuous vibration by dropping or hitting.
This may cause exploding, overheating, orburning.
• If a battery leaks, has unusual odor, becomes
discolored or deformed, or becomesabnormal in any other way during operation,
stop using the camera, and keep away fromfire immediately.
• If a battery leaks fluid onto your clothingor skin, remove the clothing and flush theaffected area with clean, running cold water
immediately. If the fluid burns your skin, seek
medical attention immediately.
• Never use lithium-ion batteries in a lowtemperature environment. Doing so may cause
generation of heat, ignition, or explosion.
• The lithium-ion battery is designed to be used
only for the digital camera. Do not use thebattery to other devices.
• Do not allow children or animals/pets tohandle or transport batteries (prevent
dangerous behaviour such as licking,putting in mouth or chewing).

Use Only Dedicated Rechargeable
Battery, Battery Charger andUSB-AC adapter

CAUTION• Do not cover the flash with a hand whilefiring.
• The included USB-AC adapter F-7AC isdesigned to be used only with this camera.
Other cameras cannot be charged with this
USB-AC adapter.
• Do not connect the included USB-AC adapter
F-7AC to equipment other than this camera.
• Never store batteries where they will be
exposed to direct sunlight, or subjected tohigh temperatures in a hot vehicle, near aheat source, etc.

NOTICE• Do not use or store the camera in dusty or
humid places.
• Use SD/SDHC/SDXC memory cards only.
Never use other types of cards.
If you accidently insert another type of card
into the camera, contact an authorized
distributor or service center. Do not try to
remove the card by force.
• Regularly back up important data to acomputer or other storage device to prevent
accidental loss.
• Our company accepts no liability for any lossof data associated with this device.
• Be careful with the strap when you carry thecamera. It could easily catch on stray objects
and cause serious damage.
• Before transporting the camera, remove a
tripod and all other accessories made byother companies.
• Never drop the camera or subject it to severe
shocks or vibrations.
• When attaching the camera to or removing
it from a tripod, rotate the tripod screw, notthe camera.
• Do not touch electric contacts on cameras.
• Do not leave the camera pointed directlyat the sun. This may cause lens or shutter
curtain damage, color failure, ghosting on
the image pickup device, or may possibly
cause fires.
• Do not leave the viewfinder exposed to astrong light source or direct sunlight. The
heat may damage the viewfinder.
• Do not push or pull severely on the lens.
• Be sure to remove any water droplets or othermoisture from the product before replacing
the battery or opening or closing covers.
• Before storing the camera for a long period,
remove the batteries. Select a cool, drylocation for storage to prevent condensation
or mold from forming inside the camera. Afterstorage, test the camera by turning it on andpressing the shutter button to make sure that
it is operating normally.

11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

We strongly recommend that you use only
the genuine rechargeable battery, battery
charger, and USB-AC adapter specified by ourcompany with this camera. Using a non-genuine
rechargeable battery, battery charger and/or
USB-AC adapter may result in ﬁre or personal
injury due to leakage, heating, ignition or damage
to the battery. Our company does not assume
any liability for accidents or damage that may
result from the use of a battery, battery charger,
and/or USB-AC adapter that are not specified
genuine accessories.

• Keep batteries dry at all times.
• The battery may become hot during
prolonged use. To avoid minor burns, do notremove it immediately after using the camera.
• This camera uses one of our lithium-ion
batteries. Use the specified genuine battery.
There is a risk of explosion if the battery is
replaced with the incorrect battery type.
• Please recycle batteries to help save ourplanet’s resources. When you throw away
dead batteries, be sure to cover theirterminals and always observe local laws andregulations.

EN 335

11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS
336 EN• The camera may malfunction if it is used ina location where it is subject to a magnetic/
electromagnetic field, radio waves, or highvoltage, such as near a TV set, microwave,
video game, loud speakers, large monitor
unit, TV/radio tower, or transmission towers.
In such cases, turn the camera off and on
again before further operation.
• Always observe the operating environment
restrictions described in the camera’s
manual.
• Insert the battery carefully as described in theoperating instructions.
• Before loading, always inspect the battery
carefully for leaks, discoloration, warping, or
any other abnormality.
• Always unload the battery from the camera
before storing the camera for a long period.
• When storing the battery for a long period,
select a cool location for storage.
• For plug-in type USB-AC adapter:
Connect the plug-in type USB-AC adapter
F-7AC correctly by plugging it vertically into
the wall outlet.
• As the main plug of AC adapter is used to
disconnect the AC adapter from the mains,connect it to an easily accessible AC outlet.
• Power consumption by the camera varies
depending on which functions are used.
• During the conditions described below, power
is consumed continuously and the battery
becomes exhausted quickly.
• The zoom is used repeatedly.
• The shutter button is pressed halfway
repeatedly in shooting mode, activating
the auto focus.
• A picture is displayed on the monitor foran extended period of time.
• Using an exhausted battery may cause thecamera to turn off without displaying thebattery level warning.
• If the battery’s terminals get wet or greasy,camera contact failure may result. Wipe thebattery well with a dry cloth before use.
• Always charge a battery when using it for
the first time, or if it has not been used for along period.
• When operating the camera with battery
power at low temperatures, try to keep
the camera and spare battery as warm as
possible. A battery that has run down at
low temperatures may be restored after it iswarmed at room temperature.
• Before going on a long trip, and especiallybefore traveling abroad, purchase extra
batteries. A recommended battery may bedifficult to obtain while traveling.

Using the wireless LAN/
Bluetooth® functions• Turn off the camera in hospitals and otherlocations where medical equipment ispresent.
The radio waves from the camera may
adversely affect medical equipment, causing
a malfunction that results in an accident. Be
sure to disable wireless LAN/Bluetooth®
functions in the vicinity of medical equipment(P. 260).
• Turn off the camera when onboard
aircraft.
Using wireless devices onboard may hinder
safe operation of the aircraft. Be sure todisable wireless LAN/Bluetooth® functions
onboard aircraft (P. 260).
• Do not use this product where it may
interfere with nearby radar systems.

Monitor• Do not push the monitor forcibly; otherwise
the image may become vague, resulting ina playback mode failure or damage to themonitor.
• A strip of light may appear on the top/bottomof the monitor, but this is not a malfunction.
• When a subject is viewed diagonally in thecamera, the edges may appear zigzagged on
the monitor. This is not a malfunction; it willbe less noticeable in playback mode.
• In places subject to low temperatures, themonitor may take a long time to turn on or its
color may change temporarily.
When using the camera in extremely cold
places, it is a good idea to occasionally place
it in a warm place. The monitor exhibiting
poor performance due to low temperatures
will recover in normal temperatures.
• The monitor of this product is manufactured
with high-quality accuracy, however, there
may be a stuck or dead pixel on the monitor.
These pixels do not have any influenceon the image to be saved. Because of thecharacteristics, the unevenness of the color
or brightness may also be found dependingon the angle, but this is due to the structureof the monitor. This is not a malfunction.

Legal and Other Notices• Our company makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages, or benefit
expected by using this unit lawfully, or any
request from a third person, which are causedby the inappropriate use of this product.
• Our company makes no representations or
warranties regarding any damages or any
benefit expected by using this unit lawfully
which are caused by erasing picture data.

Disclaimer of Warranty• Our company makes no representations or
warranties, either expressed or implied, byor concerning any content of these writtenmaterials or software, and in no event
shall be liable for any implied warranty ofmerchantability or fitness for any particularpurpose or for any consequential, incidental
or indirect damages (including but not limited
to damages for loss of business profits,business interruption and loss of businessinformation) arising from the use or inability
to use these written materials or software
or equipment. Some countries do not allow
the exclusion or limitation of liability forconsequential or incidental damages or of
the implied warranty, so the above limitations
may not apply to you.
• Our company reserves all rights to thismanual.

Warning

Unauthorized photographing or use of
copyrighted material may violate applicable
copyright laws. Our company assumes noresponsibility for unauthorized photographing,use or other acts that infringe upon the rights ofcopyright owners.

Copyright Notice

Trademarks• Microsoft and Windows are registeredtrademarks of Microsoft Corporation.
• SDXC Logo is a trademark of SD-3C, LLC.
• Apical logo is a registeredtrademark of Apical Limited.

THIS PRODUCT IS LICENSED UNDER THE
AVC PATENT PORTFOLIO LICENSE FOR THE
PERSONAL AND NONCOMMERCIAL USE
OF A CONSUMER TO (i) ENCODE VIDEO INCOMPLIANCE WITH THE AVC STANDARD (“AVC
VIDEO”) AND/OR (ii) DECODE AVC VIDEO THATWAS ENCODED BY A CONSUMER ENGAGED
IN A PERSONAL AND NON-COMMERCIALACTIVITY AND/OR WAS OBTAINED FROM A
VIDEO PROVIDER LICENSED TO PROVIDEAVC VIDEO. NO LICENSE IS GRANTED OR
SHALL BE IMPLIED FOR ANY OTHER USE.
ADDITIONAL INFORMATION MAY BE OBTAINEDFROM MPEG LA, L.L.C. SEE HTTP://WWW.
MPEGLA.COM
The software in this camera may include third
party software. Any third party software is subject
to the terms and conditions, imposed by theowners or licensors of that software, under whichsoftware is provided to you.
Those terms and other third party software
notices, if any, may be found in the software
notice PDF file stored athttps://support.jp.omsystem.com/en/support/
imsg/digicamera/download/notice/notice.html

11
SAFETY PRECAUTIONS

All rights reserved. No part of these writtenmaterials or this software may be reproduced
or used in any form or by any means, electronic
or mechanical, including photocopying andrecording or the use of any type of information
storage and retrieval system, without the priorwritten permission of our company. No liability
is assumed with respect to the use of theinformation contained in these written materials
or software, or for damages resulting from theuse of the information contained therein. Our
company reserves the right to alter the featuresand contents of this publication or software
without obligation or advance notice.

• Micro Four Thirds, Four Thirds, and theMicro Four Thirds and Four Thirds logos aretrademarks or registered trademarks of the
OM Digital Solutions Corporation in Japan, theUnited States, the countries of the European
Union, and other countries.
• Wi‑Fi is a registered trademark of the Wi‑Fi
Alliance.
• The Bluetooth® word mark and logos
are registered trademarks owned by theBluetooth SIG, Inc. and any use of suchmarks by OM Digital Solutions Corporation isunder license.
• The standards for camera file systems
referred to in this manual are the “Design
Rule for Camera File System/DCF” standards
stipulated by the Japan Electronics andInformation Technology Industries Association(JEITA).
• QR Code is a trademark of Denso Wave Inc.
• All other company and product names areregistered trademarks and/or trademarks of
their respective owners.

EN 337

Additions/modifications by firmware
update

12

The following functions are added/modified by firmware update.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

12338 EN

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.6g

Smartphone Connection Security Settings

338

Default settings

339

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.7gCompatible Memory Cards for Movie Recording

339

Operating the menu with the D button (Menu operation by D)

339

Default settings

339

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.6
Setting Smartphone Connection Security (d Connection Security)
Set the security when connecting to a smartphone via Wi-Fi.
Menu

MENU n e n4. Wi-Fi/Bluetooth n d Settings n d Connection
Security# If set to [WPA2/WPA3], a smartphone may not be connected via Wi-Fi. In such a case, set
to [WPA2].
# Changing the settings will change both the Wi-Fi connection password and Bluetooth®
connection passcode.
# Pair the camera and a smartphone again after changing passwords. g "Pairing the
Camera and Smartphone (Wi-Fi Connection)" (P. 261)
# Executing [Reset d Settings] (P.266) will initialize [d Connection Security].

Default settings*1: Can be added to [Assign].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Initialize All Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Reset Shooting Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].

e Tab
Function

Default

*1

*2

*3

d Connection Security

WPA2/WPA3―――

Additions/modifications by the firmware version 1.7
Compatible Memory Cards for Movie Recording
Added high-speed movie recording to the movie shooting conditions whenrecommending UHS-II or UHS-I card with a UHS speed class of 3 or better.

Operating the menu with the D button (Menu operation by D)

You can enable a setting to use the D button instead of the MENU button to operatemenus. Use this feature if you would like to use your right hand to use the MENU
button during shooting in some situations.
Menu

MENU n G n 1. Operations n Button Settings n Menu
operation by D

Yes

The D button operates as the MENU button on the shooting
standby and menu screens, and as the D button on the playback
screen.

No

The D button operates as the D button only.

Additions/modifications by firmware update

Page
4. Wi-Fi/Bluetoothd Settings

12

Default settings*1: Can be added to [Assign].
*2: Default can be restored by selecting [Initialize All Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].
*3: Default can be restored by selecting [Reset Shooting Settings] for [Reset/Initialize Settings].

G Tab
Page
1. Operations
ButtonSettings

Function
Menu operation by D

Default
No

*1

*2

*3

―



―

EN 339IndexSymbols#+WB................................................154#RC Mode.........................................298# Slow Limit......................................124# X-Sync...........................................124
0 (Protect)......................................193
0 (Uploading Pictures).................284
8.......................................................251
aImage stabilizer...............................138
B Auto Reset.................................. 110
d Connection Password.....................267
e in MF mode..................................84
g Loop in Menu Tab..........................238
G Settings........................................207
jImage stabilizer.............................138
KK Detailed Settings....................143
KNMode Settings...........................78
KN Set Home.................................98
KAF+MF............................................82
KAF by half-pressing a....................83
KAF Focus Adjustment......................95
KAF Limiter........................................92
KAF Scanner.....................................94
KAF Target Mode Settings.................79
KC-AF Center Priority........................86
KFace & Eye AF Button.....................89
KISO-A Lowest S/S......................... 115
K LV Mode.......................................225
K Night Vision..................................225
KOrientation Linked N....................97
KPicture Mode Settings...................149
K Save Settings...............................243
n N Display Pattern.......................253
nC-AF Speed.....................................87nHDMI Output..................................182n Mode (Movie exposure modes........60
n (Movie recording)............................59
n Shutter Function............................216
N Loop Settings..............................100
N Select Screen Settings..................99
NSpot Metering............................... 112

340 ENN Battery Priority.............................253
N Battery Status..............................253
qRFunction....................................205
qa Default Setting.........................205
qDial Function.................................205
qInfo Settings..................................206
R (automatic rotation)......................205v Lock...............................................223
V K Grid Settings...........................235
V K Info Settings...........................232
V a Level Gauge.............................233
W.....................................................257
W Keep Warm Color
Movie...............................................154
Still image........................................154
WLock..............................................153
x+F................................................124
X Settings.........................................257
z Lock...............................................224A
A (Aperture priority AE)........................45
Accessories........................................301
AdobeRGB.........................................155
AEL by half-pressing a...................... 111
AE lock...............................................109
AF Area Pointer....................................96
AF Illuminator.......................................96
AF ModeMovie.................................................72
Still image..........................................72
AF-ON button.......................................83
AF Targeting Pad................................101
AF Target Mode....................................77
AF Target Point.....................................76
AF tracking (C-AF+TR).........................73
Airplane Mode....................................260
All x
Movie...............................................153
Still image........................................153
Anti-Flicker LV....................................226

Anti-Flicker Shooting..........................135
Anti-shockr settings.........................131
Aperture-Priority AE..............................45
Art LV Mode........................................226
Assign Save Folder....................244, 246
Assign to Custom Mode.......................56
Audio Playback...................................199
Audio recording..................................199
Auto Power Off...................................254

B
B (Long Exposures).............................51
Backlit LCD.........................................254
Balanced flash metering.....................125
Battery charge................................22, 23
Battery level..........................................30
Battery level display...........................253
Bluetooth............................................262
Bluetooth®..........................................260
Bracketing (BKT)AE BKT............................................174
ART BKT..........................................177
FL BKT.............................................175
Focus BKT.......................................178
ISO BKT...........................................176
WB BKT...........................................175
Bulb......................................................51
BULB/TIME/COMP Settings...............173
Button Function
Movie...............................................208
Still image........................................208

C
Cable clip..............................................19
Cable protector.....................................19
C-AF+TR (AF tracking).........................73
C-AF (Continuous AF)..........................72
C-AF Sensitivity
Movie.................................................87
Still image..........................................87
Calendar display.................................191
Calendar playback..............................189
CALL function.....................................293
Card......................................................24

Card Formatting.................................241
Card Slot Settings
Movie...............................................242
Still image........................................242
Center marker....................................183
Certification........................................258
Charger..............................................294
Charging via USB...........................22, 23
Color Space........................................155
Compatible flash units........................ 118
Composite Settings..............................54
Compression rate.......................140, 327
Connection
Computer.................................267, 283
Smartphone.....................................260
Continuous AF......................................72
Continuous AF (C-AF)..........................72
Copy
Copy................................................193
Copy All............................................194
Copyright Info.....................................247
Copy Select........................................197
Custom Mode (C1/C2/C3/C4)............56

D
Dial Direction......................................218
Dial Function
Movie...............................................216
Still image........................................216
Digital Tele-converter
Movie...............................................166
Still image........................................166
Diopter adjustment...............................37
Direct button.........................................66
dpi Settings.........................................247
DPOF..................................................198

E
Edit
JPEG...............................................201
RAW.................................................200
Edit Filename.....................................245
Electronic Zoom.................................212
Electronic Zoom Settings...................222

EN 341Erase..................................................194
Erase All.............................................194
Erase Selected...................................197
EVF Adjust..........................................250
EVF Style...........................................228
EV Step..............................................107
Exposure compensation.....................106
Exposure shift.....................................107
Eyecup...............................................301
Eye detection frame.............................90
Eye Sensor Settings...........................250

F
Face & Eye Detection...........................88
Face Priority.......................................212
File format..................................140, 327
File Name...........................................244
File size..............................................327
Firmware Version...............................258
Fisheye Compensation.......................171
Flash........................................... 118, 297
Flash Exposure Comp........................123
Flash mode settings...........................123
Flash photography.............................. 118
Flicker scanMovie...............................................108
Still image........................................108
Fn Lever
Movie...............................................219
Still image........................................219
Focus Ring.........................................104
Focus Ring Lock.................................212
Focus Stacking...................................160
Frame Rate........................................225
Movie...............................................328
Frame size..........................................328

G
Grid Settings
Movie...............................................234
Still image........................................234

342 ENH
Handheld assist..................................139
HDMI..................................................288
HDMI Settings....................................251
HDR (High Dynamic Range)..............162
High Res Shot
(High resolution shooting)..............156
High-speed movie..............................142
Histogram display.................................38
Histogram Settings.............................236

I
Image aspect......................................144
Image Overlay....................................203
Image quality
Movie...............................................141
Still image........................................140
Image Review.......................................42
Image size..................................140, 327
Image stabilizer
Movie...............................................136
Still image........................................136
Index display......................................191
Index playback...................................189
INFO button...........................38, 65, 187
Info by half-pressing a......................231
Information display
Playback..........................................186
Info Settings
Movie...............................................230
Still image........................................230
In-Movie Image Capture.....................204
Interchangeable lenses......................291
Interval Shooting................................167
ISO-A Upper/Default
Movie............................................... 114
Still image........................................ 114
ISO-Auto
Movie............................................... 115
Still image........................................ 115
ISO-Auto Set
Still image........................................ 113
ISO sensitivity..................................... 113
ISO step............................................. 114

K
Keystone Comp..................................170

L
Language.....................................33, 257
Lens Info Settings...............................246
Lens I.S. Priority.................................139
Level Adjust........................................258
Level Disp........................................... 211
Level gauge display..............................38
Lighten Blending (B: Live composite
photography)....................................54
Live Bulb...............................................51
Live ND shooting................................158
Live Time..............................................51
Location data......................................259
Long exposures (B: Bulb/Time)............51
Low ISO Processing........................... 116
LV Close Up Mode..............................223
LV super control panel.................. 69, 311
LV Super control panel....................... 311

M
M (Manual Exposure)...........................49
Manual Exposure.................................49
Manual focus (MF)...............................72
Menu.................................... 63, 241, 311
Menu Cursor Settings.........................237
Metering.............................................109
Metering during B.......................... 110
Metering during j............................ 112
MF (AF/MF toggle).............................209
MF Assist............................................102
MF Clutch...................................104, 292
MF (Manual focus)...............................72
Monitor Adjust.....................................249
Motion compensation.........141, 142, 328
Movie exposure mode..........................60
Movie playback...................................189
Movie recording..............................59, 61
Movie resolution.........................141, 142
Movie Trimming..................................204
Multi Function.....................................215
Multi Function Settings.......................236

Multiple Exposure...............................163
Multi Selector
Settings.........................................218
My Menu.............................................239
Add..................................................239
Manage............................................240

N
Noise filter
Movie............................................... 116
Still image........................................ 116
Noise reduction.................................. 117

O
One-touch white balance....................152

P
P (Program AE)....................................43
Peaking Settings................................103
Picture mode
Movie...............................................145
Picture Mode
Still image........................................145
Pixel Mapping.............................258, 305
Playback
Movie...............................................189
Still image........................................188
Playback frame rate...................141, 142
Playback zoom (a)...........................190
Position information............................266
Power Battery Holder.........................295
Power-off Standby..............................263
Preset MF distance............................104
Preset MF (PreMF)...............................73
Press-and-hold Time..........................224
Print order...........................................198
Priority Set..........................................238
Pro Capture shooting.........................133
Program AE..........................................43
Program shift (Ps)................................44
Protect................................................193
Protect selected..................................197
Ps (Program shift)................................44

EN 343

Q
Quick Erase........................................195
Quick Sleep Mode..............................255

R
Rating.................................................196
Rating Selected..................................197
Rating Settings...................................197
RAW+JPEG h...................................196
RAW+JPEG Erase.....................194, 195
RAW image........................................140
RC mode............................................298
Recall from Custom Mode....................58
Red Frame during RREC..................185
Release Priority....................................84
Remote Control..................................279
Remote shooting
Live View.........................................265
Remote Shutter................................265
Reset All Images................................198
Reset/Initialize Settings......................257
Reset Lens.........................................105
Rotate.................................................193

S
S (Shutter priority AE)..........................47
S-AF (Single AF)..................................72
Save Settings.....................................246
Save Slot............................................246
Selfie Assist........................................227
Self-timer............................................126
Self-timer settings...............................130
Sensor frame rate...............................327
Sequential shooting............................126
Sequential shooting settings..............128
SET function.......................................293
Shading Comp....................................144
Share Order........................................195
Share Order Selected.........................197
Shooting Menu...................................313
Shooting modes...................................39
Shutter-Priority AE................................47
Silent s Settings...............................132

344 EN

Silent controls.......................................62
Single AF (S-AF)..................................72
Sleep............................................30, 254
Sound Recording Settings..................180
sRGB..................................................155
Starry Sky AF (FAF)...........................74
Starry Sky AF Setting...........................85
Storage...............................................286
Subject detection..................................90
Super control panel..............................69
Super Spot AF......................................80

T
Test Picture.........................................210
Time......................................................51
Touch screen
Playback..........................................191
Shooting.............................................41
Touchscreen Settings.........................249

U
USB Power Delivery...........................287
USB Settings......................................252
User registration.....................................2V
View Assist (nView Assist)...........155

W
White balance.....................................150
Wi-Fi/Bluetooth Settings.....................272
Wi-Fi Connection................................271
Computer.........................................267
Smartphone.....................................261
Wi-Fi PC Settings...............................276
Wireless remote control flash(# RC Mode).................................298
Wireless Remote Flash Control(#RC Mode)..................................124

Z
Zebra Pattern Settings.......................184
Zoom frame........................................206
Zoom frame AF/Zoom AF.....................80

date of issue 2022.02.

https://www.om-digitalsolutions.com/

2022

WD838702